An elementry Germann grammar
Google 



This is a digital copy of a book that was prcscrvod for generations on library shelves before it was carefully scanned by Google as part of a project 

to make the world's books discoverablc onlinc. 

It has survived long enough for the copyright to cxpirc and the book to cntcr the public domain. A public domain book is one that was never subject 

to copyright or whose legal copyright term has expircd. Whcthcr a book is in the public domain may vary country to country. Public domain books 

are our gateways to the past, representing a wealth of history, cultuie and knowledge that's often difficult to discovcr. 

Marks, notations and other maiginalia present in the original volume will appear in this flle - a reminder of this book's long journey from the 

publishcr to a library and fmally to you. 

Usage guidelines 

Google is proud to partner with libraries to digitize public domain materials and make them widely accessible. Public domain books belong to the 
public and we are merely their custodians. Nevertheless, this work is expensive, so in order to keep providing this resource, we have taken stcps to 
prevent abuse by commercial parties, including placing technical restrictions on automated querying. 
We also ask that you: 

+ Make non-commercial use of the filés We designed Google Book Search for usc by individuals, and we request that you use these files for 
personal, non-commercial purposes. 

+ Refrainfivm automated querying Do not send automated queries of any sort to Google's system: If you are conducting research on machine 
translation, optical character recognition or other areas where access to a laige amount of text is helpful, please contact us. We encourage the 
use of public domain materials for these purposes and may be able to help. 

+ Maintain attributionTht GoogXt "watermark" you see on each flle is essential for informingpeopleabout this project andhelping them lind 
additional materials through Google Book Search. Please do not remove it. 

+ Keep it legal Whatever your use, remember that you are lesponsible for ensuring that what you are doing is legal. Do not assume that just 
because we believe a book is in the public domain for users in the United States, that the work is also in the public domain for users in other 
countries. Whether a book is still in copyright varies from country to country, and we can'l offer guidance on whelher any speciflc use of 
any speciflc book is allowed. Please do not assume that a book's appearance in Google Book Search means it can be used in any manner 
anywhere in the world. Copyright infringement liabili^ can be quite seveie. 

Äbout Google Book Search 

Google's mission is to organize the world's information and to make it universally accessible and useful. Google Book Search helps rcaders 
discovcr the world's books while helping authors and publishers reach new audiences. You can search through the full text of this book on the web 

at |http : //books . google . com/| 





ELE!^.' 


fENTAR" 


Y 




GERMAN 


! GRAM 


M/ 


.R 


CHAP.LI 


;s FISCHA 
2lt 


RT 










lllllll 



600084406S 




GERMAN OICTiONARY FOR ENaUSH STUOERTS OF OERMAN. 



Lately published, in One thick Volume, post 8vo. of 1,182 pages, 

price 7«. 6d. doth, 

NEW PRA.CTICAL 

GERMM-MGLISH DIOTIONAEY. 

German and Enéllsh—Enéllsh and German, 

ooNTAXimra thb FOLLowiNa hiprovkments: 

1. Kew Words in general nse not to be fonnd in otber Biotionaries. 

2. Componnd Words not translated literally. 

8. Frepositions annexed to Verbs and Adjeotives wbere necessary. 

4. Meanings of Words separated by Fignres, and Bireotions 

distingnisliing their varions acceptatiöns. 

5. Idiomatio expressions with tbeir proper JBqaivalents in eaob 

Langnage. 

BY THB 

Kev. W. L. BLACKLÉY, M.A. 



AND 



CM. FEIEDLANDEE, M.D. Ph.D. 



OPINIONS of thiå DICT10NÅR7, 



«0v dlctlonarlea md sotaool books it la 
impossible to form aay opinion wlthout 
havingput them to the practical test of 
use. we must, taowever, give Blaoklkt 
and FaiBDLXaDB&'8 German Dictlouary 
great praise for its ^rpograpby and me- 
chanleal arrangement. As täx^ too, as we 
liave examlned It, the prömises In tbe 
preface, of conclseness and facllitj of 
reference, haye been fftlttaf nlly kept.' 

WBSTHnrSTBB Rktikw. 

' WiTHXN a yolnine oll moderate size 
.;.tlie joint-Authors bave constnicted a 
\^ élotlonary whlch la oerti^n to come Into 
^ayonr with yonng students; for they 
wili flnd in It a measure of help not 
to be had elsewbere except in works 
of much hlgher price and larger preten- 
•ions. Tbe plan adopted for distinguisk- 
ing the varlous appUcatlons of tbe same 
word Is Tery clear and satisfactory ; tbe 
eare bestowed npon the renderlngof the 
Uiomatic proverbial phrases is above 
•11 praise.' 

PAPEBS fW (A« SOHOOLKASTBB. 

•Tras dictionary ia pre-eminently 
practical in the best sense of the word. 
Oraltting nothlng that Is likely to be 
waoted In the course of ordlnary study, 
tt la yet of such moderate dimensions 



as to be convenlent for general use. 
It Is based upon the best and latest 
autborlties, and bäring been compiled by 
editors of tbe two nations, is not marred 
by that Inequallty of execution which is 
almost inevitable in such a work from 
a single band. We have found in it 
meanings absent from larger dictionHrles. 
This applles particularly to technical 
meanings, which not unfrequently occiir, 
and are here amply supplied. The arrange- 
ment of the materials is also well suited 
for practical use, being simple aud con- 
sistent throughout. Idiomatlc and pro- 
yerbial sayings are rendered with great 
aptness and correctness. The English- 
German part is remarkably good. To 
preyent the posslbility uf such absurd 
blunders as are often perpetnated by 
English students in writiug German, tbe 
yariuus senses of the English word are 
given, with tbe apprupriate rendcring of 
each, whereas most dictionarles merely 
give all the German meanings in succes- 
sion, wichout specifying the particular 
cases to whlch they severally apply. No 
one can have the least difficulty in select- 
ing from this dictionary the pra\)ieT 
German equivalenb tot «asi ■^VkSj>\'Ä«N. '»wt.^ 
in «aj coTiTiex\na: Ks.^^»»Ks>a.. 



London: lONGMANS and CO. ^^ÄÄmo^^ex ^S^^ 



MR. C. F. FISCHAET'S 
GERMAN WORKS FOR SCHOOLS. 

AN EIiSMENTABT GEBMAN GBAMMAB, with Ezercises 
for Beading and Translatioiu Sixth Edition, greatly improved and thoronghly 
levised. Fcp. Svo., pp. 191. With Gerodan Word and Fhrase Book boond in 
ene. 2«. Cd. 

This worky pttbltshed October 1866, hos now readied its Sixth Edition, a proof of itå 
use/ulness and poptiiarity, 

London : Lokouans, Gbeen, and Co. " 

GEBMAN ^WOBD and FHBASE book (A Supplement to 
the above), coptaining many wQrds of recent date largely used in Conversation ; 
with a complete Key to the G^erman Declensibns, nuinerous Tables of Verbs, 
extracts from the * Yicar of Wakefield ' for translation into Grerman, with a 
model Translation, &o. Price 9d. 

Edinburgh : James Thin, Sonth Bridge. 



GEBMAN STOBIES, with the Eeading Fieces in English t3rpe on 
the page opposite to thé G^erman, a complete Tocabnlary, the Easentials of Ger- 
man Accidence for immediate reference, and a series of Imitative Exercises. 
Third Edition, enlarged and revised. Frice ]«. 6d, lin press. 

This little volume is eminently adapted for young beginners, and may be ttsed in con^ 
Junciion with any Elementary German Course, or by itself. 

A NEW GEBMAN BEADEB, in Prose and Verse ; with a 
(3-rammatical and Etymological Yocabnlary. Fcp. 8vo., pp. 452. 3«. 6<2. 

Edinburgh : Oliver and Boyd. 

Ready for Press : — 

AN ADVANCED GEBMAN BE ADEB, with Vocabulary. Zs.Sd. 



GEBMAN EXAMINATION FAFEBS, for Junior and Advanced 
Stndents and Beginners of Gkrman. Pablished quarterly. Annual Subscriptioa 
entitling to 100 Copies, forwarded every quarter, One G-ninea. 

GEBMAN EXEBCISE BOOKS, ruled for G-erman Handwriting. 

A Graduated Series of Foor Books. Obloug, 7^ by 4^ inches. Price 2d. and 

npwartls. '"* •% 

These books have, af ter a trial of ttco yenrs, proved very stuxessfUl, WhUft they assist 

the pupil in acquiring a Oood German Hand, they enable the Master to look. över förty 

or fif ty Exercises in Uss (han ten mintttes, .%'■-' 



WORKS IN PREPARATION:^ 

A NEW MANTTAIi OP GEBMAN PBOSB COMPOSITION. 

With Concise Notes and a Complete Vocabulary. 

EXTBAGTS EBOM THE GEBMAN CIiASSICS, with Notes 
and Commentary. WiU be issued in Shilling Kumbers. 

Vol. i.— The Prosb WRrrERs of Germany. 
„ n.— The Poets of Germany. 
„ III.— The Dramatists op Germany. 

This work, aceompanied by numerovs biographical and eritieal notices, is intended to 
give a complete digest of German LUeraturefrom the earliest to the present time. 



AN ELEM.ENTAEY 



GERMAN GRAMMAR, 



WTTH 



KZXBOISES FOB BEADINa AND TBANSLATION. 



DJfiSieirra) FOB THE T7SE OF STUDENTS IN SCH00L8 

AND OOLLEGES^ AND CANDIDATES PBEPABING 

FOB PUBLIC EXAMINATIONS. 



BY 



CHARLES FISCHBR-PISCHART, 

Of the Edinbargh Merdumt Oompaay*i Educational Inititution for Youag LadiM t 

George Watson*! Ck)llefire-Sohoola for Boya « Daniel Stewarfs Institution, etc. 

Author of *' German StorieB," **New German Beader/Veto. 




SIXTH EDITION. 



(^th Supplement, 2«. M,) 



LONDON : 
LONGMANS, GREEN, AND CO. 

1872. 

Tkt right of traUlaivm U rtserDt*. 



FESCHAETS NEW EXERdS&BOOKS 

EULED FOR 

GEEMÅN HÅND-WRITING, 

AND ABBAHaED IN FBOGBESSIYB OBDBB. 

No. I. LARGE HAND, 

No. IL MEDIUM. 

No. IIL AOT rv. SMALL HAND. 

ObloDg, 7^ in* hy 4| in. In stiff covers, price 2d, each, with 

discount for large orders. 



London: Longiians, Green, and Co. 



\* BooJkaeilers desirous of beoommg agents for these books can have 
theiir name printed on the cover, and are requested to cofnmimicate toith 
the Äuthor, 



PREFACE. 



The authob has endeavoured to produce an Elementary 
Grammar^ illustrated by Exercises^ which, within a 
small compass^ shall give a clear insight into the nature 
and genius of the German language — showing the 
growth of its forms, the peculiarities of its idioms, and 
the structure of its sentences ; the latter being perhaps 
one of the greatest difiSculties which beset the student 
of this language. 

The average time devoted to German being in many 
schools only two hours a week, it is of the greatest im- 
portanee to afiford a thorough groundmg in the Ele- 
ments of the language in as short a time as possible. 
This may be done, with the help of a well-arranged 
and concise Grammar and Exercise-book, in less than 
a year, and even in half-a-year. The student ought 
then to be able to read any easy author -with the hel^ 
of a dictionary. To attain ttoa eiÄ^>JcÄ^x^^«^^^'^^'^ 



iv prefa(5b. 

iinlike most other Grammaxs, now in use, is designed. 
The author trusts that, as it ensures a more accurate 
knowledge of the German language, it will be found 
of material assistance to students in Grammar Schools 
and Colleges, and to candidates preparing for Public 
Examinations. 

October 1866. 



ADVERTISEMENT TO THE SIXTH EDITIOlSr. 

The Elementary German Grammar, first published 
in 1866, has now reached its sixth edition — a proof of 
its usefulness and popularity. It has been introduced 
into many public and private schools, and in Edinburgh 
alone it is in the hands of nearly one thousand students 
of German. 

The publishers were enabled to reduce the original 
•price to la. 6c?., but with the addition of 67 pages of 
new matter it has become necessary to revert to the 
original price of 28. 6d. 

The new Supplement comprises : — 

1. A complete key to the declensions of nouns, by meana 
of which the declension of almost any German substantiye 
may be determined. 

2. Three tables of verbs, showing the conjugation of a 
German verb in fidl| with Examples for practice. 



PREFACE. V 

. 8. A table of strong verbs, indicating their vowel changes, 
and arranged in such a manner that in iinding their prin- 
cipal parts the student may exercise his own ingenuity, 

4. A table illustrating the intercbange of consonants in 
German and English. 

5. A Word and Phrase-book containing more than 800 
words largely used in every-day conversation. 

6. A German version of the 20th chapter of * The Vicar 
of Wakefield/ with the English added, 

Experience has confirmed that few pupils carry away 
with them, after many months of study, a vocabulary of 
any range or variety ; and thus, from a want of a stock 
of every-day words, their knowledge of German becomes 
often practically useless. By leaming regularly, say 
only ten words twice a week (independently of the 
lesson in the Grammar), the student would, in the 
course of one school-year, become familiar with at least 
800 words. To attain this very desirable end, the 
Word and Phrase-book has been added, and the 
German version of the 20th chapter of the ' Vicar of 
Wakefield ' may be made to serve the same purpose. 
The Word and Phrase-book alone contains more than 
800 words of common occurrence, without which a 
conversational knowledge of the language (frequently 
one of the chief aims of the student of German) is 
hardly possible. 

In adding sixteen pages of reading matter, preference 
has been given to a GeiioaÄ "set&vsvi ofl ^ ^»j^-v^^^ 



VI PREFACE. 

familiar to all EDglish students. Its main object is to 
teach the learner from the very beginning to read a 
connected narrative fluently, and help to familiarise 
him with the intricacies and niceties of German con- 
struction by comparing the German version with the 
English original, and thus to lay the foundation to a 
reaxlier understanding of an original German piece 
when placed before him afterwards. 

Without marring the original design of the book, it 
has been the author's endeavour to make such additions 
and improvements, dictated by experience,as will tend to 
increase the nsefulness and popularity of the Elementary 
German Grammar as a class-book for large classes in 
public and private schools, 

C. F.-F. 

19 CxTUBEBLAin) Stbbbt, IIoinbuboh: 
May 1872. 



\* In reply^ to numerous and constant inquiries as to the best 
German dictionary, the author of the * Elementary German Grammar ' 
begs to State that Blackley and Friedländer's dictionary is at present 
almost the only German dictionary originally compiled for the nse of 
English students of German. All the other German dictionaries are 
merely reprints, or very poor adaptations, from English dictionaries 
originally pnblished in Germany, and intended for the nse of German 
students of English ; hence they lack the distinctive features and 
elements of a good German dictionary designed to supply the wants of 
the English student of German. 



CONTENTS. 



PAGB 

i:*BEFACB • • • . • ▼ 

CoNTKMTS . • yii 

The Author's Plan of UsiNa ms Book zii 

Intbodttction to Gbbuan Handwbitino (with numerous speci- 

mens) xiii 

Intboduction to thb Ebadiko of German: — 

§ 1. TheAlphabet 1 

§ 2. Quantity — 

§ 3. Simple Vowels 2 

§ 4. Inflected Vowels — 

§ 5. Diphthongs • • — 

§ 6. Combinations of Vowels •••... — 

S 7. The Vowel e — 

How TO Fbonottnob thb Consonants: — 

§ 8. b/t)/0 8 

§ 9. 5 - 

§ 10. tt) — 

§ 11. f/ »/ P<) — 

§ 12. d)é/ Ctör P — 

§ 13. @, f/ Ö — 

§ 14. fd^ 4 

§ 16. fP/ ft - 

i 16. (Sfyåi — 

§ 17. a - 

§18. ti . - 

&uua OF Obthoobafht. — § 19, § 20 * 



VUl 



CONTENTS. 



(JKAMMAB AND EXERCISES. 




Lbsson i. Present Indicative of * fetn' 

Lesson II. Present Indicative of* ]()aben' . 

Eule 1. The Third Person Plural ; how used 

Lbsson III. The Definite and Indefinite Artides 
First, or Weak, Dedension of Nouns . 
Bules 2, 3, and 4. On Feminine Nouns, &c 

Lbsson IV. Second, or Strong, Dedension of Nouns 

Eules 5, 6, 7. Vowel Inflection ; Masculines and Neuters 

Lbsson V. Third, or Mixed, Dedension of Nouns 

Eules 8 and 9. Feminines, Masculines, and Neuters; WtUttttt 
^^ii&c 

liBSsoN YL Demonstrative and Possessive Pronouns; how de 
clined. Eules 10 and 11. lists of Pronouns 

Lesson VII. Compound Tenses of Verbs ; Perfect and Future 
Eules 12 and 13. Order of Words in an Independent Sen 
tence ....... 

Observation 1. The e of the Dative of Nouns ; when omitted 

Lesson VIII. Eule 14. General Eule on the Nominative Plural 

of Nouns 

Eule 15. Proper Names; hiow dedined . • . . 

Lesson IX. Eule 16. Comparison of Adjectivcs . . . 
Eule 17. List of Adjectives inflecting the Vowel • • 
Eule 18. nu, than 



FAGE 
6 



8 
9 

10 
12 



14 
16 

17 
18 



20 



Lbsson X. Dedension of Adjectives : — 

First Dedension (Eule 19) 21 

Observation 2, JDer meinigc/ &c . .... 22 

Lesson XI. Second Dedension of Adjectives (Eule 20) • « 
Observation 3. fD^etnet/ &c 



23 



Lesson XII. Third Dedension of A^'ectiyes (Eule 21) . . 2& 
■^e 22. The A^jective used as a Substantive, how declined — ' 



CONTENTS. 



ix 



IdnsoN XHL Numeral Adjeetives ; Oidinals and Cardinals 
Observation 4. On the Declension of ett)/ 31t)CV hvtu &c. 
Bule 23. Nnmerals; how declined .... 
Observation 6. *0f ; ' when not translated . 
Observation 6. On *»ie(/ me^r^ »enig' 

Lesson XIV. Personal Prononns and Heflectives 

Observations 7 and 8. Place of Pronouns in a Sentence 

I4B8SON XV. Interrogativo Prononns 

Bules 24 and 25. fOec and »aé j how nsed 

Lbsson XVL Eelative Prononns 

Observation 9. When to nse 'welc^er,* and when *ber* 
Bnles 26 and 27. The Subordinate Sentence ; how constmcted 

Lesson XVII. Anxiliaries of Tense 

Bnles 28 and 29. When to use the German Imperfect, and 

when the Perfect 

Observation 10. Agreement of the Verb . 

Lessok XVIII. Anxiliaries of Mood !5nnen/ bärfen^ magen 

Lesson XIX. Anxiliaries of Mood folien/ IDClIen/ muffen . 

Bule 30. How to form the Compound Tenses of the above 
Verbs 

Lesson XX. Weak and Strong Verbs. Observations 11 and 12 
Conjngation of Weak, or Begiilar, Verbs 

Lbsson XXI. Weak and Strong Verbs ; Boot Verbs and Deri 
vatives. Observations 13 and 14 . 
Gonjugätion of Strong, or Irregular, Verbs ; First Glass of 
Strong Verbs . ..... 

Lesson XXII. Second Olass of Strong Verbs • 

Lesson XXTTT. Third Glass of Strong Verbs . 

Lesson XXIV. Fourth Glass of Strong Verbs . 

Verbs of Mixed Inflection - 

Lbsson XXV. Formation of the Gomponnd Tenses of Verbs 
Observation 16. Observation 16. SBÖrbe . 
Observation 17. SBo?)(/ ja/ tenn/ auåjf bann/ bod) . 
Observation 18. ' That, bap $ ' when supplied . 

Lbsson XXVL Formation of the Passive Voice 
Bule 31. Obserrations 19 and 20. *^o\^CYV^ 
Note. Titles given to Ladies 



FAOB 

27 

28 
29 

30 
31 

32 

33 
34 

36 

37 
38 
40 

41 

42 
43 

44 

45 
47 
49 
61 

63 

54 
56 



\J^ 



GONTENTS. 



Lesson XXVn. Conjngation of Compound Verbs :^- 

I. Separable Compounds • • • • • 
Bules 32 and 33. (List of Separable Partides, see p. 91) 

II. Inseparable Compounds. Bule 34. Inseparable Partides 
Obserration 21. Participle Past of Inseparable Verbs 
Observation 22. ' fGSelci)er ; ' when supplied . 
Observation 23. The Infinitive witb ju 5 when nsed 

Lbssok XXVIII. IIL Separable and Inseparable Componnds 
Bule 35. Separable and Inseparable Particles • 
Observation 24 



Jjbsson XXIX. Conjngation of a Verb with the Eeflective 
Prononn : — 

1. In the Accnsative 

2. In the Dative. Observation 25 • • • 
Observation 26 



liBssoN XXX. Conjngation of Impersonal Verbs : — 

1. Subjective 

2. Objective ; with an Accnsative ; with a Dative • 

Lbsson XXXL The Co-ordinate Sentence: — 

Rule 36. Inverted Order of Words, when employed 
Co-ordinate Conjunctions. Observation 27 . 

Li&ssoK XXXn. List of Prepositions . • 

Observation 28. Combinations of Prepositions • 

Lbsson XXXIII. The Subordinate Sentence : — 

Observation 29. Nonn, Adjective, Adverbial Sentence 

On the Order of Words 

Bule 37. Connectives of the Nonn-Sentence ennmerated 
Combinations like *tOO^t* ezplained and ennmerated . 
Bule 38. Connectives of the Adjective-Sentence . 
Observation 31. Combinations like * bafftt;* and *^Uxftlt* ez 
plained and ennmerated • • • • 

Lbsson XXXIV. :— 

Bule 39. Connectives of the Adverbial Sentence classified 
and ennmerated (list of Subordinate Conjunctions) • 

Lbsson XXXV. The Subjunctive : — 

I. Of the Auziliaries of Tense 

n. „ „ Mood 

Wben 28 the Subjunctive used ? Bules 40, 41, and 42 • 



PAOB 

57 
58 
59 



76 

78 
79 



CONTENTS. XI 

PAOB 

^XVI. The Subjunctive. III. Of Weak and Strong 
'erbs; the Imperative ; the Conditional . . 81-83 
CXVU. Special Bnles on the Usa of the Subjunctive . 84 

APPENDIX I. 

[SCELLANEOUS EXBSCISES ÅKD HULES, WITH WOBDS. 

åder English Participial Pbrases . • . .88 

initive without ' jU * 88 

ider English Participial Phrases 91 

3eparable Particles 91 

idjectives ; on Ad verbs 92-93 

md • offen ;* on * ^er ' and * ]j)in ' 94 

n on * man,* * bann,' and '»ann* 96 

APPENDIX II. 

LCCOTJNT OF THE GeBMAK LaNGUAGB • • • . 97 

is the Yowel Inflection, and when is it obseryed ? . 98 
APPENDIX m. 

^ABY YOCABXTLABIES •••••.. 107 

lPPENDIX rV. (Supplement to the Sixth Edition). 

HE DeCLENSIONS OF NOTTNS 124-133 

APPENDIX V. 
I OF Yebbs conjugated in full • • . 134-139 

APPENDIX VI. 
Stbong Yebbs 140-144 

APPENDIX YII. 

7GE OF CONSONANTS IN GeBMAN AND EnOLISH . 145-146 

APPENDIX YIII. 

D PhBASE-BoOK OF ABOUT 800 WOBDS AND PhBASBS 

nXY EMPLOYED IN CONVERSATION . . . .147 

APPENDIX IX. 
F Wakefield,* Chap. XX., German Yersion, for 

r 161-177 

)F Wakefield/ Chap. XX., English Yersion, for 

ting . V\^-WS. 



zu 



THE AUTHOR'S PLAN OF USING HIS BOOK. 



As it is vert/ desirahle that sitid^nts shoidd be ahle to read and write 
the German ckaracters for handwritingy it will be well to begin with the 
* Introduction tx) German Handwriting,* p. xiii. The master should show 
on the black board, or in the copy-booky mw to make the letters, 
^ In order to co7nmence with Lesson I. p. 6, the students should know 
the sound of the vowels af it t/ U/ jp. 2, § 3 ; of i\, § 6 ; of i^t % 6, and 
^f\i% 1 3. The other letters^ ^c, may be referr&i to in the * Introduction 
to the Reading of G-erraan ' as they occur in the subsequent lessons. 

The mxuiter shovld read out slowly and distinctly the German part of 
the lesson f the students repeating every word af ter him. 

Many of the lessons wul not occupy more than half an hour^ or, at the ■ 
most^ three-quarters of an hour, The rest of the time nmy be devoted to 
questioning the students on the grammatical part ; and it will be found 
of great service io devote five or ten minutes to the following practice : 
the master giving the English translation of the last German exercise, 
and the students re-translating it into German without the aid of the 
book. This practice, being a stepping-stone to the speaking of German, 
should in no case be neglected. 

An English exercise is to be written out in German for every lesson, 
If some of the English exercises should be found too Umg the jirst half 
only is to be translated vivd voce, and the latter part {six or eight lines 
at least) to be written out for the next lesson. 

The two supplementaTy vocabularies at the end will be found of great 
assistance in preparing the exercises, and espedally in translating the 
English Exercises. But they do not contain all the words in the book, 
nor are they intended to mfijce the pupU disregard the vocabulary pr^fixed 
to every lesson, which should be leamt by heart, and consulted in the Jirst 
instance. If the pupilfail to Jind the word he looks for in the vocaJm- 
lary of the lesson, it shows that the word hos occurred previously, and 
that he hasforgotien it, and then he mayhave recourse to the vocabiUaries 
at the end. 

From time to time the master should closely examine the students 
whether they have ihoroughly mastered the declensions of nouns and 
adjectives, and the conjugation of verbs; ifnot,it wUl be better togo över 
some of the lessons again, 

The Word and Phrase-book, and the German version of the 20th 
chapter of the * Vicar of Wakefield,^ added to the Sixth Edition, the 
intelligent tiacher will not fail to tum to good account. There is no 
reason why both should not be comTnenced af ter the Jirst six lessons have 
been mastered. 

If the author^s plan of teaching the German language be followed as 
far as is possible and convenient, it is to be hoped that English students 
of German wUl aoquire a m/ore real and lasting knowledge, and not a 
mere * smaitering ' of the language, 



SDeutftlje i^anliftl^rift* 

German Handwriting. 

GENERAL REMARKS. 

A knowledge of German Handwriting is both desirable and 
nseful, if not indispensable, Its acquisition sbould therefore form 
an integral part of the study of German, and should be insisted 
upon from the very beginning. Some ha ve supposed that it epoila 
the English Handwriting, hut experience has fully confirmed that 
it has actually helped to improve the handwriting of students who 
before wrote a bad hand. 

I. Conditions of a good German Hand : 

1. A parallel position of all the main-strokes of a word and 
of the words in a line. 

2. An equiOistanoe of the letters from each other, which 
distance must be greater than that of the parts of a sing^le letter 
from each other. 

Every individual letter of a word ehould be easily distinguish- 
able as a whole from its fellow-letters, right and left. 

3. A normal position of all the letters at an angrle of 45<> to 
60". When the writing is too perpendicular, it looks very formål 
and stiff ; if it is too slanting^ it becomes indistinct 

4. A proper and marked distinotion between liair-strokes 
and tliiok strokes, and a uniform thickness of the latter. 

5. A right and uniform proportion of the middle-sized letters 
to the long letters (as 1 to 7 or as 1 to 5, the former being pre- 
ferable). A proper proportion of the middle-sized letters to the 
half-sized letters (as 1 to 4 or 1 to 3, the former being preferable). 
This, which constitutes a prominent feature of German Hand- 
writing, is often disregarded, and not easily a£.c\<i>i\^\ <8s«iss^\ri 
long practice. 



XIY GERMAN HAKDWRITINQ. 

Beg^nnera are reeommended to use the Autlior's Graduated 
Exercise-books, ruled for German Handwritingy which have proved 
verj successful ; for large classes they are invaluable, as they fa^ 
dlitate the correction of the Ezercisea. These maj be obtained 
through all booksellers, aad from Messrs. Longman & Co., 39 
Patemoster Row, London, price 2dL each and upwards. 

II. Whioh Handwriting to adopt. 

i 

IJntil latelj there were Tand there ard^ven now) as many different 
styles of Handwriting as theré' are writing-masters in Germany and 
teachers of German in England. But it is not the profusion of 
flourishes, nor the whimsical distortion of letters, introduced by 
individuals, which marks the National Handwriting of Germany. 

That which is the simplest in form, the easiest to imitate and 
read, and which conforms to the laws of symmetry, is un- 
doubtedly the most practical and tasteful. 

The Handwriting prefized to the first edition of this Grammar 
in 1866, and still retained, was carefully compiled from a compari- 
Bon of the best styles of Handwriting then in use, and is sub- 
stantially the same as Adolf Henze's ¥reié:?9lattonal^anbfd)nft/ 
published four years låter, which must henceforth be regarded as 
the true National Handwriting of all Germany* 



III. AdolphtLS Henze's Gfrerman National 
Frize-Handwriting. 

The history of this Handwriting is briefly as follows. In 
1870, 2Cbolf Äcnje, a Royal School-Commissioner and Coun- 
cillor for Saxony, and a well-known and learned investigator 
of Handwriting, offered a prize for the best, simplest, most 
practical and tasteful German Handwriting. From 754 com- 
petitors, including the most eminent German caligraphists, 
the Handwriting furnished by the Gymnasiallehrer Gosky 
at KoTTBUS was awarded the first prize, and pronounced to be 
the best and truest model of the National Handwriting of Ger- 
manj. 



XV. 



3viwjöTxämt itr (^exmm K^mtdimtöi^. 



aB 



älUrti3e€i lo the jrräu^ is dévided/ into ^^r&v parts, 
cuid/ tht' rimrntcCLJHfs&um/affhe^ leBxrs is cOyeav an^le^ 




L. 



\^^ 




Ihe'jn'qpanicnvpf fk^ middle' saed^ leOers-is €is 1 to 7, 
"ffie^ Juäf sbfe€L JeGers occigT^faur spaoes, anäyfke^AUl/ 
s^zed. le&e!rs fhe' entére^ lenaihA 



EXAMPLES. 



J^^fCddle^ 



s^fed^ 



ScOf- 



s^^ 



MUlsn 



size^JLj 




XVI. 



NATURAL OR PROGRESSIVE ORDER OF LETTERS. 



JTiS' Studefi^ is reoomn^ended/ tojfrcLcUse^ fhe^ leders iif. 






-^ ..-^8?^^.-^ ^^^^o, ..y^ 




^ 




^ 




)lpa3^iAKoXj%QXK/iXö, 





AVii. 



mm ^ 



:MjUia/Miicat' &ide^M StMtxi. 



^ ^Z^ ^ 



=>^ -^^ ^ <^ ^ 



TnR 




ut 







%*vxlj^'%wili. 



^.^^ ^^i^ ^^ < ,^^/^. 



åv\,fU'U€d/'%U>tti. 



Ola^ 



^^^at/ 



>f 






/^^ ^,^^c^L^^-< 



<^A»fJMkmMil>. 





^.^M^J^^^ y^^^^ 



4>«»n|u>««H«l/4><HidOHa«t4<>. 



cÅ^c>^;C^^.i^ ^4U>ny 




.^W^ ^J'/.^^ 



l'7h be ce^ried and- rea/ti' 






' ^^ 







mr. 




^.^^MM-*^ d't*-'>^'4^^ C^3^/^.' 



mn. 



,^lf Hotje'» émitmllafiotudpri^esllÄtttow^ 














IXN. 



i^C<^^^<^^^ ^S^i^ 






c^ 







L 



■« ■ 



>^. 



GERMAN GIUMMAR. 



'>H< 



INTRODUCIION TO THE READING OF GERMAN. 



§ 1. The Alphabbt 
3nsdsts of the foUowing twenty-six cbaracters : — 



3t, a, — A, a 


% n, — N, n 


S5, b, — B, b 


D, 0, — 0, o 


6, c, — C, c 


% p, — P,V 


25, b, — D, d 


SI, q, — Q, q 


e, c, — E, e 


fSt, t, — K, r 


g, f, - F, f 


®,f,8,- S, B 


©/ 8. — (^> g 


Z, t, - T, t 


^, h - H, h 


II, U, — U, u 


S, t, - I, i 


», t), - V, T 


2, 1/ — J, j 


SQ3,ro, — W,w 


^, f/ — K, k 


S, K, — X, X 


£, 1, -L, J 


S)/ 9, - Y, y 


SR, m, — M, m 


3/ i, — Z, z 



RULES OF PRONUNCIATION. 

{ 2. QuAirriTT. ^ 

A single vowel, or an inflected vowel, is either long or 
lort. A diphthoDg, or a double YOYiel, \a ^l-^^^^Vso^. 



2 GEBICAN ELEMENTÄRT GRASOIAB. 

§ 8. Sdiflb Voutsls. 

2C/ a, IB pronounced ah; (i, t, eh; 3i {/ ^i f^t 0/ oh; 
Ur U/ ooA; 9r 9/ 0^7 ^^i^d i^ foreign words, is pronounoed 
like ee, or German i* 

§ 4. Ikflbccbd Vo^wels.* 

2C C; i, ihe inflection of a, has the sound of a in cape, or of 
é auvert in ph'e, 

jD e^ 6/ the inflection of 0/ lias nearl j the sonnd of ti in duU, 
or of o in done^ but rather more open. 

U C/ U/ the inflection of u, has the sound of the French «• 

d U/ the inflection of a U, has the sound of oi in cotn. 

§ 6. DiPHTHOKOS. 

2C U/ (2 U/ is pronounced like ou in au ^ 
@i; et/ is pronounced like t in Jine. 
@U/ eU/ is pronounced like oi in cotn. 

§ 6. CoxBiNATioNs OF Yovnsis. 
{ e is sounded like te in ^enef, the vowel e being mute^ 
and merelj used to indicate that the preceding { is long. 

The yowels U in ^atit/ Samtlif/ SmtliC/ &c., are prononsoc». 

sepaiately. 

Ut Stånds onlj in interjections and a few proper nameft 
The two vowels are pronounced separately. 

§ 7. The Vowbl e. 

(Sf Z, represents three different sounds, viz. :— 

The broad sound, or the Engliah aimfair^ as fcfcwén 
The acute sound, or the English ey in grey^ thus jébc* 
The guttural sound, or the English e in fallen^ an^' 

thus einétt/ lobtC/ which is given to e in aflixos^ fgår] 

fixes, and all endings of inflection. 



* What is an inflected vowol? 8ee Appendix IL 



FRONUVCIATIOV. 8 



CONSONANTS. 

The oonsonants, boing generally pnmoimced the same as in fiogtiahf 

are not all enumerated here. 

§ 8. ThB IdBTTEBS ht hf g. 

b, b/ f, as final conRonants of a word, are in the 
South of Crermany 80unded härd, like |), t, 1; thu8 Stalb, 
Kieb, SBeg are pronounced Jt4 Ip/ iizt, SBel, IntheNorth 
of Grermanj, however, these letters reo^ve their proper sqft 
Bonnd, to diatinguiah them from p, t, t, which have « härd 
Bound. 

§ 9. Thb Lbttbb ^ 

Is alwBjs sounded at the beginning of a word, as in ,^ a 11 §/ <x 
when between two yowels, as in ba^er» It is mute when 
indicating that the preceding or Ibllowing Towel ifl long^ as in 

SSa&I, or IKat^. 

§ 10. Thb LimBB m* 

The German 9B^ XO, is jounded like the Eaglish r, hut 
somewhat opener, the lips being less oontracted. 

§ 11. Thb Lhttbbs f, \>f and p^ 
Are all pronounced the same, like the English/in^eZd 

§ 12. Thb Lettbbs å)if (fÖ/ and ]C 

Are 'all pronomiced the same, like the English x in wax. la 
compound i;vx)rd8, like roaijf atn, X\Aåi\nfiltn, and ingeni- 
tives, like S5ud)S (for äBud^^é, S5uc^eé), i) and f.are pro- 
nounced separately, and receive théir proper sound. 

I 13. Téb Oonsonant S 

Is represented by fvm différent characters, andhastwo distinct 
jounds. The capita! @/ at tbe beginning of wocds^^xA&)^ 



t GERMAN ELEMENTABT OBAMMAB. 

Jong O between two Yowels, haye alwajs a smooth sound, like 
the English z in zeal, The final 6 and the ^ (called 8z) haye 
a sibilant or hisstng sound, like 8 in son, 

{14. Thb Cohfottnd Coksonant fd^ 
Is pronounced like the English sh in shoe, 

§ 15. fp AND Jt 

The f before p and t is pronounced in two wajs :— 

1. In the South of Germanj, and in some parts of the 
North-east, it has the sound of the English sh, German 
fd^» Thus Stab, ©palt are pronounced Sh-tab, Sh-palL 

2. In the North- west of Germany, in Hanover, 
Brunswick, Oldenburg, Bremen, Hamburg, &c., it has 
the pure sound of the sibilant f« 

{ 16. Thb Letteb ^^, d)/ 

1. Has a strong guttural sound, like the Scotch 'ch* in 
4och,^ a lake, an arm of the sea; thus: — Soc^/ a hole; foc^cn^ 
to cook, &c. 

2. Or a soft palatal sound, like the Scotch 'ch' in ^fecht,' 
to fight ; thus : — fe d^ t C n, fight ; r C i d^, &c. 

3. In words of foreign origin, it is sounded like f : thus, 
(5]()0r ; except in the foUowing, where it has the sound of the 

English «Ä, thus, (5]f)arIotte, Gl&ef, (S^arpic, G^aife, 
Qbocolabe, S3rod)urc, 6]f)ampa.aner, Sl^arlötam 

These words are no w frequently spelt ©d^atlottC/ ©d|)ef/ 
&c. 

§ 17. Thb German i 

Is pronounced with a hissing sound, as 'tz* in HzetzCf the 
Afirican fly. Thus: — ^^crj» 

i 18. ti, 
When followed by a vowel, is pronounced like jf, thus, 

Station, 5)atlenn 



OBTHOGRAPHT. 



RULES OF ORTHOGRAPHY. 

§ 1 9. The foUowing require a capital letter, viz. : — 

Nouns, and all parts of speech when used as such. 
Pronoims, when used in addressing a person. 
Adjectives derived from proper names of persons. 
Adjectives that form a part of proper names. 

§ 20. A solitary consonant, whether single or compoiuid, 
between two vowels belongs to the second or following sjl- 
lable. Two consonants, or a double consonant, are divided 
between the vowels which precede and foUow. Compound 
words are divided according to their constituent parts. 



i 



GERMAK ELEMENTART QRAMMAB. 



[less. t 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 



LESSON L 

Freaent TensBf Indicative, of feirt/ to be. 



Sing. xå) blH/ 1 am 

bu btj}/ thouart 

er, fic, eé ijl, he, she, 

It 18 

Plur. Wir finb, we are 
ii}X fcfb/ youare 
fie finb, they are 



Sing. bin id), aml? 

b{ji bu, artthou? 

ijl er, fie, eé, is hc, 

she, it? 

Plur. ffnb Wir, are we? 
feib {J)r, areyou? 
finb fie, are they? 



VOCABULART I. 



b e r o n ! e I, m. the nnde 
ba8 ^tet/ n.thebeer 
b c r 81 i n g/ «*.* the ring 



aut/good 



lalt, cold 
Junfirig, hungry 



)00, where 
b af there 
^ter, here 



ExERCISES. 

I.— l.Sc^ bin t)ier* 2. S53o ift ber SDnfel? Sr iff 
ba. 3. 2)u bijl tält. 4. 2)a6 JBier ifigut. 5. Sjlfic 
bier? @ie iflt ba* 6. SBir finb l&ungrig^ 7. SSSo 
iji baé JBier? gs ijl ]&ier^ 8. gi^r feib gut* 9. ®{e 
finb l&un.qrig» 10. ©inb fie gut? 11. SESo ijl ber 
SRin.a? er ijl Ifiier^ 12. SESo iji fie? ©ie iji ^{er. 
13. es ifi lalU 



* While English is generally true to nature in regard to gender, the 
mascidine and feminine gender in German is applied to things of 
DO gender, aa irell as to the male and female sex. 



LKSS. 11.^ PBESENT T£NS£ OF THE AUXILIART VERBS. 7 

2. — 1. Ts it cold? It is cold. 2. The uncle is good. 3. 
The ring is here. 4. The beer is cold. 5. Are they there? 
They are here. 6. Where are you ? We are heré. 7./VVhere 
is ihe imcle ? He is there. 8. Are they hungry ? 9. Where 
are thgr? They are here. 10. You are good. 11. The beer 
iH good. 12, She is good. 13. Are you cold? Is the beer 
good 7 14. Is the uncle here 7 He is there. 



LESSON II. 

Present Tense, Indieative, of ^aben^ to have ; and iperbetl/ to get, 

become, grow. 



Si$tff, 

ic^ l^abe, Ihave 

bu baf}/ thouhast 

er, fiC; e§ f)at, he, she, it has 

JPlur, 

Wix böben, wehave 
i^X babt, youhave 
fie f)abtn, they have 



8ing, 

xå^ werbe, 1 get, I do get, I 

am getting, I become 
bU Wirff/ thou gettest 
et,f(C, e§n)trb,he,she,itgeta 

Ftur. 

xoxx tt)crben, weget 
ibr werbct/youget 
fie werben, they get 



INTEBBOOATrVELT. 



|)«be id)? have 17 | SBcrbc id^)? do I get? 

EuLE 1. — The third person plural is commonly used in 
actdressing either one or more persons; thus, ©inb @ic 
^ un^rig ? and the pronoun, in this case, is always spelt with 
a capital. Among intimate friends and relatives the second 
person is more irequently used. 

VOCABCLARY II. 



eine 8?ofe//. arose 

bic ^ am C/ /. the lady 

bet J^9XXf m, the gentleman, Mr., 

master (sing. in n ; pl. in en) 
meine ^ante//. my annt 
alt, old 

fd)6n/ heantiful, fair 
tö^f*#pretty 



wavntf "warra 
mäbC/ tired 
»er^ who 
waé/ what 
fe^r/ very 
ni4t>not 
unbf and 



8 



GERMAN ELEHENTABT GRAHXAR. 



ILBSB. m. 



EXERCISES. 

..SBa«l)aben(Sfet)a? ^å) feabe^ler efncSlofe* 
2. @ic ijl fc^r fdbåm 3. gjletnc Sante wirb alt* 4. 
Der ^err unb bie Same tperben mube* 5. 65 ift 
Ui)t falU e« wirb nfd)t warm^ 6. ® er tji ba? 3d^ 
bin eÖ4* SBir finb eé* Der Dnfel ijl e§* 7. ©inb 
@ie hungrig? SBir werben l^ungrig» 8. 2>ie 
Xante unb ber jDntel n^erben fel^r alU 9. SBad ifl 
eé? es i(l eine SRofe* 10. 2Ber ijl e§? 66 ijl 
meine Svante. 

4. — 1. Where is my aunt ? She is not here. 2. What bas 
the lady 'got'*!" there? She has *got' a rose. It is veiy pretty. 
3. What have you *got' there? What is it? It is a rose. 4. 
Are you getting tired ? I am getting tired, and feel (tr. am) J 
very hungry. 5. The lady and the gentleman are getting 
very old. 6. The ring is not pretty. 7. Is it wami ? It is 
not warm. It is getting cold. 8. Who is there ? It is I. It 
is he. 9. Is it my aunt? It is she ; it is not he. 10. Wlio 
is the lady ? She is my aunt. 11. Is it you? It is we. 



LESSON III. 



THE DEFINITE ARTICLE. 



m. 



8ing, 



Plur, 

fli% f, A* 



tf. ber, bie, ba§, the bie 
G, beS, ber, bcS, of the ber 
D, bem, ber, bem, tothe ben 
A. ben, bie, ba§, the bie 



THE INDEFINTTE ARTICLE. 
Bing. 



m. 



etn, etne, etn, a 
eineS, einer/ eineS, ofa 
einem, einer, einem, toa 
einen, eine, efn, a 



* 3rf) Mn eé# it is I ; bu bi(l cé^ it is thou, you ; er ift eé, it is he ; 
»ir jinb eé/ it is -we, us ; iljr fcib eé/ it is you ; fic (inb eé/ it is they ; 
@ic finb eé/ it is you. 

t The inverted commas indicate words which are not to be translated. 

\ Tr. stånds for ' translate.' 



LESB. ni.] FIRST DECLENSION OF NOUK& 







THE FIRST, OR WEAK, DECLENSION OF NOUNS. 



3eit//. time I 9lofe//. rost 





Sing, 


Sing, 


N. 


bie Sett 


bie SRofe 


G. 


ber Sett 


ber Stofe 


D. 


ber Sett 


ber JRofe 


A. 


bie Sett 


bie 9iofe 




mur. 


Plur. 


N. 


bie Seiten 


bie 8iofett 


G. 


ber Seiten 


ber Siofett 


D. 


ben Seitrn 


ben JRofen 


A. 


bie Seit^tt 


bie 9iofen 



S3&r/ m, bear 
aing, 

ber S5ar 
beö äödrrn 
bem S5drett 
ben S&åxen 

Ftur. 

bie äödrett 
ber JBdren 
ben S3dren 
bie S3dren 

RuLE 2.— Nouns ending in e, ie, ei, ^eit, le i t, fc^aft, 
ang/ It nf t, in, are feminine. 

HuLE 3. — Feminines in e, ie, er, el, add n, all othert 
add e n in the plural. There is no case ending in tHe singular 
of feminine nouns. 

EuLE 4. — To this declension belong also some masculine 
nouns signifying male persons and animals; these add en 
or n to all cases. 

VOCABULARY III. 



b t e S3 1 u m €//. tbe flower 

bie dntfftnVin^f, the distance 

bie (5rbe,/. theearth 

ber ^enfcb, m. man (like S3år) 

bie 9label//. theneedle(p/.inn) 

bie ^6nigtn,/. thequeen 

bie ©onne,/. the sun 

bie ©tu be,/, the sitting-poom 

bie a^ör,/. the door (like ^dt) 

QVO^f great, tall, large 



ftein/ small, little 

nein, no 

of fen, open 

fterblicb, mortal 

tt)em,towhom 

9C^6ren, belong 

p o n, from, of (prep. with the dat.) 

in, into, in (prep, signifying mo' 

tion with the acc, and aigni/g- 

ing rest with the cUU.) 



EXERCISES. 



s.— 1. 25er SKenfc^ i flt ber ^zxx ber (grbe» 2. ©ie 
entfernung ber ^onne t)on ber Srbe i(l gro^» 3. 
SEBer hat bie Kabeln meiner (fl^en^SEaxvU^ ^^^^"^^ 



10 



GEUMAN ELXMENTART GRAMMAB. 



fic(them)n{cl^t. 4. SBoflnt) bje|)erren unb2)amen? 
©le finb In ber ©tube* 5. ©inb bic »lumen 
bubfd^? ©iefinb fc^r ^ubfcb» 6. SBcm gcl&årenbie 
JRofcn? 2)en 2)amen. 7. SBir gc^en (go) fn ble 
©tubc* 

6. — 1. The rose is thc queen of flowers. 2. Have jon *bsxj* 
lime ? 3. The ladies and eentlemen are in the sitting-rooiii. 
4. The bears are large. 5. Have the ladies ' any * roses? 6. The 
door of the sitting-room is open. 7. [The]* Men aremortal. 8. 
Where are the needles ? zThej , are jhere.f I have *gqt* 
them (jie). 9. To whom do the flowers belong? They beloiig 
to the gentlemen. Are they pretty ? No; they are not {add 
pretty). 



LESSON IV. 

THE SEGOND, OR STKONQ, DECLENSION OF NOUKS. 



S3a4/ m, brook 

N. ber JBac^ 

O. beé 83ö*e0 

D, bem JBac^ t 

A. ben S3ac^ 

Plw, 

N. bfeS3å*e 

O. beräöåcbe 

D, benJBac^en 

A. Wfb&åit 



SOlaler/ m. painter, 
artist 

&ng» 

ber SKaler 
beé aRaIer0 
bem SKaler 
ben Sffaler 

Ftur. 

bie 9)?arer 
ber 5SRaler 
ben SKaler n 
bie SRaler 



nation 

ba6 SSolt 
bed SSoIf e0 
bem SSoIf e 
ba6 SSoIt 

bie as O if er 
berSSélfer 
ben 93 ö (fem 
bie aSolf er 



RuLE 5. — Noiins of one syllable are mostly mascidine, an 
inflect the vowelsf a, O, U, aVL into å, b, il, ånio, the plur 
number of declension. The other vowels are not inflected. 

HuLE 6. — Nouns of more than one syllable ending in er, 
en, are mascnline ; those in fel, tel, C^en, lein, neuter. B» 



* Words in sqnare brackets mast be translated into German, 
t The 1, 9» and 3 point ont the order of words. 
i What is the vowel inflection ? See Appendix IL 



iLBS9< IV.] 8EC0ND DEGLENSION OF KOUKS, ]] 

claases are declined like Wldhx ; but if the noun alreadj end 
iu n^ DO second n is added in the datiye plural. 

BuLE 7. — ^Many neuter nouns, and a few masculines, to- 
gether with the nouns in t\)\Xm, are declined like SSolf/ and 
the Yowels a, O IX, ClVL, are inflected in the plural number. 

VOCABULABT IV. 



ber fBavmif m, the tree ijpl. SBdume) 
ber SBerg/ m. the mountain 
baé S3u%/i n. the hook {jpl. SBöc^er) 
^eutfcftlanbé {gm.), of Germany 
ber >bt(^ter/ m, the poet 
ber gluf/ m. the rirep {fl, gÖijfe) 
ber görft» »i. the prince (p^. gör|ten) 
ber @)arten/ «n. the garden (p/. ® &j;:s 

ten) 
ba$ «£>er3oat(um/ n. the duchy (p/. 
•^ergoat^omer) 
ber Z^, m. the table {pL %{^åft) 
ber «&immel/ m, the heaven» sky 
ber «puf/ 97». the hat, bonnet {pL 

^flte); ber ® 0^11/ w.the son (pJC 6) 
ber ÄJnig/ «». the king (p/.Ä6ni9e) 
ber Edtve/ 9». the lion (pl, S6n>en) 



ber Gtenv m. the itar 

ba8 S^al^ ». the Talley, dale (p/. 

Sbdler) 
bad äbier/ n. the animal, beast {jal, 
S^iere) 
ber SBalb/ m. the wood, forest (p/. 

äB&lber) 
bad ^&b(^en/ n. the girl, maiden 
aUen {dat. plJ), all 
auf/ upon, on {prep. with tho dat, 

and (KV.) ; ^U {prep, with c^a/.) to 
eö gibt/ or aiebt^ there is, there are 
unter/ under, among {prep, with 

the i2a^. and aeo») 
toerben gU/ become 
oiele {nom, and oco. p^.), manj 
Sa^lreic^/ numeroos 



EXERCISES. 

7-— 1. 25er gJwe { jl ber Äonia ber %\}kxz unb ber gfirji beS 
SBölbeS» 2. jBad^e tperben ui gluffen. gs gibt (giebt) t)felc 
Slujfe, jBerae, iKbalcr unb SBalber auf ber ©rbe* 3. SBo finb 
bfe 83u(fter? @ie jtnb auf bem SEifd)c in ber ®t\xit^ 4. 
Unter aUen asållern gibt eS Dicfetcr* 5. Die |)eri09t^umer 
2)eutfc^tanb6 finb Hein» 6. J)ie ©terne beS Jöimmcfå finb 
jablreicb* 2)ie S3dume beé ®artené* 7. SDSem gel^oren blc 
^öte? 2)€n fSRabcben» 

8. — 1. The nations of the earth are numerous. 2. Under 
the trees of the forest. 3. Who is this (biefer) gentleman ? He 
is the artist's son. 4. Here are the uncle's books. 5. The 
bonnets belong to the girl. 6. Are there (gibt eé ba) rivers 
and 9iountains ? Not many, 7. In the books. On the trees. 
In the (im) vallej. 8. On the mountains and in the forests of 
Germany. 9. In rivers and valleys. 10. [Thej Man i& ^sik 
animal. 



12 



GEBXAX ELKMEXTAKT <»*intA» 



LESSOX V. 



THE THIBD, OR VIXED, DECLEXSIOX OF KOCKS» 

[This dfclensfon is a combinaiion of the tro fiist decleasions ; hmee its 
name. The nomis belonging to it foUov in the sisgular the veak, 
and in the plnnd the stronga deolension ; or, nte nerså^ in tha 
flingolar the strong and in the plunl the weak, dedensioii.] 



N. 
G. 
D. 
A. 

N. 
G. 
D, 
A. 



9taä^tif. night 

Siug, 

ber 9lad)t 
ber SRaM 
bie 9lac^t 



bie 'Ståå)U 
ber 9låd)tt 
ben 9låc^t^n 
bie 3lid)tt 



I Gtaa^m. State 

ber etaat 
bed @taatC0 
bem Staatt 
ben ^taat 

Pttnr, 

bie Staatnt 
ber Staatrn 
ben Staaf en 
bie @taatrit 



£)tr# n. ear 



baS Sbr 
bed jD^rr^ 
bem JDI^re 
baSS^r 



PTiir. 



bie Sbrnt 
ber ID^ren 
ben O^rrn 
bie S^rirn 



RuLE 8. — ^Feminines ending in ni§ {pL nijfe), and thoae 
which iuflect the vowels a, O, U, au in the plural, follow in 
the singular the tceak, and in the plural the strong^ declension. 
The wordfl 9Rutter (/.), mother, and SoAter (/.), daughter, 
infiect the Yowel in the plural, and add n to the datiye pluraL 

HuT^E 9. — ^Nouns which follow the strong dedenmon in ihe 
singular and the weak declension in the plural nxunber are 
ihose ending in or, and the following : — 



ber JBauer, m. the peasant 

(small fermer), boor 
ber SKöfl/ m. the mast 
ber 9lad)bar,m.the neighbour 
ber @tra]f)l, m. the beam 



ba§ Tiu^t, n. the eye 
ba6 JBett, n. the bed 
ba§ Äemb, n. the shirt 
bad Snfett, n. the insect 
bad S>t)X, n. the ear 



The word ^erj (n.), heart, is thus declined : singular, no- 
minative and accusative, bad »^erj; genitive, bcd ^^erjend; 
dative, bem ^erjcn ; plural, ^^erjen for all cases. 



LESS. V.] 



THIBD DEGLENSION OF NODNS. 



18 



VOCABULART V. 



bae fBitbf n, the pictnre (pl SBtlber) 
tie 93an!/ /. the bench, form (pi, 

SWnfei 
bad »Dorf^ n. the yillage (p^.lDdrfer) 
bte ®aM, /. the goose (^/. ®dnfe) 
bie «^anb/ /. the hand (pl, «dånbe) 
bie Stnflerntf//. darkness (jä, gtn« 
^ fterniffe) 
bte SOlad^t//. the power, might (pL 

bie 9l«f// the nut {pl. S^iSffe) 
ber ?)tofeffor/ m. the professor 
baé ©d^ifp n. the ship (»Z. ®d)iffe) 
ber ZaQ, m, the day {pL ZaQt) 
hk @tabt//.the town (pl. ©tdbte) 



bie SBanb//. the wall (pl SBdnbe) 
bie Unioerftt&t^ /. the imiTersitj 

(pl. adds en) 
att/ on (jpr«p. with the dat. and ooc.) 
im^ in the (for in bem) 
bangen/ häng; are hnng up 
boc^/ high 
fur}/ short 
reif/ ripe 

reif werben/ to get or tum ripe 
»aé/ 'vrhat 
lam)/ long 
nocft/ ^et, still 
fd)dbU(^/ hnrtfol, ii^'xiriou8 
of my, meineé^ (sometimes) beg 



EXERCISES. 

9.— 1. 2)ic SBdnbc l^abcn Dftren» 2. J){e giadbtc wcrben 
lang unb bie SEagc furu 8. 2)ie SKddbtc bet ginfterni^» 4. 
2)ic Sliiffe werben reif* 5. £)ie ^taaUn Dcutfc^lanbé jirtb 
jö^lreic^* 6. SBo ftnb bie S5dnf e ? Sm ©arten» 7. 2Cn ben 
SBdnben ber ©tube l^dnpen t^iele S5ilber» 8. SBSaS l&aben ®ie 
fn ber |)anb ? ©nen 'JRinp» 9. gr f jl ein iRac^bar ber 
läBauern» 10. 5)ie Snfetten jinb ben S3dumen fel^r fc^dblid^* 
11. @inb@ienoc^im aSette? 

10. — 1. I have 'got' the needles in my (tr.* the) hand. 2. 
Where are the shirts of my uncle? On (auf) the bed. 3. The 
beams of the sun are warm. 4. The professors of the univer- 
sities. 5. The geese belong to the fermer. 6. My aunt is the 
mother of Mr. Stem. 7. There are many towns and villages 
in the states of Germany. 8. The masts of the ship are high. 
9. Who is this (biefeé) girl ? She (tr. it) is the neighbour> 
daughter. 10. The hearts of men. 11. In the time of dark- 
ness. 12. Kings and princes are mortal. 



* tr, stånds for * translate,' 



u 



QEBHAK ELEXENTARY GRAXMAB. 



LESSON VI. 



PKONOUNS. 



STRONG DEOLENSION. 



(like tbe Defiaite Ärade.) 







Sh^uJar, 




Fiwralm 




m. 


/. 


«. 


»./• «• 


N. 


bicf^r 


bfcfe 


bicf^0* thifl 


»i(f« 


G. 


t)icf^0 


bicfrt 


biefer of this 


biefeir 


D. 


bicf^m 


biefer 


tuUVX to this 


biefen 


A. 


bicf^it 


Mcfe 


bfcfC0* this 


btefe 



AT. 



fcin^^t 
fein^0 

fcinrm 

femrti 



MIXED DECL^NSION. 
(likie the Indoflidte Actlcle.) 



Sinfftdar, 
/. 

fcine 
feinrr 
fcinet 
fcinf 



fein'' his 

feinf0 ofhifl 

feinrm to his 

fcin'' his 



JPiural, 

feine 
feiner 
fefnen 
fcine 



RuLE 10. — The foUowing are declined like btefet/ this, ti 



laiter, viz. :— 

fcncT/ lenc, jcncS, that, the 
weldbcr, wclcfce/ tDcIdbeS, who, 

which {a rekitiveand inter- 
rogativt prommn) 
tebet/ icbC/ icbcé, every 



teiner/ tetne, feimS, none, i 

oae (referring to a noun) 

etner, etnc/ efne^/ one, any oi 

(referriog t» a noun) 

maneret/ mm^t, manc^ 

many a one, some 



* For btefeS the fbrms bie< or ba6 are frequently used. 
t * The fonns thus mftrked are weak, while all the rest are strong, 
wiU be seen from LeBSon XU. how tbe dedension of a^jectivea 



UBS8. yl] 



PVCLENSIONS OF PRONOUNS. 



15 



BuLE 11. »-The foUowing possessive pronotins are all de* 
dined like feln, his, vk. : — 

mtin,mj I bcfn,tliy | fcfn^Hs 

tinfer, our | eucr,your | fl^r, her, or their 

3f)h your.^ (This pronoon correspondB to &k, yon, and is nsad 
like tha lättar in addressing (m$ or more persons, as 3^|r JBuÄ/ yonr 
book. *^ben eie 3(c IBU(^ ? haveyon got yonr book?) 



VOCABULABT VI. 



bec Sekter/ «i. the fiEralt, short- 

ooming 
bet Sif4l/ ^ the fish 
ta< S>^&ulein/ n. the young ladj, 

(withaut the artide) Miss 
bie greunbtn//. the (female) friend 
ber Säter/ m, the &tlier (pl, SB&te r) 
bieg»auer//.thewaU 
ober/ but 

geben 6ie/ giye (you) 



fetit/ fetnf/ feftt/ not one, none, no 
{pl. not any) (before a noun) 

mitt with {prep. with Arf.) 

neitt/ no {aav,) 

jet/ yes, certainly 

fte/ them {aco,) 

trageti/ bear 

OOt/ before 

sister, @c^we(ler/ / Q)/. ®d)we^ 
ftern) 



EXERCISESU 

u — 1. @tn jeber SRenfcb l()at fetne Sfel^Ier. 2. SSeI(()e8 
ffnb bie »ftcber aP^rcS Snfelö? ©fefeS jtnb feine »ucber; 
aber ieneéjtnb bie S3&cber meiner Xante» 8. 9Bo {tnb Sbr^ 
grdulein 2/&d)ter? @ie {tnb in ber @tube mit ibten ^teun^ 
binnen» 4. ©a« finb unfere «^ute. 5. SBelcl()e8 ip euer 
®ötten ? 3ener ift eö» 6. ©ef ne S3Hbec jtnb böbfc^» ?• 
SRancbe S3dume trägen feine ^i^cbte. 8. Da bin ic^» @ie 
Ifi e«» 9. 3bt »^crr SSater wirb t)or ber 3eit alt* 

12. — 1. There are not any fish {pl,) in this riyer. 2.The walls 
of our garden ^e high. 3. To wnom belong tbese ships ? To 
my neighbour. 4. Yournnts are getting (^r.become)ripe. 5. Are 
these your {uee euer) trees 7 No, they belong to the farmer. 6. 
Giye this to your daughters. 7. Who are these young ladies 7 
They {tr, it) are my sisters and their friends (/.). 8. Have 
you ' got ' yonr shirts 7 Yes, I have * got * them. 9. Which is 
your hat 7 This is it ; not tbat * one.' 10» Tbia <ifi>^S&^\isö» 
of mine (^« one (einer) of my hats)» 



16 



aUUf AN ELEMENTABT GBASOCAR. [UBM. TIL 



LESSON VII. 

THE COMPOUND TENSES OF VERBS 

Are formed by the aid of the auxiliaiy verbs |()aben, to havey 
fein, to be ; and werberi/ to become. 

Observe, that the past participle of tbe principal verb is joined to tbf 
present and imperfect of ^abcn or fein/ to form the jperfect and plupet' 
fect; thus: — 



The Pkrfect. 



/ have seen {I did see). 

Sing, ii) i}abt gcfc^cn 
t)u i}a^ 9cfclf)cn 
er l)at gcfcl^cn 

Plur. wir tabcn acfc^eit 
ibr \)dbt gefcjicn 
fie baben gefeben 



1 



/ kave come (/ did eomé), 

xij bin gctommcn 
bu bijl .Qetommcn 
er ifl getommen 

tt)ir jinl) 9e!ommcn 
ibr fcit) gcfommen 
fie finb gcf ommen 



Observe, that the present of tottbcn is joined to the infinitlTe of fbft. 
principal -verb, to denote fatnre tlme; thus: — 



Thb Futubb. 






I shall see, 

Sing. ii} werbe fe]()cn 
bu wirfl feben 
er wirb feben 

Flur. tt)ir werben feben 
ibr tDerbet febcn 
fie werbcn fcben 



7 ehall comt, 

ii) werbe fommen 
bu wirf} fommen 
er wirb fommen 
tpir werben fommen 
ibr trerbet fommen 
fie werbcn fommen 



What is an independent sentence? One which is in no iray conoaetfld 
with any other sentence ; as, I bought a book yesterdaj. 



LESS. VII.] THE COUrOUND TENSES OF VERBS, 



17 



EuLE 12. — ^The foUowing is the natural order of words in 
an independent sentence : — 

I, 1. Nominative ; 2. Present or Imperfect ; 3. Äccusative ; 
Thus : I bought this book 

4. Adverb, 
cheap(ly). 

IL 1 , Nominative ; 2, Auxiliary; Z, Äccusative; 4t. Adverb; 
I have this book cheap(l}') 

5. Post Participle or Infinitive, 
bought, 

BuLE 13. — The past participle, or the infinitive, in com- 
ponnd tenses, is separated from the auxiliaiy verb and placed 
at the end of the sentence. 

VOCABULART VII. 



ber S5rubcr/ m, the brother (pl, 

aSröbcr) 
geftinbcit/ foimd 
gefommen/ come (part, p, of Um^ 



gefel^en/ seen 

gcftcrn/ yesterday 

fantet to>day, this daj 

tJS)n/ him (ace.) 

faufcn/ (to) buy 

fommen/ come 

baé ^otn/ n. the com 

ber Canbmanit/ m. the farmer 

morgen (adv.), to-morrow 

xinvf only 

baé $ferb/ n. the horse 

baé fRtåftf n. the light 

fRi&it Ibaben; to be right 

bie @4ule//. the school 



[men) 



bie ©orae//. the care, anxiety 

t^euer/ dear 

bie JSugenb// the virtue 

\>Ci^ Unglåc!/ n. the misfortune 

bad Unred)t> n. the wrong 

Unred^t i^aben/ to be wrong 

t)ieUeid)t/ perhaps 

wad^fen/ (to) grow, increase 

»arum/ why 

JU/ too ijadv.) 

JU/ to (prep. with the cfa^.) 

given, gegeben 
gone {adv.\ oorfiber 
did give, J)aben gegeben 
the morning, ber ffllorgcn/ OT, 
soon, balb 
them, jte 



EXERCISES. 



13 — 1. 25ie gd^ulc bcé UngludPå ift bfc ©d^ulc ber SKugcnb* 
2. 3cl) ^abe 3^)rcn^crrn SSruber (jejlcrn gcfe^en» SSBo l)abcn 
@ie ibn gcfc^cn? |)icr in 3t)rem ©artcm 3, 3ji S^re 
©cbwcficr l)cutc aef ommcn ? 9lein, fic wirb morgen f ommetx. 
4. S35o ^aben ®ie bie 9labeln gefuubttv^, TtM^^^^m^Sh^^^x^ 
S^rer etube» 5. SBeroen 2t)te ?&iAfe^x \i\^ ^^JceÄ^.^ti\^^i^^ 



18 GESaiAN ELEMEkrABT GRAMI£AB. [lESS. VIIL 

aSa uern faufcn? @ic werbcn fic "okUtlåjt faufcn; abcr jtc 
finb nur ju tbeuer* 6. 3d) b^bc JRccfet, jtc f)abtn Unrecbt» 
7. 2Barum feib ibr bcutc flRorgen nicbt jur (au ber) @4ulc 
gefommcn? 8. S)e§ ganbmanns* ©orgcn »acbfen mit bcm 

' Observe, that the e in the genitive and dative mngular of iiroidf 
belonging to the second and third declension is frequentlj ondtted. 

Thus: \>im ^orn/ for bem ^orne^ bed Sanbmanné/ for beg Sanbmannei. 
Words in et/ el/ en/ omit it as a role. Thus we say: M SÖtoIer^ 
and not beé SRalereé. 

14. — 1. The moming of our days is soon gone. 2. I have 
ggiven atlie flowers ^to your daughters. 3. You are {tr, hare) 
right, he is wrong. 4. We have not seen our fidenda (/.) 
to-day. 5. I shall not buy his horaes, they are too dear. 6. 
Why did you {petf.) 2not jcome jyesterday ? I had (^otte) no 
time. 7. I shall perhaps come to-morrow. 8. Your brothers 
have not come to-day. 9. Did you give {perf.) jthe roaes jto 
the lady ? Yes, I have given them to her (i^r). 10. The 
girPs bonnet is pretty. 



LESSON VIII. 

RuLE 14. — General Eule on the Nöfntnative Plural of 
Nauns, Most masculines and neuters add t, most feminineB 
tXif to the nominative singular. Most plurals in z, and all the 
plurals in Ct/ inflect (i. e. soften) the radical vowels a, 0/ U/ 
au ; a plural formed by adding CU or n never adnuts of 
the vowel inflection. 

RuLE 15. — Proper NameSj in the singular number, aio 
declined by putting the artide before the name, or by adding 
an å to the genitive, e. g. : — 



SÄariC/ Mary. 

bic 9Rane, or fKarie 

ber SKaric, or 5!Raric0 and 

SJfaricné 
ber SKarie, or Wlatic and 

Wtavun 
bie flRarie, or Wtaxit 

Proper names have no plural, unless ihey represent dasses, aa, the 
BrowMB; thuBi—hxt S3o|Tc/ ^atUi fO^arieti/ like bie S3&(l^e/ d<s>\tn, ftc 



^arl/ Charles. 

N, ber Äarl, or S,axl 
G. be§ Äarl, or Äarl0 

D. bem Äarl, or ^axl 

A, ben Äarl, or Äar I 



LESS. Vin.] DECLENSION OF PKOPEB NAHES. 



19 



VOCABULART VIH. 



abgereij!/ set ont, departed 
2CmaIto Amelia 
angeSommen/ amyed 
2Cnna# Annie 
auégegangen/ gone out 
er^atten/ got, received 
Sreunb/ m, fiiend 
®ebid)t/ n. poem 
gelcfen (partX read 

SQUptfiobt/ /. capital, metropolis 
einrid)/ Heniy 
jje^t/ at present, now, at this ti me 
for, to (signifying directiun to 



fieipjiö/ Leipsic 
Sutfe/ Louisa 

naov after, for (prep, with dat.) 
obctv or 

9)reuf en/ Frussia 
vd&jt rich 

f O . • • dlö/ as ... as 
^Skvf/ n. work (pZ. adds e) 
^ien/ Vienna 
SBil^clm, William 
tooi^ntf liyes, does live 
from, uon (_prfi3o. with cfö^.) 
a place), md) CP^P» ^th ^«^-) 



EXERCISES. 

15.— 1. JJarB Önlcl i)l ni*t fo rcfd^ äB |rctnric^^» 2. 
^Äji bu t)ic Sluffc \)on Ämalie obcr \)on SKöric erl^altcn? 3. 
Anna fp mit Wtaxk ()eutc SKorgcn auSjeaangcn» 4. ®es= 
Ifeårcn bicfc JBilbcr ber SJlaric obcr bcm Äarl ? (Sic g<l)6ren 
gjiaricn* 5. 3fl 3lf)r grcunb \)on gcijJifg obcr t)on JBcrlin ? 
6. S35ot)nt 3^)rc ^oc^tcr iefet in ?)ariS obcr in SBien? 7. 2)ie 
SKuttcr 9Raricné ifl gejlern na* gonbon abgcreiji» 8. Äabcn 
©ie ®6t6e'S SBerfc aelcfen? 3c^ babc @c^iaer'§ SBcrfe ge^ 
Icfcn, aber nic^t ®6tbe'S* 9, Diefe ®ebid)te finb t)on ®6t^e, 
bcm grogtcn (greatest) 25ici^ter 25eutf4)IanbS. 

16. — 1. Henry's brothers have (tr. are) arrived to-day from 
Vienna. 2. Are you (bu) Mary's or Amelia's sister ? 3. I 
have given Charles' books to Annie. 4. Where does your 
mother live at present? She lives in Berlin, the capita! of 
Prussia. 5, Charles is gone out with his sister Louisa. 6. 
Amelia has (tr. is) set out for* Leipsic. 7. I [have] got these 
flowers from Mary yesterday. 8. Have you seen Charles and 
William this moming? 9. Annie^s bonnet is not so pretty as 
Amelia^s. 10. 1 shall give my pictures to Louisa. 11. Have 
you read the poems of Uhland ? They are beautiful. 



20 



OERaiAN ELEHEKTABT GEAIOCAB* [lESS. IS 



LESSON IX. 



COMPABISON OF ADJECTIVES. 



BuLE 16. — The coniparative is formed by adding t or er, 
the superlative by adding fl or ejl to tbe positive ; as :— 

Uxå)t, Hght, easy ; comparative Ui(i)ttt, lighter; 

First Superi, t)cr, bic, baS kiå)te^U, the lightest ; PL blC 

lcid)tcjicn; 

Second or Ädverbial Superi, atn h\å)ttMt\X, lightest 

The second form of the superlative is used as predicate 
only. 

RuLE 17. — The following adjectives soften the vowels a, O, 

n, au; as: — 

alt/ old; comparative iilttX, older; 

First Superi bcr, bic, baå åltcfle/ the oldest, oldest; 

Second or Ädverbial Superi, öttt å Itcjlcu, oldest 

Thus;— 



dvtttf poop 

fromm/ pions, religioius 
gefunb/ healthy 
grob/ coarse, rud« 
grof/ great, big, tall, 

large 
^Oå), high 0)ti)ev) 



f)avt/ härd 
junQ/ young 
frän!/ ill 
falt/ cold 
flUQt prudent 
fur5/ short 



mf^tt near, n&l^et (am 
naf / wet [nid)|lcn) 

XOt^f red 
fd)arf/ sharp 
fdf)n)ad)/ weak 
fd)n)ar5/ black 
jlarf/ strong 



läng; long 

org/ bad, mischievons ; wavmt warm 

EiJLE 18. — ^The conjunction *than,' after the comparative, is 
rendered by aB* 

VOCABULARY IX. 



einem (dat.), to one, people 

^ottOX/ m. doctor, physician 

baé t^auS/ n. the honse (pLJ^ålS^n) 

Ibeif / hot ; frö^/ early 

baé Sa^r/ n. the year (^/. Sa^re) 

ber »&unbf wi. the dog, honnd {pl. 

*^unbe) 
ber iStoni/ m, the moon 
''f^cntag/ m, Monday 



ber Bio^f m. the coat {pl 9ft5cte) 

fd)5n (adj.), faip 

ber ©o^n^ ^. the son 

ber ©ommer/ t», the summer 

hit (Stab t/ /. the town, city (»f. 

©tåbte) 
ber fSaUv, m. the father(^;. IBdter) 
tpor/ was 
i^r (p. 30), to her, to it 



LESS. X.] ^IBST DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES. 2A 



EXERCISES. 

X7.— 1. S)aS ^zmi ift cincm ttö^cr alS ber fRod. 2. S)ic§ 
finb bic frul^jlcn unb fd)6nflen JBlumcn bcé @ommer§* 3. 
2)iefc§ ^au§ ifl.l&66er öK jeneS ; eé ifl baé ^)6cl)flc ÄauS ber 
@tdt>U 4. JJarl ijl jfingcr a» SBil^cIm; er tji ber iunflflc 
®o\^n beé 2)of tor§* 5. 3m ©ommer jtnb bie Slage am Idngften 
unb bie 5Rdcfetc am fur^eften» 6. U^Iönb trär ein aromer 
Sid^ter 2)eutfd)(anb§, ©öt^c tDör ber grotte* 7. 2)er STOonb 
ijl ber @rbe nd^cr alS bie ©onne; er ijt i^r \)on öHenSternen 
ber ndc^jie* 

18. — 1. The insects are the most numerous and most in- 
jmious animals on [the] * earth. 2. Mary is fairer than Annie, 
but our neighboiir's daughter is feirest. 3. The Hon is stronger 
than the bear ; he is the strongest animal of the forest. 4. It 
is jcolder jto-day than yesterday ; git ^was 4Coldest ^on (am) 
Monday.f 5. The summer becomes hotter [with] every year. 
6. These mountains are highest. 7. The beams of the sun 
are warmest. 8. We have given jthe youngest dog ^to your 
father. 



LE S SON X. 

DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES. 

[The dedension of the artide or pronoun, which precedes the adjeo- 
tive, fomishes the key to the dedension of the latter. If the former is 
strong, that of the ac^jective must be weak, and vice verså; if the 
adjective is not preceded by an artide or prononn, its dedension is 
always strong. The mixed dedension is a combination of the strong 
and weak dedension.] 

THE FIRST, OR WEAK, DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES. 

RuLE 19. — ^When the adjective is preceded by any word of 

strong inflection, as ber, bicfer, jcncr, weldjer, ieber, fold}er, 

jwefer, &c., it takes in the nominative singular t, and in all 
the other cases, singular and plural, en» 

♦ Words in square brackets are to be translated. 
t The small figures indicate the oxde:t oi ^opt^^. 



22 



GERMAN ELEUEMTABT GRAliMAB. [lESS. X. 



The aceusative singular of the feminine &nd nenter genden is alwayi 
like the nominatire ; thus: — 



Ma»c* 

N. bicferaltc^ 

G. bicfeö alten 

2>. bicfem alttn 

A, bicfen alten 



SiNOULAB. 
Fem. 

btefe alte 
biefer alten 
biefer alten 
btefe alte 



JTCMI. 



btefeS olte 
btefed alten 
bfefem alten 
btefe6 alte 



Plural. 
MoK, Fem, IfeuL 

blefe alten 
biefer alten 
btefenalten 
btefe alten 

' ObservCf that the possessire pronouns absolnte aze inflected the 
same as adjectives ; thus : — 

ber/ bie/ baé mcinigc/ ormcinc/mine 
beinige/ or bcinc/ thine 
feinige/ or fcinc/ his 



N. 
G. 
D. 
A. 



ti 



tt 



u 



fi 



It 
II 
II 



ber/ bie/baS unfrige/ or unfrc/ oun 
„ „ „ 3^rt9e,ar3j)w,» 
,, „ „ cunge/orcure/ m 

t^jrigc/ or i\)Xt, hers „ „ „ if)X\Qt/ or if)ttt theira 

Decline: 25iefer alte »g)err; bie alte 25ame; jjencS alte 
grdutein» (^crr like SBår 5 3)amc Hke Sdofe 5 gr&ulein like gRalec.) 

Vocabulart X. 



bringcn/ bring 

ber sbiamant/ m. the diamond 
enoartet/ expected 
faören/ drive 
ge^5rt/ belongs 
gefprod^en/ spöken, met 
polben (fl<&'.), gold, of gold 
ptnter/ behind {prep. with dai. and 
acc.) 
f ommt Wteber/ comes again, retums 
S3rot/ n. bread (j)/. liBrote/ loaves) 



läng/ oc^v. long 

SWcIfer/ n, knife 

ncU/ new 

red)t/ right, proper 

©tucE/ n. piece 

^ia^U m, Steel 

»enti/ if 

bad SB^tter/ n. the weather 

n)ilb/ wild, thonghtless 

aurdcf/ back 

SJianti/ m, man (p/. SO^dnner) 



EXERCISES. 

19 1. 2)ie gute alte ^txi fommt wieber, ble ^utoi 

9Renfd)en bringen pe jurudP* 2. Sn mattenen armen |)dufcrn 
beS gropen gonbonå »o^)nt ble Sugenb noc^* 3. SBir baben 
ben alten guten ^errn geftern gefprocl^en ; er »o^nt in icncm 



LESS. XI.] SEOOND DECLENSIOK OT ADJECnYES. 23 

fd)6ncn c^rogen »^aufe* 4. ®cbcn Sic bicfeé fd^Ätfe SKcjTer 
t)em YDtlben jtnaben ia må)t in bie <i5anb» 5. 3!)ie dten 
SlSdPe Isängen an ber SBönb l^tntcr ber ©tubentbfir* 6. 2)ie 
lange erwarteten @4)iffc ftnb jur (for ju ber) redbten ^dt anaess 
f ommen* 7. SBit werben morgen; wenn baé SBetter fd^Sn iji, 
jur nöc^iflen ©tabt fabren» 

20. — 1. The diamond is harder than tbe hardest steel. 2. 
My brother has foiind this prettj gold ring to-day. 8. Your 
hat is on the small table., 4. Give ^a piece *of'* bread ,to 
this poor old man. 5. To whom belongs the black dog? To 
Henry's fether. 6. I shall not buy the dear corn. 7. Wc 
have anot gseen jthe new house. 8. To-day is {tr. have we) the 
shortest day. 9. To whom have you given^ ihe new book ? 
10. 1 like the red flowers. 11. It is not the right time now. 



LE S SON XL 

THE SECOND, GB STBONG, DECLENSION OF ADJEGTIVES. 

BuLE 20. — ^When the adjective is not preceded by any 

distinguishing word which is inflected, it is declined like 
biefer* Example ;— 

SiNOlTIAB. FlUBAL. 

JfoM. Fem, Ntut, Mate Fem, Neut. 



N. aXitx alxt alte0 

G. alt^(e6t)' öltrt altni(eét)' 

D, alt em alt ev alt em 

A. alten alte alte0 



alte 
alt er 
alteit 
alte 



' Observe that the possessiyes meiner/ mine; betner/ thine; feiner/ 
hiB ; i^rer; hers ; unfrcT/ ours ; S^rer; yours ; i^rcr/ theirs, which cor- 
respond to those under Less. X., take eé in the genitive singolar of the 
mascnline and neuter, as meineé/ &c. 

Decline: alter SBcfn, old wine; frifdbeSSutter, new butter; 

fdb&ned «^aug; beautifnl house. (SSetn like IBad^$ IButtet like 
9tofe/ nopL ; ^auö like SSolf.) 

* Kemeinber that inverted commas indicate words which are not to 
be rendered. t ^^ ending en is now more &e<^<sti\X73 ^tt&^*'^cA5^ ^« 



24 



OEBHAN ELEMENTABT OEAIUUB. [lESS. XL 



i 



VOCABULABT XL 



bad SSetfptfIr n. the example 

b5é/ b6fe/ bad, wicked 

bunfel; dark 

einige/ some, any 

baé ga^/ n. the cask («/. giffer:) 

bie gCafd^e//. the bottfe 

gef auft/ bought 

bic t&erfunft/ /. the descent, birth, 

family 
bie Äartoffel//. the potato 
ha^ Stint)/ n. the child {pl. ^tnber) 

bic ftuft/ /. air, atmosphere {pl. 

SÖfte) 
ber ^anti/ m. the man (pl. ^&n^ 

ner) 
me^r/ more 

baé 9^aar/ w. the pair (jjI. ^aare) 
fd)n>arg/ black 
Wwåd^lid)/ delicate, sickly 
ber @^U^/ m. the shoe (p/. @d)U]S)e) 
ftd^/ himself 
bie @itte//. the manner 
ffif / sweet 
bie Slinte/ or -Dinte^/. ink 



STraubez/grape 
oerbecbett/ coimpt, spoil 
»ollen @ie/ will you have 
\>at Rimmet/ n. the room 
gutr&glid)/ healthy, good for 

äpple, TCpfcl/ «t. (;>/. ^Cepfel) 
bad (not. good) féled)t 
beggar, S3ettlet/ m, 
boy, Änabe/ «»* 

bread, loaf, S3rob/ n., IBrOt/ n. (^. 

aSrote) 
butter, Sutter//. 
coffee, ^affee/ wi. 
cup, a^afie//. 

dark, bunfel 

dinner, SKittagée/fen/ /». 

fresh, new, frtfc^ 

gambler, ©pielet/ nu 

glove, »&anbfd)U^/ «i. 

had, ^tl^aht 

ham, @d)in!en/ m. 

oak, @i*e/ /. 

,me, to me, mir (p. 30) 



EXERCISES. 

21— 1. a36fc JBcifpicIe t)crbcrbcn gute ©ittcn* 2. 3d) 
^abe fteutc cin gag gutcn öltcn SSScin gcfauft* 3.Dic guff 
bunfler Siwimcr iji fcl^Wöd)lid)en Äinbcrn nidbt jutrdgliA.. 

4. ^abcn @ie nodb altc Äartoffcin ? Sd) l)öbe f cinc meör* 

5. 2)icfcr iungc |)err ij! \)on gutcr ^crfunft» 6. SDBeifet 
SKann, flarf er SRönnf 7. @ufe Srauben t?dnacn bocb* 8. 
Äabcn @ic noc^ cinige \)on ben fd)5ncn reifeu 2iepfeln ? 3d) 
frtbc Icinc met)r* 9. ^cinricb böt jii) cin $aar ncuc ©dbube 
c^efauft* 10. ®ebcn ©ic mir tine glafc^e gute Slinte* 
SBoUcn @ic fdbwarje obcr rotf)£ Sinte ? 

22. — 1. Old houses have dark windows. 2. Young gambler, 
pld beggar. 3. Here is good ham, new butter, and verj good 
bread. 4. My sister bought [perf.] a pair *of ' pretty gloves. 5. 
His father has beautiful gardens and extensive (grop) forests. 

6. We [have] 4had * some ' ^new (junge) potatoes jfor (jum) dinner 



LESS. XII.] THIRD DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES. 



25 



gto-day. 7. They are good bojs. 8. They have good old wine, 
but bad beer. . 9. Give me a cup of strong coffee, and a piece 
of brown bread (@d)n)ar5brob). 10. There are higher mountains 
than these. 11. To-morrow is (<r. have we) the longest day. 
12. This oak is * very ' old (uralt). 



LE S SON XII. 

THE THIRD, OR MI\ED, DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES. 

EuLE 21. — When tbe adjective is preceded by ellt, mcflt/ 
bein, fcin, f Cin, unfct/ CUer, il)r, or^\)X (Lesson VL), it takes in 
the nominative singular tV for tbe masculine, t for the femi- 
nine, and 00 for the neuter. All tbe other cases end in ftl» 
except tbe accusative singular of tbe feminine and neuter 
gender, which is always like tbe nominative. Exartyple : — 



N. 
G. 
D. 
A. 



Mate, 

fetnee alt tn 
einem alten 
einen alten 



SmOULAB. 
Fem* 

fetne alte 
fciner alten 
fetnev alten 
feine alte 



NeuU 

cin'^ alte^»» 
etne§ alten 
etnem alten 
jfefn^^alteu»* 



Plttbal. 
Mcuc Fem. NeuL 

N. feine alten 

G. fejner alten 

D. f einen alten 

Ä. feine alten 

Decline: fein altcr giadbbar, feine gute 3eit, fein alteS 

^fett)* (^aå)hat like ^taat 5 9)ferb like SBad).) 

RuLE 22. — ^When tbe adjective is used as a noun-substantive, 
it still retains tbe adjective declension, some general term, as 
*man,' *woman,' *tbing,' &c. being imderstood; tbus: — ber 
JReicbe, tbe ricb man ; bie ©C^)6ne, tbe fair lady; ba6 5Reue, 
sometbing new; etn fStz\å)^X, a ricb man, <&c. 



* " stånds for * weak ; * •* for * strong.' See Lesaon VI. 



28 



GERMAN ELEMENTART GRAMMAR. [lBSS. XIII. 



RuLE 23. — The ordinal numbers are declined like adjeo- 
tives, the cardinals are not declined, except in a few instances, 
as, SRit SSicrcn faf)ren, to drive a carriage and four; aOe 
\)iere, the whole four. 

VOCABULART XIII. 



2CIte/ pl, all, the whole 

2CU3U{1/ m. August 

jDeutfd^/ Qerman 

^U|enb/ n, dozec 

fe^It eö/ wants it, is it to 

fc^leri/ want 

gricbrid)gb'or/ or ^oniiVoVf m. a 

gold coin, worth about 17«. 
gefagt; said, told 
©rofd^^n/ or ^ilbcrgrofdien/ w. a 

small silver com, greatly alloyed 

with copper, woiih litde more 

than a penuy 

madjtnt make 

SKonat/ m. month ; sDJinute^/. minute 

5)fcnnia/ m. penny (a vep^ 

small copper coin, of whicb it 

wants ten to make an English 

penny) 
$ntnb/ n. pound 
&éfOtif n, score (equal to tbree 

Énglish score^) 
^onnabenb/ m. Saturday 
@tunbC//. hour 
%1^oXtCt m. German dollar (a large 

silver coin, worth Za, in English 

money) 



fiber/ över 

yX^Xi f. dock {Za\å^Tiu^v, /. 
watch) 

fSiitUU n, quarter, foorth part 
(may be put before any noim 
denoting tvrne^ nteasure, weiqJii, 
^c. wUhout *o{^* as in Englisk) 

3t9/ n, the number of ten (uiei 
in compoundSf as fitn^ig/ fifly, 
five tens) 

toif oiel/ wbat (of time) 



century, Sa^r^unbcrt/ n. 

bow mucb, n)te oiel 

last, U^tf oon^ 

ligbt, ^å)U n, (pl. m^ttt, li^to; 

pl, iidjUf candles) 
past, oorbei 
people, Seute/ pl. (gen, bet Ecntf^ 

dat, ben Scuten) 
struck, 9efci)la0en 
wbat day of the month, ber ID^ 

©lelte («<wi.);* ben wteoietten 

(acc.) 
yard, eife//. ; this day, f^ft 



EXERCISES. 



25. a.— .1. ein t)cutf*er Sf)aler lf)at breff ig ©rofd^en : dn 
®rofd)en obcr ©ilbcrgrofdben lf)at ^^e^n ^fcnnigc» 2. Jfarf 
Stf)alcr macben einen goui§b'or obcr gricbric^Sb'or* 3. gieira 



pfunb* gin SSfcrtelial&r. _ ,_ -^., 

babcn eS jwcten obcr bretcn gcfaat» 8. Me ncunc» (Ät 



LESS. XIII.] NtJMERAL ADJECTIVZS. 29 

{To be commiited to memory,) 

a&J.— l.SBict)feltt]f)rijleS? 66 9c^)t auf ef nS* 2.(gStfl 
ein§, or g§ ijl ein U^r* 3. g6 iji «f)n ?!Rinutcn na* ciné» 
4. es iji ein SSiertel (auf) jwei* 5. es ifl l&alb jwei* es iji 
brei SSiertel jwei* 6. SBie t)iel feftlt e§ ju jwei? ©é feWen 
je^n gjiinuten JU jwei. 7. SBie\)iel iji eé aufffinf? esiji 
brei SSiertel (auf) funf* 8. (gé jtnb ad^t fKonate l^er (ago). 
9. aSot (ago) \>\zm\)n SCagen* 10. |)eute fiber ad)t SEage* (THb 

day week.) 11. ^eute fiber t)ierjel^n iEage* (This day fortnight.) 

12. SSor einer ]()alben ©tunbe* 

26. a. — 1. Whatday of the moiith*was it (|)atten wir) yester- 
day? Yesterday was the eleventh *of* August. 2. Fifteen 
groBcben make half a (cincn %alhiXi) dollar. 3. A quarter *of * a* 
pound 'of tea, 4. The peasant has nineteen geese and seven 
hams for sale (ju oerfaufen). 5. How much. [costs, foftct] the 
score? Three groschen and six pence (^fcnnigc). 6. The 
fiflh year of the eighteenth century. 7. ^ A quarter * of an ' 
hour jago. At (um) a quarter to three. 8. We have bought 
förty pounds *of *' coffee and twelve pounds of tea. 9. How 
much a (bic) yard? It is twenty-five groschen a yard. 10. 
We drove ((inb 0cfa]f)ren) in a carriage and four. (^See R. 23.) 

* Observe, that the preposition 'of is commonly not rendered after 
nouns expressing quantity, measurei weight, or number. 

26. b. — 1. What o*clock was it ? It has struck two. 2. It is 
now ten minutes past. 3. How much is it to eleven ? It wanta 
seven minutes. 4. Eight months ago. Saturday week. This 
day fortnight. 5. How old is your {add ^vau) J^other 1 She 
is above (fiber) förty. 6. Your (add gr&ulein) sister was nine- 
teen the fourth of last month. 7. Half-past nine. A quarter 
to ten. 8. ilt was 2this day 46 ve ayears gagö. 9. Many^ lights. 
Little light. 10. There are many^ candlea. We have several 
books. 11. Few people will comé. 12. There is much wine ; 
but there are not many kinds of wine {tr. many wines). 13. 
It is this day (add fiber) five years. 14. Where is your watch? 

• 05«er»e, that oiel/ much ; met)i*/niore(mel)rere/ several); »entö/ little 
(kpenige/ few), are only declined when expressing an indefinite number 
of objects or artides. When expressing an inå^^ite qitantity of any 
artide or materiali ihey are indedinable. • 



50 



GERMAN ELEMENTÄRT GRAMMAB. [hESB. XIV. 



LESSON XIV. 



PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 



IsT Pebs. Masc. Fiol Neut. 
Bmg, Plur, 

N. xå}, I tt)ir^ we 

G. mcincr/ofme unfct/ofus 
2>. mix, to me un§, to us 
A. mii), me un§, us 



2nb Pbbs. Masc Foc. KiUTi 

bU/ thou if)t, you 

bciner, of thee euer, of you 

bit/ to thee eud), to you. 
tié, thee zuå), you 



3bd Psbson. 
MAsa Fbm. Nbut. 

i^. cr, he jtC/ she c8/ it 

G. fcinct/ of him il)rer/ of her fcincr, of it 

D, xf)m, to him i^r, to her i()m, to it 
A, il^n, him ftc, her eé, it 

Mode of address (see Kule 1 and 2). Translate : to you^ you {dat,) bj 
S^nen instead of btr or eud^/ and you (oce.) by @te instead of bt(^ (ff 
eud). 

THE REFLECTIVE PRONOUN, 

Which is added to evezy mood and tense of the active Toice to form the 

reflective verb. 



FXwmL 
MAfU. EbicHsot 

|!e, they 
tbrer, of them 
tbnen/ to them 

{te^ them 



Bingular, 

Ist person, XtAå), myself 
2nd „ bic^/ thyself 

himself 

oneself 



un§, ourselves 
CUd^/ yourselves 

fid^; themselyes 



VOCABULART XIV. 



bott^ there 
fleiptg/ diligent 
gebrad)t/ brought 
immcr/ always 
lobeti/ praise 
tor ber ^&rf at tbe 
OOiv befora» in &ont 



door 

of (j^rep, with 



<?a<. and oec.); t^ flMan« 'ago,' 0r 
'before/ t&Aen t»a:{ of time 

Dorgeflenv tbe daj before yesteidaj 

totrb ermartet/ is ezpected 

he requests, er bittet (]with an mx.) 

I thank, id^ banfe (witb a dal,) 

we thodc, iDtr banfen 



LESS. XIV.} PmONAL AND B£FL£GTIV£ PIIONOXTNS. 31 



EXERCISES. 

27-— 1. Der SSatcr l)at fcincm ficigigen ©ol^nc^ ein fcJ^oncé 
85ucb 9efd)cn!t* 2. Sd^ werbc i^r cin ^aar ncue ^at[\)^ 
fcfeu^c faufen* 3. ^abcn @ic mcine fc^wa^e SEinte ? 3a, 
td^ l^abcftc» 4. ^afbcr &nabz meinc ncucn ©c^u^e gcbrac^t? 
3a, er ^)at fic t)or cincr ©tunbe gcbradjt» 5. ^abtn @ic c6* 
f^m gefagt? 3flcin; idb babe cS» 3^)nen gcfagn 6. ffiaé 
baben @ie® mir gefagt? 7. SBir babcn {le nicfet 9cfprod)en* 
8. 3* i&öbe ©ic tjorgejlern in ber é>ta'ot gcfcl^cn* 9. SBer tji 
ba t)or ber S^ur? @in SBcttlcr» ®cben ®ie i^m ein 
©tftcf S5rob» 10. @ic l)at uné bie S5ricfe gegcben* 11. 
SD3ir loben unS* @ie loben jid)* 12. Unfer einer wtrb bort 
nic^t enrartct» 

' Obaerve, that the case of the person precedes the case of the thing, 
unless the accusatiye is expressed by a personal pronoun, which is 
alwajs pnt before any other case. 

' Observe, that the pronoun of one syllable precedes the pronoun of 
two syllables; and when both the pronouns are monosyUables, the 
accusatiye is pnt before the dative. 

28. — 1. The rich are not always the happiest. 2. Have 
you given the letters to the boys? 3. Why have you not 
given her this beautiful gold ring ? 4. They have not told 
it him {dat.y 5. Where have you got my new shirts ? I will 
will give them you to-morrow. 6. Is the small bottle on the 
table ? Here it is. Where was it? 7. Where are the dögs? 
I have not seen them. 8. Our old neighboui* died the day 
before yesterday. 9. Bring [you] me a cup of coffee. 10, 
Will you have a cup of tea, we have not *got any' (fein) coffee. 
11. William is two years older than Henry ; Charles is the 
oldest. 12. It is colder to-day than yesterday. 13. We 
praise him, not her. 14. I thank you. We thank him not. 
15. He requests us. He requests them. 16. We request you. 
We request her not. 17. They do not praise themselves. We 
praise them. 18. I praise (lobe) myself. She loves {lUht) 
nersel^ 



32 



GEKMAN £L£M£NTAKT OBAHMAB. [lESB, XV. 



LESSON XV. 



INTERROGATIVE PKONOUNS. 



Belating to Persons. 
N, xotx, who 

i>. XOzm, to whom 
A. XOZXi, whom 



Rdaiing to TlUngs, 
XOCA, what 



Waé, what 



of whom, oon wen. 
RuLE 24. — SBcr is used when we expect the answer to be 
a person ; XOd^, when we expect the answer to be a thing. 

RuLE 25. — SBcr and traS are also used as indefinite relative 
pronouns, and commonlj foUowed by bcr and baé in the 
Becond sentence. {See 3. Ex. 29.) 

VOCABULAEY XV. 



auc^ also 

bet# at, abont {dai,) (of locahty, &c.) 

®laé/ n. glass, tninbler (^^. (Slåfet) 

@ott^ wi. God (p/. ®6ttcr) 

ilorb/ m. basket (p/. ^hxht) 

Itebt/ loves 

9l&c^fte/ m. neighbour 

Rtemanb/ no one 

fpred^en/ speak 

aSo^el/ m. bild (p/. aSSgcl) 

»oU/fuU 



brothers and sisters, ®t\6^XxAfiXtt 

pl. 
at eight o'clock, um aå^t tt^C 
did you say ? l^aben @te gefagt? 
have you been? f(nb @tc geméfen? 
indeedi n;)urfltci)l fOl XOCA ®te 

fagen ! 
money, ®elb/ n. 
musical, muftfaltfd) 
pitch dark, jtoctfinficr 
why, »arum 



EXERCISES. 

L— 1. SaScr ip jencr ^err ? SKciner 9Äuttcr l^r JBruberi 
or 25er JBrubcr mcincr tKutter- 2. SBcffen »g)auS tji bieé? 
or SBcm 9e]b6rt biefcé »öauå? 6§ gcbirt mir* 3. SOScr ®ott 
liebt, (ber) licbt aud) fcinen g?dd)ftcn* 4. SBaS l)abt % ba? 
©nen iunoen SSogeU 5. SBaa tft ba§ ? ©in fd)6ner JRing» 
6. SBen w bu in ber ©tube gefeben? 9liemanb* 7. JBon 
wem i^aben ©/e Sl^re ncuen ^emben gefauft ? 



LESS. XVI.] RELATIVE PQONOUKS. 33 

30. — 1. Who was it? It was your litde brother. 2. To 
whom have you given your old coats ? To a poor beggur. 3. 
Wbat has sne broughtyou? A basketful 'of ripe äpples. 
4. Whose table is it 7 It belongs to yoiir aunt^s sister. 5. 
Of whom have you spöken ? Of her. 6. 1 shall not speak to 
(mit) him. Why not ? 7. Bring [you] me a bottle *of * goöd 
wine and two glasses. 8. What did {perf.) you say? 9. 
Will you have a cup *of* tea or coffee? Tea, if you please 
(wenn tc^) bttten batf ). 10. At whose house {tr, at whom) have 
you been ? At your sister*s ; she is very musical. 11. Your 
{add ^err) brother must (muf ) be twenty years old. Indeed ! 
Not yet 12. It is getting dark. It is pitch dark at eight 
o*clock. 13. Have you any brothers and sisters? I have 
several. 14. Whose money is this? Not mine ; it is yours. 
(Less. XI., Obs. 3.) It belongs to me ; it belongs to you. 



LESSON XVI. 

What is a relative pronoun ? A word that relätes or refera 
to some word or sentence going before, which is thence termed 
the antecedent. 

What is a suhordinate or dependent sentence ? One which 
is subjoined to, or dependent on, the main or principal sen- 
tence, as * Thé letter which I have wntten to him has arrived. 
It is also called a secondary or accessory sentence. 

When a member of the independent sentence is expanded into the 
form of a new sentence, it is called a subordinate or dependent sentence; 
and the independent sentence then becomes the principal sentence. 

RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 

SiNOTTIAB. FlITBAL. 

ffi. ^» n. M. y« H» 

N. xozliftx, xciXijt, welc^c§; who, which [ tt)eld)e 
O. bcJTcn; bcrcti/ beffcn, whose, of which bcrcn 
D. mcld)cm, wcidjer, xoAiiim, to whom, to which tt)€ld)cn 

Å. xozlijixi, »elc^c, welc^eS; whom, wMck \ xö^^^ 

D 



34 



GERMAN ELESfEKTABT QRÅKXAR. [lESS. XVI^ 







SlNQTTIAB. 


* 




Plubix. 




«. 


/. 


«• 




«./.«. 


N. 


ber, 


bie 


baé/ 


who, which, ihat® 


bie 


G, 


bejTett; 


beren, 


befyett; 


whose, of which 


beren 


D. 


bcm, 


ber, 


bem, 


to whom, to which 


benen 


A. 


ben, 


bie; 


ba§, 


whom, which, that 


bie 



* Observe^ that 'who, which, that,' when referring to an antecedent, 
are indifferently rendered by loeld^er or httt ezcept in two inatanoes, 



Tiz. :- 



a, ^er must be nsed when the antecedent is a personal pronomi, 
which, for the sake of emphasis, is repeated after the relatiTe. 
Thus:— 3d)/ ber (not loelc^er) td^ ålter bin, ald bU/ 1, who am 
older than you. 

b. SSeldher must be nsed when the word foUowing the relatiTe is 
the definite artide. Thns:— 2)a« SÄ&bdt)en/ n)el4e<(not boé) 
baé UngläcE angertd) tet f)atf the girl who has done the mischief. 

RuLE 26. — ^The words which are used to connect th« aub- 
ordinate with the principal sentence are the relatives ber, 
Weicber/ and the conjunctions a% as; ba^/ that; ^ci, ednce; 
weil, because ; b\^, till, &c. {See Lesson XXXIIL) 

RuLE 27. — Order of words in a suhordinate sentence, — ^A 
verb in the present or imperfect tense, or the auxiliary in 
compound tenses, is placed lasU The other words are not 
removed from their usual place. Thus: — ^©er 85rief, n)eld}en 

icb i^m gefc^rieben ^ahz, tji angefommem Literally :— Tbe 

letter which I to him written have has airived. 



VOCABULART XVI. 



Sekter/ m. shortooming, fault 

ge^Olt/ fetched 

%aufmann/ m, merchant, trades- 
man; pl. JCaufleute (in a col- 
lective sensé), pl. JCaufmdnner 
(tn a distributive sense) 

nebenari/ next door 

nid)t me^r/ no longer 

fagte* said, told 

»ergnögt/ merry 

KW conj. as, how 

Woi^nt, liyes 



»oUen/ will 
ItXQUf showed 



any more, or some more (wUh « 
noun in the plural% no^ einigCr 
nod^ 

any more, or some more (wUk « 
noun in the singtdar), no4 Ct& 

»enig/ nod^ me^r/noc^/no^etnnti 
bnt, aber 5 were, n?aren 
Bnglish, @ngltfd^ 
glore, »^anbfctut/ m. 



LESS. XVL] 



BELATIVE PRONOUKS. 



35 



VOCABULARY XVI. — coTittnued, 



honest, aufric^tt^ zt^tlid) 

löst, oerloren 

must, muf 

made, Qemaåjt 

no more (m. fein (Äaffee) mf^r 
(tt^Ä aÅf. feine Rutter) me^i: 
«öw») (fl. fem (ä5icr) mc^r 

no more {re/errina f ?* JfJ"f '"l^^ 

brfore) ^^ "^-l"."'*^^ 
^' -^ V femé mc^ 

there is, ha tfi or eé tfl...ba 



shoemaker, @>d)U^macl^er/ m. 

w.tt?eldjer j 
some- f, weld)C l-cinwenig/ettraé; 

w. weld)eé 



m. nod) ttjeldf)ci: 
/. noclbn)eld[)e 
n. nod) n)eld;eé 



some more {ref er- ' 
ring to a noun 
goingbefore) , 

take, ne^men^ too, gu 
showed, }^xoXt or ktyd^t (^abe) 
umbrella, SSegenfcSirm/ m, 
wait, »artens till, bié 
there are, ba finb or eé finb...ba 



ExERCISES. 

31.— 1. e§ oicbt fcincn 3Rcnfc^)en; ber nfd^t fcmc gc&Icr 
l&aU 2. Aier ifl btc £)amC; bic (or »eld)e) ®ic fo länge ix^ 
xoaxUi Isjmn* 3. 2)cr Äauftnann, bcffcn ©djwcfier ©ie 
gcfpro(!ben ^Äbcti/ wo^nt ncbcnan* 4. 2)cr l^crr^ n)cld)cr 
{pr ber) mir ba§ ®clb jeigtc, ba6 er gefunben ^atte, tji nicl)t 
melf^: bter* 5. SBir; bi e (wo^ wei^e) wir nodb jung finb, wollcn 
veranftgt fein» 6. e§ war fo, wie ic^ 3f^)nen fagte* 7. 
®eben @f e mir x>m bem frifc^en SBaffer, »elc^eé («o< bal) baS 
SRdbc^en gebolt l^aU 

32.— 1. Here is the girl j who 4ha8 jlost gthe book. It is hers. 
2. Where does the shoemaker live who [has] made yotir new 
shoes ? Next door. 3. The horse which I have bought to- 
day is very young. 4. I must wait till yon have fetched your 
umbrella. ö. The gloves which I showed you were too dear. 
6. I believe him to be honest {tr, that he is honest). 7. I who 
p] am older than he. 8. Who are the gentlemen that I saw 
{perf.) at your house (bet Svinen) the day before yesterday ? 
They are merchants. 9. Have you any money with you (bet 
|i<i^) ? I have some (»eJd^d). I have English woney, but not 
much. 10. ils 4there (ba) ^^J more jtea? Yes, sir (mein 
Aerr), there is (ba ift) a little. 11. Is there any more.coffee ? 
Yes, miss, there is some. There is (eg ift) some more {add ba). 
There is no more. 12. Are there any more äpples ? There 
are no more. 13. Will you take any more wine ? There is 
some more; there is no more beer. 14. Will you take some 
more potatoes? -There are some more, There are no more. 



86 



GERMAN ELEMEirTABT QRAMMAB. [USS. XV1L 



LESSON XVIL 

« 

What are auxiliary verbs ? Auxiliaries, or helping verbi^ 
are those bj the aid of wliicb other verbs are conjngated* 

AUXILIABIES OF TENSE. 



Ihad 

er l}attt 

PLxoixi)attm 
it}x Rattet 
Re tjattni 



I have had, 
didhave 

bu U\t ge^abt 
er t)at gefjabt 

FL wir l^öben ael)abt 
ibr f)abt gepabt 
fte laim ge^abt 



Imperfect, Indicative, 

I WB8 

td[^ war 
bu n)ar0t 

erwar 

xoixwaxen 
H)xxDaxtt,(n'waxt 
jte warcn 

Perfectf Indicative, 
I have been 

id^ bin gewefen 
bu bl fl gewefen 
er ifl gewefen 

wir finb gewefen 
f^r fetb gewefen 
jie jtnb gewefen 



I got, became, ma 
getting, did get 

iå)xiomhe, oTYDorb 
bun)urbr0t/or 

n)arb0t 
er wmit, or xoaxti 
wlrwurben 
iljx wurbrt 
jte wurbni 



I have beoome^ goi| 
grown 

fd) bin geworbcn 
bu btfi gen)orbeti 
er tji geworben 
wir finb 9en)orben 
if)x feib geworben 
jie jinb geworben 



KuLE 28. — The imperfect is the narrating or historical 
xense, both in English and German ; in German conversational 
language, however, the perfect is generally employed; and ihe 
imperfect is onlj used when the speaker was an eje-witneai 
of the circnmstance he relätes. 



LESS. XVII.J ÄtlXILIABIES OF TENSE. 37 

RuLE 29. — The English imperfect, which is nsed when the 
action or state is limited by ihe circumstance of time or place, 
as: ' we saw him yesterday/ must frequentlj be rendered into 
€rerman by the perfect, thus, * we have seen him yesterday/ 

YOCABULART XVII. 



TCmertf a# America 
aud/ out^ away from home 
S3ebtente/ m. footman, man-seryant 
fertt^ ready, finished 
^taUtf. wife, woman, Mrs. 
f)apter/ n. paper 
f)q>tec^dnbler/ m. stationer 
éanb/ n. countiy (pl. Sdnber) 
@d^U^mad^r/ m. shoemaker 
@Olbat/ m. soldier 
»er(jnÄat/ merry, pleased 
SSergnogen/ n. pleasure, enjoyment 



enough, genug 
evpning, 2(benb/ m, 
at home, gu ^^aufe 

ill, ttanl 

became, got, wnthtf xoavh 

.little, menig 

money, ®etb/ n. (p/. ®elter) 

suddenly, pli^lic^ 

whole, ganj 

on the, am 

Hhine, SR^eill/ m. 

become of, jtp, geiDOrben aué 



EXERCISES. 

33—1. Ser ?>apt€rl&^nWet ^attc !cfn guteö 9)apier» 2. 
4)öt fic mel JBcr^nfigen auf bem ganbe geböbt ? 3a, p: war 
febr Krgnuc^t* 3. Der Änabe unb baS SRdbcben wurben*® 
m&be* 4. aSiiren ©te oeflern ju |)aufe ? SRein, ic^ irar aué* 
5. ©er feebiente ffl bei oem (Så}ixi)mai}tx fiewefen ; aber Sbte 
@i}uf)z roaxtn nod^ ntc^t ferttg* 6. SQ3a§ if} auS tl^m c(e^ 
tDorben? @r Ifi nadt) 3Cmertfa gegangen» 7. 3ii Sbt ©obn 
Äaufmann AetDorben? SSttin, er ift ©olbat fleworben* 8. 
Sl&re grau SRutter unb S^r »^^n SSater »erben alt» 

i<> Observe, that two or more nominatives reqnire the verb in the 
plural. 

34. — 1. They had little paper. 2. She had no time. 3. 
We have not had enough money. 4. The children were still 
yoTing ; the yomigest was two years old. 5. My old fatlier 
feU (tr, became) suddenly ill. 6. It was getting colder in the 
(am) evening. 7. Your daughters have grown very tall. 8. 
We saw him yesterday (R. 29), 9. I was jnot gat home 
jthis moming. 10. They were very merry all the day long 
(tr. the whole day). 11. You were right. 12. What has become 
of his little children ? His son became a tradesman, and got 
very rich. 13. Have you been on the Rhine? Ye-s^ W^ 
year. 14. We were not in [the] town. 



88 



GERMAN ELEMENTABT OBAMMAB. [LESS. XVIII 



LESSON XVIIL 



AUXILIARIES OF MOOI>. 



I. ,^dnnen/ to be abie, can. Part. post, gcionnt 



Present, 
I can, am able 

Sinff. id} fann 
bu Fannfi 
er fann 

Piur. xoixUnmn 
i\)x fbmt 
fte fonnen 



(Inéieative,) 

I 



Ifi^nerfed, 
I cxmkåf wsB M9 

lå) fonnte 
bu f onntefl 
er fonnte 
rotr f onnten 
ibr fonntet 
fte f onnten 



2. <Dfitfen/ to be aHoyred, åsre. Part. past, gebarfi. 

{JndkaHte.} 



PresenL 
1 dåre, am allowed 

Stng. id) barf 
bu barfjl 
er barf 

Plur, ttrfrbfirfen 
\f)x bfirft 
fte biirfen 



Jfitper/ect. 
1 åareä, was allowed 

ic^ burfte 
bu burftejl 
er burfte 

wir burften 
H)r burftet 
fie burften 



S. $0{5gen/ to like, maj. Part, post, gcmod^t 

Present» (IndiattfM^y In^Mirfeet, 



I like, maj, I do like 

Sing. fc^ mag 

bu magft 

er mag 
Plur. wirmjgen 

ibrmSgt 

jie mJgen 



I liked, mighl 

ic^ moci)te 
bu mod)tefi 
er modt)te 
wtr mo(!bten 
ffer mod)tet 
{ie mo^tcn 



LES&. XVin.] AUXILIARIES OF MOOD. 



89 



VOCABULARY XVIII. 



auAf alaOf eyen 

auége^en/ to go ont 

bttten/ to ask, beg 

taför fönnen/ to be able to help it, 

to be one^s fault 
gletfd^/ n. meat 
Kranjöfifd)/ French 
fräser/ formerly, some time ago, 

befors, earlier 
9erne# willingly, much 
immeVf always 

^utfd)er/ m. coachman, driver 
lefen/ to read 
liebet/ better, rather 
fageti/ to tell 



fdj)mu$l9/ dirty 
fd^reiben/ to write 
S^t&cfd^en/ n. small piece, morsel 
t^un/ to do 
»erjgeflcn/ forgotten 
weiter !6nnen/ to be able to get any 
farther, to get along 

mm, if 

cannot it, fann e« nid^t* 

drive, fa^ren 

eat, effen 

fruit, Objl/ n. 

ride, reiten 

see, fe^n 

8pe«Lk, fpred)en 



35.— 1. 9Ran fann nid)t au§9cl)cn, c§ ifl ju fc^mufeig» ^2. 
©r maq ben SBBein mi)U 3. Darf i^ ©ic um cin ©tucf 
glcifc^ bftten? 4. Sbr burft ba§ nfd^t tt)un» 5. SBir mågcn 
liebcr fcbreibcn al§ Icfcn* 6. 3* fann (i know) englifc^ unb 
granjojtfd)* 7. ©te moi)ten ni*t f ommcn* 55urfte er e§ 
tbun? 8, SBir fonntcn bie ®l(Jfer nid)t faufcn* 9. 3d) 
fonnte frul)er ©eutfd), abcr id) babc c§ wiebcr löcrgcffcn» 10. 
©ie fonnen €6 mtr faocn* 11. 3d) mag gcrne fd)reiben» 12. 
®cben ©ic mir cm ©tucfdbcn SSvot, wcnn id) bittcn barf, 
fo flein e6 aud) fcin mag» 13. S5Ja§ fann berÄutfd)cr immer 
tafur, wenn bie ?)ferbc nid^t weiter fonnen» 

36. — 1. Can you do that? I can [it] ; but Charles cannot 
[it].* 2. We like jreading (inf.) jvery mucb (gcrn). 8. Do 
you know {tr. can you) German ? I can jread jit, but not speak. 

4. He does not like this tea ; it is 2too strong * for ' jbim (dai.), 

5. They could not do it. 6. We did not like to go out. 7. 
She is not allowed * to ' see me. 8. I was not permitted to 
drive. 9. Do you like (add gern) wine ? 10. I like beer better 
(Uebcr) than wine. 11. She liked gwriting (inf.) jbetter than 
reading (inf.). 12. You *do not' like (addUin) fruit. 13. 
The boys may (tr. can) come. 14. IVIay (börfcn) I ask you for 
it (barum) ? 15. The little girls were not able to help it. 16. 
My father jlikes ^riding jbetter than driving. 17. We are 
not always allowed ' to * eat what we like (g en m5ftcnV 1^« ^ 
may be. , They may do it. 



40 



ftfUMAW ELEXEXITABT OBAMKAB* f LESS. Xn 



LESSON XIX. 



Sing. 



AUXILTARIKS OF MOOD — COtUinUtd, 

4. ^tCen/ shall, am tx)^ to l>e ordered. Fart, post, gefoQt 

PretenL ilndkoHve.) Impwftdt, 

I shall, am to I should, oaght to 



Plw. 



Du fottfl 
er foU 

xm foUen 
Vax foUt 
fic foUen 



ic^ foate 
Du foatefi 
er foHte 

tt)ir fotlten 
lör fotttet 
fie foHten 



foQ fetR/ is said to be, shall be. 

6. SBoOeil/ to be willing, intend, vant to, mean, have a mind to, &c 

'Pari, post, QtmoUU 



Jh'e»ent. 
I am willing, will 
Sing. ii) XOili 

bu wiUfi 
ttroiU 
Plur. xoit woUen 
tbr kDoUt 
{te n)oUen 



(/iKlieaftve.) Itnper/ect 

I was willing, would 
ii) XOOUtt 

bu woUtefi 
er woUte 

tt)ir woUten 
ibr rooötet 
jie woHtcn 



id^ »ill gletd) (with Inf,), or \&j bin im fficgriffe (toi^A Supine), I ai 

going to. 

6. SÄöjfen/ to be obliged, must. Fart. post, öemugt. 



Pre$enU 
I am obliged, must 
Sing, ic^ mug 

bu mu|t 
er mu^ 
P/wr. tt)ir muffen 
tbr mugt 
fle muffen 



Imperfeet, 
I was obliged 

ic^ mugte 
t>u mugtejl 
er mu^te 
wir mugten 
Ibr mugtet 
fie mupten 



LESS. XIX.] AUXILIAKIES Or MOOD. 41 

PmfeeL 

iå) lj)abe gcfonnt, gcburft, &c. 

Ftuperfeä, 

\å} l)atU gefonnt; geburft, &c. 

HuLE 30. — The compound tenses are formed hy means of 
the auxiliary verbs and the participle past, or infinitive, of the 
verb ; but it is observable that the infinitive must be used in- 
stead of the participle past when another infinitive precedes ; 

as, ic^ ^abc fc^rcibcn fonncn, not, icfe l^aU fc^rcibcn gctonnt» 

VOCABULARY XIX. 



abretfen/ to set out, depart 
aufbleiben/ to stop up, sit up 
gleid^/ iminediately, direetly 
int ^egrtffe/ to be going to, on the 

point of 
je^t/ now, at this time 
fd)On/ already 
fcbwiben/ to write 
fpa jieren geben/ to go for a walk, 

takea walk 



SBctter/ m. or @ou|tn/ m. cousin 
DOr^er/ before 

come, fommcn 

footman, S5cbientC/ m, 

letter, S3rtf f/ m, 

o'clock, Ubr 

this afternoon, t)eute ^a&imiitCi^i 

bicfen ^a&imtta^ 
when, ttjann 



EXERCISES. 

37.— 1. SBir tDöHcn e§ glcid) t^un* 2. Sd) wcrbe c§ glei^ 
t^un» 3. @r war im SSegrijfe an Sb^^^n SSettcr ju fd)reibcn» 
4. Die 2)amc foU fc^6n fcin» 5. @{e mug fcfeån fcin» 6. 
£)iefc SBaumc foHcn alt fein» 7. Die Änaben muffen ®^lb 
aenufl baben. '8. SBir muffen abreifen* 9. SRöffen Sie jel^t 
fcfeon geben ? 10. @ie »oUte nf dbt fommen» 11. 2)u follteff 
e§ mir t)orber flefaot baben» 12. 3d) mugte bie oanje iRacbt 
aufbleiben» 13. SBir b^ben ntdbt fpajieren geben finnen» 
14. SBarum b<xtten @ie nicbt mit mir auSgeben wotten? 3cb 
burfte nicbt. 

38. — 1. 1 will go for a walk with you. 2. When are you 
obliged to go out? At(um) three o*clock. 3. 1 was.obliged to 
go. 4. He would not see me. 5. Will you come? 6. You ought 
til do it. 7. She ought to write to (an) him. 8. The footman 
did not want to drive. . 9. 1 shall not ^o <i\3Ä. \/^-^a:^. V^.^ 



42 GERMAN ELEMENTABT GRAMUAR. [lES8. XX. 

will not (am not willing to) go ont to-day. 11. They have not 
been able to read your letter. 12. You must.shave ^forgotten 
,it. 13. He had a mind to go for a 'wtJk this aftemoon. 14. 
Will you read this letter of his (tr. this *one* of his letters, or this 
letter from him) ? Immediately ; not now. 15. Must you depart 
already ? I am going to depart (abjuretfen) directly. 



LESSON XX. 

WEAK AND STRONG VERBS. 

What is a weak verb ? One which requires, in order to 

form the imperfect tense and participle past, the addition 

of a t (English d), which is joined to the radical syllable^* 

of the verb. 

" Observe, that the radical syllahle is found hy omitting the ending 
en of the infinitive. Weak verbs are also termed regular, modem» or 
assonant. 

What is a strong verb? One which forms its imperfect 
tense** and participle past by changing the vowel of the 
radical ^Uable; as, filtlcn^ to fall, imp, fitlf felh 

" Observe, tbat there is no ending added to the first and third person 
singular of the imperfect of strong verbs. Strong verbs are also tesrmed 
irregular, aneient, or dissonant 

What is the radical syllahle, or root? It is the nnderived and 
original element, or syllahle, of "whose origin we can giye no foxther 
account. The root always ezpresses the most general meaning of a 
word, and it may be traced in all kindred words containing that 
meaning. 

CONJUGATION OF THE VERB. 

There are two great classes, or conjugations, the regular, or 
weak, and the irregular, or strong, conjugation, distinguished 
by the form of the imperfect and the participle past. The 
infinitive ends always in en* Example : — 

I^finiHve. Imptrfedt, Fttrt. Pa$L 

Weak: f)5rnt, to hear. bhxit, heard. gthbvt, heard. 
Strong : fcf) m, to see. f 4 f), saw. ge fe^) tU, seen. 



LESS. XX.] 



CONJUGATION OF WEAK VERBS. 



43 



CONJUGATION OF WEAK, OR REGULAR, VERBS. 
Pre$enL {IndiecUive.) Imptrfvi. 



I hear, am hearing, or do hear 
Sing, \i) \ihxt 

er \jhxX 
Plur. wix\)ivtn 
ihr Ut t 
fit hhxm 



I heaid, was hearing, did hear 

ic^ i}bxit 
bu $&rte0t 
er \)bxtt 
xoix ijixtm 
ihx b&rtet 
fie Uxttn 



FafeO. Pluperfeet, 

ii) l^abc gcl^årt; I liave heard iå) l)atU ge^årt, I h&å heard 

Future, 

iä^ werbe Isåren, I shall hear 

In the same manner are conjugated, e. g. : — 



txxoaxUn (erwartcte, erwar^s 

fragen, to ask [M), to expect 

gc{)5ren,* to belong 

glauben,* to believe 
bolen, to fetch, go for 
föufcit/ to buy, purchase 

liebeU/ to love 



lobert/ to praise 
fagen,* to say, tell 
fcbcnf en,* to give, present 
fud)en, to look for, seek 

xoaxUn auf (wartete/ gewar^s 

Ut)f to wait for 
»o^nen, to dwell, live 



VOCABULART XX. 



hlantt brlght-lookiDg, new 
9?ebermcfleC/ n. penknife 
pilten/'' to feel 



eyening, 2Cbenb/ m. 
morning, fOlorgen/ m. 



ExERCISES. 

39.— 1. Sd) wolbne öuf bem Sanbe, bu wof)nft fn ber, 
©tabt 2. er lobt ben fleigtgen Änaben» 8. SBJIr biren 
fbn fommen* 4. (Sudben @ie 3()r neue§ gebermejTer? 5. 
^olen @ie SBSeln ober SBaffer? 6. SBir erwarteten i^n ben 
^njen Sag ; toix f onnten t\ii}t Idnger auf t^n n)arten* 7. 
©ie fcbenf te !t)m efnen blanf en SE^ölen 8. 3^r ^6rtet nlå}U 
©ie fud)ten ilS)re beutfd)en S3udber» 9. 3d) ^atte ©te nfcbt 
erwartet 10. SBJarum Röttet fbr e§ mtr nid^t fru^)er gefagt? 
11. ©ie mSqen fagen, traS ©ie woUen, Id) glaube 3()nen 
nic^t 12. äBer ni*t l^oren wtQ, (ber) mug fublen» _ 

* With <fa^wc of pexfioii. 



44 QESMAN ELEMENTÄRT aRAHMAR. [lESI XSI. 

40. — 1. In (auf) which street does lie live ? t believe lie 
lives in this street. 2. We ezpected you the whole moming. 
3. Thej did not wait for ns. 4. The girl fetched two loaves 
and a pound ' of butter. 5. My cousin bought me a pair of 
new shoes. 6. Whose bonnet are you looking for? I am 
looking for my mother*s bonnet 7. We lived *for' two yeais 
in the country. 8. Do you believe it ? I did not believe it. 
9. We had not expected you this evening. 10. He lives at 
his brother*8. 11. They praise themselves (Less. XIV.). 12. 
I believe to-day is the longest day. (See Ex. 20, Sent 8.) 



LESSON XXL 

WEAK AND STRONG VERBS; ROOT-VERBS AND DERIVATIVES. 

The term strong is applied to all those primitive verbtf 
which have descended to us from the earliest period of the 
German language, without having imdergone any ftmda- 
mental change in their conjugation. As they all are original 
roots of the language, they are called root-verbs. 

Many root-verbs which once followed the old, or strong, form of con- 
jugation are now conjugated according to the modem, or weak, form ; 
as, n>o(;nen/ fagen/ f aufen/ &c. ; still, they must be regarded as original 
roots of the kmguage." 

" Observe also a few yerbs which sometimes follow the strong coxgu- 
gation if used intransitiTely, and the weak coi\]ugation if used transi- 
tively; thus: — 



ItUransitivelp. 
ba^kxif hixlf to bake, be baked 
bråten/ briet/ to roast, be fried 
\iå) erfd^rcden/ tt\å)vah to be fright- 

ened. 
fd)mel5cn/'fci)mot5/ to melt, be molten 



Ti-ansiHvely, 

bacfen/ bacftc/ to bake 
bråten/ hvattttf to roast, fry 
ei:fd)recEen/ erfci)recEte/ to frighten 



fc^mel^en/ fci)melate/ to smelt 

The term weak is applied to all derivattve verbs, that is, 
verbs derived from root-verbs,^* or from other primary deri- 
vatives. The derivative verbs follow the modem, or weak, 
form of conjugation, and do not admit the inflection or change 
of the radical or characteristic vowel. 

i« Observe^ that weak verbs derived from stzong verbs have often a 



LESS. ZXI.] tlBSr CLASS OF STKOMO VEBBS. 



45 



transitire, or eausatiye, xneaning, most strong verbs being intransi- 
tives; thus:— 



Strong and IntratuiHvem 

fallen/ to fall 
liegeti/ to lie 
ft|en/ to be seated 
jle^en/ to stånd 



Weak and TransUive, or Causativt, 

f&Uen/ to cut down, fell 
legen/ to place, lay 
fegen/ to put^ place 
fleUen/ to pnt 



CONJUGATION OF STRONG, OR IRREGULAR, VERBS. 

The principal feature in the conjugation of strong verbs is 
tbe change of the radical vowel in the present (second and 
third person singular), imperfect (both indicative and subjunc- 
tive), and participle past. 

FIRST CLASS OF STRONG VERBS. 



Ihtsent, 
I see, am seeing, I speak 
do see 



bu fir^0t 
er HeH 
xoxx ftf)en 
i\)t Uf)t 
jte fc^nt 



t>urpric^0t 
er fpri^t 
tt)ir fprec^m 
i^rfprcdf)t 
Pe fprec^ni 



IsaWfWasseeing, I spöke 
didsee 



bu fai^0t 

wfr falken 

t^rfaM 
jte fai^ni 



id) fpra4/ 
bufprad^0t 
er fprac^ 
wfr fprac^en 
i^r fprac^et 
iie fprac^m 



Like fei)tn, fa b/ gef^ljien; are conjugated : — 



bitUn, to beg, ask 
(imp. iat) 

gebeti/ to give 

(efen, to read 



Ifegen (fO,* to He 
ftfeen (fO, to sit 
(föf / flefeffen) 



treten (fO, to go, 

step 

t)er3effen; to forget 



Like fprr ^en, fpra^, gcfproc^cn, are conjugated :— 



bcifen, to help 
fommen (f*)/ to 
come (iwip. f am) 



treffen, tohit,meet 

with 

werfen; to throw 



nc^)men;totake,2?/?. 

genommen 
fierben (fO/ to die 

Like fed)ten, fod)t, gefodbten, fight; thus:— . 

bcwecen, to indnce | fc^eren, to shear, clip 

* (f.), after a verb, stånds for feitt/ signifying tbat its compotind tenses 
are always; or only in some instances, formed bj means of feuv &nd not 
by ^aben/ as is generally the case. 



46 GERMAN ELEMEMTABT ORAMMAB. [lESS. XXL 



VOCABULART XXI. 



aHeui/ alone, by himself 
bet/ with, near (dat.) 

baju {for 3u bem), to it 
ejTcn/ to eat {ah gegejTen) 

etioaé/ some, somethin^ anj 
nidnét nothing, anything 
fatteln/* to saddle 
©d)af/ ». sheep (^p^. ©c^afe) 
&å)mihext m. tailor 

^^en (f.), to stånd (f!anb/ geffanbcn) 
tf)mu to do (t^at/ get^an) 



bravely, tapfer 
conqner, ffcgen* 
dinner, WttaQU^tttt n. 
drawing-room, S^tfttenitmmet/ n. 
more than, fiber {ace.^ 
paper, newspaper, ^tbtn^f. 
ready, fertig 

stove, Öfeiv m, (pl. JDefen) 
traveller, Steifenbe/ m. 
venison, ^(Bilbpret/ n. 

Buddenly, Tplb^lidjt unerwartet 



EXERCISES. 

41.— 1. SBSer fein S5rob aHcin igt, muf fetn 9)fcrb aHcfn 
fattclm 2. ©ie^fi bu eS ? (gr fic^t c§, ic^ fc^c e« nicfet* 3. 
SBir iaijtn i\)n niåiU 4. 3i} ag iu \>kU 5. gr fprac^ t)icl 
unb la§ wenig* ^ 6. ^å) fag fn ber ©tubc^ alS er fom» 7. 
S<^ tat ibn, nd^cr ju trctcn* 8. ©ic ^abcn e§ getban» 9. 
©le giebt mir etwa§ ®elb* 10. 2)ic \£)cncn jJanben bci ibm* 
11. Der ^c^neiber ftarb geflern Äbenb* 12. 3i}x batet mic^ 
JU fommen* 13. SBann rommt er? 14. ^it SSauerÄ ^aben 
bie ©d^fe gefcboren» 15, gr bewog mi(!b boju* 16. S38ir 
böben nit^t§ gegeffen» 17. SBarum Mtteji bu pe nid^t ? ©le 
tt>iU e§ nic^t tl^un* 

42. — ]. They do not see us. 2. He speabs to (m^ me. 
Did he speak to you? 3. You do not eat much. 4. I waa 
sitting in my room near the stove when the traveller called, 
(tr. came) and ,wished (njoUcn) 2*^ speak *to' ime (aoe,), 5. 
The fbotman indnced him jto ^wait ^an 2hour. He took the 
money [which] I gave him. 6. Step into the drawing-room. 
7. She is reading the paper. 8. The soldiers fbught (perf.) 
bravely. 9. He spöke little. 10. Where do you come 
from (Jer)? 11. The man died very suddenly. 12. Caesar 
came, saw, and conquered. 13. The papers lie upon my 
table. 14. Do you like (gem ejfen) venison ? 15. We have 
waited for you more (tr, longer) than an hour, but you did not 
come. The dinner was ready, and we could wait no (tr, not) 
longer. 16. Were jou alone all the time ? No, mj youngest 
broäier waa with me. 



LESS. XXIl.] SECOND GLASS OF STBONG VERBS. 



47 



LESSON XXII. 



SECQND CLASS OF STRONG VERBS. 



Ibear, cany 

td) txaat 
t)n trf90t 
er tragt 
toir trägen 
fbr tragt 
jic trägen 



Present, 

IfaU 

bu fia0t 
erfåat 
tt)ir faUen 
lör fatt t 
pc fallen 



I bore 



Imper/ea, 



IfeU 



ic^trug ic^fiel 
t)utrtt90t bufiel0t 
ertrug erftel 
wlrtrugen wfrfielen 
ibrtrugt i&rfielt 
jictrugen jtefielen 



Like trägen, trug/ gctragen, are conjugated.:— 

fd^lagcn, to strike, beat 



bacf en.tobake, bebakecl(Oft5.13) 
fa^ren (f*), to drive, ride in a 
carriage 



wad)fcn (f*)» to grow 
wafdbcn, to wash 



Like fatteti; f tel, gcfaflen (fO, thus :— 



bråten, to roaat, &j {Obs, 13) 
bangen, to häng, be suspended 
lafTen, to let, leave 

balten, to hoid 



laufen ([♦), to nm (part. ^z^ 

laufen) 
rufen, to call {part gerufen) 
fd)lafen, to sleep 



VOCABULART XXII. 



bo, as, since 

SDacft, n. poof {pl JDåd^er) 

gttf, m, foot (fl, ^öf e) 

genien (f.), to go (ging/ öeöanQcn) 

lemanbi somebody 

^aaen, m, coUar 

Äirdie,/. chnrch 

Äutfd^e,/. coach 

5DUct]^futfd)e,/. hackney-coach 

9leflfe, m, nephew 

©perling, wi. sparrow 

Safd)entud), n. pocket-bandkercbief 

(^. a^f(bemfid)er) 



tleberroc!/ m, oyercoat» grest-ooat 
SS&fc^ertn,/. laimdress 
SBod^c,/. week 

beef, SRinbfleifd^, n. 

catch, fangen (png, öefangen) 

cry, weincn ^ 

crowd, SRcnge,/. 

fast, fd^nell, gefd)n)inb 

mutton, ^ammelfleifd)/ n. 

never, nic 5 from the, OOOI 
' shore, Ufer, n. 
1 sailor, SJlatcO^ti m« 



48 GtBMAN iXEMENTART ORAMMAR. [lESS. XXII. 



EXERCISES. 

43.-1. 3cmanb ift mir auf ben gug fletrcten* 2. 2)cr 
JBcbicnte f)at an ber %i}ut gepanben» 3. 1)ie Äöfee ift forts 
fldaufcn» 4. 2)cr ©pcrling ficl tobt t)om 2)a*e ber JRircbe* 
5. 3Ber ruft micb? 3* rief ®ie» 6. 2Bie \)iet l)at eS ge^ 
fcWagen ? 66 fc^lug eben brei VH)x* 7. S^r f lelner iReffe 
trdgt einen fc^warjen UeberrocF* 8. SSSarum faufen bie 8cute 
fo? 9. 3n waS ftnb ©le gefabren? Sc^ fu^)r in einer 
Äutfd^e* 10. 2)ie aSSdfc^erin wdfcfet jebe S38od)e meine 
SEafd)entåd)er unb Äragen» 11. SSSir lie^en ibn gelben, ba er 
n\å)t blelben woUte» 12. ^aben ©ie lefete SRadjt gut gcs» 
Wafen? 

44. — 1. The master called liis footman. 2. What is it 
striking? It is striking six. 3. Where are the clean (ge^ 
wafd)cn) sbirts ? They are (^. lie) on your bed. 4. He runa 
[nad^] home. 5. 1 befieve that she is asleep (fd^lafen). 6. How 
long did you sleep ? 7. The man fell from the roof of the 
church. 8. He goes. It grows well. 9. It struck ten. We 
rode in a hackney-coach. 10. I will let him sleep. 11. 
lliese yoimg trees bear good fruit 12. He is running fast 
An old sailor stood on the shore and cried. 13. Did you buy 
any beef ? No, I bought ten potmds of mutton. 14. Whom 
did you caU? I called you. 15. Why do the people nm? 
Did you run (jferf.) too? I ran with the crowd. 16. I 
believe he likes äpples very much (gcrn). We have a great* 
many, but I never eat any (wclcl)e). 17. We were baking 
{Obs. 13) bread the day before yesterday. They are baking this 
aftemoon. 18. The bread jwas baking gin the öven 3when 48he 
gcame ghome. 19. The girl was fry ing the fish * for * you 
(3^ncn) which you caughtf this moming. 20. We had roast 
meat for dinner. 

* * a great/ transl. * very.* f *caught/ petf, have canght. 



LESS. XXIII,] THIRD CLASS OF STBOKG VERBIt 



49 



LESSON XXIIL 



THIRD GLASS OF STRONG VERBS. 



Pretmi, 

I ride, do ride, am 
riding 

i* reite 
bu rette0t 
er reUet 
wir reit^tt 
tbr reitrt 
ftc reit^il 



Iflee 



buflteNt 
er fliel&t 
xoit flki}tn 



ihxflkhtt 



ilki)tn 



I Tode, did ride, I fled 

was riding 



id?ritt 

buritte0t 
er ritt 

wfrrittoi 
tbrrittrt 
fie rittm 



er fl 31^ 
tt>fr floden 
i^rflol&rt 
fte fiolen 



Like r^iten, ritt, ger i t ten, to ride, go on horseback; 
thus: — 



betten/ to bite 

XO^\iC|^Xi, to yield 



f^nciben, to cut (tmp/. fdbnltt, 
i?/>. flcfcbnitten) 



Like f:^r^i ben, fcferi^b, fiefcferirben, to write, are conju- 

gated : — 



bleiben (f»), to stay, remain 
^ei^en, to be called, bid one 

to do anything (ge^ei^en) 



fi}elnen/ to shine, seem 
fd)reien/ to scream, cry 
f4)weigen, to be dlent 



Like Piel&en (fO/ fl 01^/ 9efl0{)en, to Hte; thus:— 



licacn (f*), to fly 
liepen (fO> to flow 
r i er en, to freeze, be cold 
genie^en, to enjoy, eat 



lilgen, to tell a lie 

fc^ie^en, to shoot, kill 

f(!^w6ren, to swear 

tjerlieren, to loaa 



50 GERMAN ELEHENTARY ORAHMAR. [lBSS. XXIIi^ 



VOCABCLART XXIII. 



toåif nevertbeless 
eibC//.the river Elbe 
gcinb/ m. enemy 
lei^en^ to lend (lief), gelte^cn) 
&pklf n. play, game 
®wppt,f. soup 
äa^n^ m. tooth 
3ungc//. tongue 

angry, bfife^ Srgcrlid) 
battle, ©c^lad^t//. 



hare, .^ofe/ m, 

bome, df/^t;. nad) •^aufe 

last, t>ortg/ oergangen 

loud, laut 

partrid^e, ffUh^u^rif n. (jMf^tL^nec) 

pen, gcber,/. 

pigeon, SSaubC//. 

pursue, Dcrfolgen'' 
slowly, langfom 
snipe, ©d^nepfc// 
write to, fd^reiben an 



EXERCISES. 

45.— 1. £)ft bcift ber S^^n bie äunge, unb bod^ bleibcn 
pc gute 9lad)barn» 2. S)ie gcinbe jtnb geflolf^cn* 3. SBir 
ftnb fteute SKorgen In ble ©tabt gerittcn unb l^öbcn ben 
(^anjen S^ag t)iel aeritten* 4. SBo bltebfl bu fo lange? 5. 
iBie ^eigen ©fe? 3c^ l&eige ^einric^» 6. 8Sor einigen 
Sabren njar bie glbe gefroren» 7. SSBie t)f el ®elb t)erIor 3ftt 
9leffe im ©piel? ©r t)at nur einige SE^alet \)erloren» 8. 
9Bir fonnen bie @uppe nid^t genie^en. 9. 9Ba§ l^abe iåi 
Shnen gebeigen? ©r fc^wfeg» 10. ©cbreiben @ie gran^^ 
i6jtf*? giein, i* f^reibe nic^t granjSfif** 

46. — 1 . How long did your friend stay ? He stayed an 
hour. 2. 1 wrote a long letter to him. 3. To whom hare 
you lent your mnbrella? 4. He löses. We löst the game. 
5. 1 do not believe that he is telling a lie. 6. Thej were 
riding slowly. 7. The snn was not shining when we took a 
walk. 8. Where were you staying last night? At my coiiain'^ 
9. She Bcreamed loud. That may be, but it did not seem so 
to me. 10. The old man seemed 2to be langry. 11. The 
butter is melting (fltefen). 12. 1 am going home. He rode 
home. 13. I will make {tr, cut) you a pen. 14. Your watch 
bas stopped (flc^en bleibcn). 15. The partridges flew away. 
We have killed two hares and five pigeons. 16. What (SBMe) 
is this bird called? It is a snipe. 17. The enemies iled 
when they saw that the battle was löst. We pursued them. 



LESS. ZXIV.] FOUBTH CLASS OF STRONG VERBS. 



Öl 



LE S SON XXIV. 



FOURTH CLASS OF STRONG VERBS. 



I^reåent. 



I find, do findf am finding 

ic^ finb t roxx finb ^tl 
t)ufinb^0t iftrpnbrt 
er finb rt jtepnbw 



Imper/ed. 
I foimd, did find, was findirg 

iå) fanb wir fanbai 
bufanb^öt xhxfan\>tt 
erfanb ftefanboi 



Like finben, fanb, geftinben, are conjugated: — 



binben, to bind 

i felingen (fO> to succeed 
ingen/ to sing 



ftnfen (f*), to sink 
fpringen (fO, to spriog, jump 

trinf en, to drink 



VERBS OF MIXED INFLECTION, 
(Partly Weak and partly Strong.) 



PresenL 
I bring I know 

ic^ bringa ic^n>^t^ 

bubt{ng0t ivLWtih 

er bring t zxxoti^ 

tt)ir bringat wirwiff^tt 

i^rbringt * ibrwigt 

fie bringa jiewiff^tt 



Imperfeet, 
I bronght I knew 

ic^ bräckte xå)ron^U 
bubrad^to0t bumttf tedi- 
er brad^t^ erwtt^te 
wirbrad^tett »irwtl^tnt 
ibr bracbtet ibr wii^trt 
ftebracbtoi fiewu^tm 



WiJTen, WUf te {subj, XOIX^U), Qtron^t, to know by tbe mind 

Like bringcn, ixaå)U {mhj. brdd^tc), gebrac^t ; thus : — 

brennen, brannte {snhj. brennete), gebrannt, to bum 
benfcn, baAte {jmhj. bd*te), geböc^t, ) ^ ,, . , . . 
bunfcn, bau^te, gebducbt (imperscmal), \ ^ ^^"^^^ '""^'"^ 
f ennen, tannte (f cnnete), gefannt, to know by the senscjs 
nennen, nannte {suhj. nennte), gcnannt, to name, call 
rennen, rannte {suhj, rcnnte), gcrannt, to run 



52 GERMAN ELEMENTÄRT 6RAUMAB. [lESS. XXIV. 



VOCABULART XXIV. 



2Cboocat/ m, lawyer 

beffer^ better 

fl(^ bCfinbcn/ to be (in liealth) 

matt, n. leaf {pl SBlåticr) 

baran/ of it (for an baé) 

banfen/" to thank 

6^riv/. honour 

?euer/ «. fire 

GJcof mutter//, grandmother 

©ropoater/ m. grandfather 

|)alb/ half 

fenbcn/ to aend (fanbtC/ gefanbt) 

©tcinfo^lc/ /. coal 



®acbC//. thing, affiiir 

too^U well; beé 9tad)té/ &t night 



a basketful, ein/ or einen/ JtorbooU 

bookbinder, l^ud^btnber/ m. 

cat, Äa^C//. 

cherry, Äirfite//. 

hardly, faumj hardly anythiog, 

fafl ntd)td 
late, fp&t 

song, fticb/ «. (|)^. giebcr) 
pear, SStrne//. 
ship, ^6)\% n. 

EXERCISES. 

47.— 1. SSBic befinben ©ie ftc^ ? SBie gc^f 6 ? SBaS majsen 
©ie? ©cl&r »01)1/ id^ banfe S^ncn» 2. Sc^ bcfanb micb 
i)eutc cin wenig beffcr* 8, Äcnnen ®ie jcncn ^errn ? 3c^ 
tt)eig nic^t/ wer er ijl* 4. SRcnncn ©le nid^t fo» 5. gr ftal 
jidb an ben 2Cb\)ocaten aewenbet* 6. 2)aS SBIatt l&öt jt.*^ oe^s 
»anbt 7. 2)u bac^tejt nid)t baran. 8. Sd) brenne beS 
SSlai)tf> i,xiiU 9. äBringen ©fe no^ einige ©tetnto^len ; ba§ 
geuer aef)t auS* 10. S:^ lf)abe S^nen aUe S^re @act)cn 
biefen fulorgen gefanbt* 11. »^aben ©ie meinen ®rogt)ater 
(xetannt? S* l&atte bie ©bre, 3bf^ S^u ©ropmutter ju 
ienncn* 12. 2Bir baben jebcr efnebölbe Slafclt)e SQSein ge^s 
trunfen» 13. g§ iji ibm gclungen* 

48. — 1. You drink nothing but (alé) water; and jou eat 
hardly anything {tr, nothing). 2. I succeeded (@g {jj mir 
gclungen). We succeed. 3. Do you know where I live ? I 
don't know it. 4. Did you know the lady who called upon 
(befud^cn) me ? I did not.* 5. I did not think of it. 6. It 
is låter than I thought. 7. We do not know wliat you want 
8. Do you know to whom this large shop belongs ? 9. The 
ship sinks. 10. Which bookbinder has bound your nice book? 
11. Miss Amelia sang a fine song. I knew it. 12. The cat 
jumped out of (aué) the window. 13. The fire was not buming 
when I got {tr. came) home. 14. What is his name ? {tr, How 
does he call himself ?) 15. I will send you a basketfal of 
cherries. 16. There are no more pears {addtio)» 17. I like 
tbem very much, ' • 

* Supply »kno^wlier^* 



LEÉS, XXV.] FORliATION OF THE COMPOUKD TENSES. 



S3 



LESSON XXT, 



FORMATION OF THE COMPOUND TENSES OF VERBS. 



1. By the aid of ^abeit/** as : — 

Pmfeet, 
I hETe heard 

i^ ^aU ge()irt 



Ptuper/eä, 
Ihad heard 



>* Obeervet that most verbs take |)aben. 



2. By fcittf as:— 



I liaye fallen, fell 

(^ Mn gefaQen 



I had faUen 

iå) »ör acfatlcn 

bu trär jt gefatlcn, &c. 



3. By Wectert/asi- 



JVrid^fteré. 



I shall hear, faU 

icb werbe l&6rcn 
ic^ »erbe fallen 

Secönd Future, 
I shall have heard, fallen 

ic^ werbe ge()&rt ^aben 
id^ tperbe gefallen fe i n 



FirMt CkmåUional.^* 
I should bear, fall 

Id) wiirbe fcSren 
ic^ tt)urbe fallen 

iSeeond OondiHonat,^* 
I shonld have heard, folien 

id^w&rDe gel)6rt f)aben 
fc^w&rbeflefadenfein 



>* Observe, that the imperfect subjunctive of totvbm/ i. e. wfirte^ is 
ased to express condition, and then forms what is called the conditional, 
or snljunctiye. Hence tke first conditional is the compound form of 
the imperfeet sabjl^lctiye, and the second conditional that of tb& '^jc^'^ 
pqrfect sulgimetiye. ' 



54 GERMAN ELEMENTÄRT 6RAMMAR. [lESS. XXV. 



VOCABULARY XXV. 



ouf^alten (fid^), to haye one's abode 

S3aU, m. baU 

^mi^f surely 

irren (fid)), to be mistaken 

må)t wabO is it not (true) 

regnen {inip.\ to rain 

felbft self, selves {a/ter a yioun) 

\elb% even {before a noun) 

^djWaQex, m. brother-in-lair 

9tid)te//. niece 

tvci)h perhaps " 

call, oorfpred)en'* 
fluently, gclåuffg 



from a child, öon JCtnb^eit auf 

hope, ^offen" 

imperfectly, gebrocl)en 

lady, 2)ame//. 

lake of Geneva, ©enfer ^itf m, 

leam, Icmen" 

long, lange/ adv, 

only, nur 

matter, @ad^C//. 

pracdce, Uebuno//. 

steamer, jD(Ulipfboot/ n, 

settJe, ixCt fRdm brtngen 

traTel, reifen" (f.) 

keep, l^alten** 



" ObservCf that WQ^l is one of tbose words which, like \af benn^ andb# 
bann^ bod)/ and several others, are very frequently put as adverbs to the 
verb, or to other words, for the sake of emphasis or eapbony, either to 
modify or heighten the meaning conveyed by the rerb or to impart 
more fluency to the style. In the latter case especially such words do 
not give an essentially diJSerent meaning to the expression, and then^ 
före cannot always be rendered literally into English ; as : — ^©ie Ttvit 

titn>o^lgut/ aber ber fte gemad^t \)atf bod).otelbe|[er. äSaébod) bie 
meid)en ZUei e|[cn I ®e^' b o c^ nic^t fo frumm I 

EXEBCISES. 

49.-T-1. 2)er SScbiente ift ben SSag wfe bie Sflacbt ni*t 
nal) ^aufe gelommen» 2. SBaS wirb fein ^txx t)on il^m 
benfen? S/^d) f)abe gewig feit je^in Sal&ren \>on meinem 
Scbwager niAté s^fe^rtV wo er fid) iefet öuf^alten ntag, »eig 
fd) nid)t» 4. e§ Ifeatte bie ganj^e SBoc^e geregnet* 5. 2)te 
geute, »elcbe iå) ju fpred)en tiunfc^te, waren abgeretfl* 6. 3* 
maåjz mir ben JRaffee felbfi ; niemanb wurbe i^n mir ju ©anf 
madben* 7. 3* I)abe S^te iRicbte auf bem JBöHe gefel^em 
8. gie werben \iå) woI)l geirrt l)aben ; nic^t wabt ? 

50.— 1. His brother-in-law went (P^f* o^ wifen) viä (fiber) 
Parig. 2. Has he travelled much ? Yes, a great deal {tr, Yes, 
he has travelled much). He is tired of travelling (be« éleifené). 
3. Were you (perf.) long in Germany ? Only five weeks. 4. 
I went (perf, of fa^ren) in a steamer on the lake of Geneva. 5. 
I shall speak French to (mit) yoti; I have leamt it from 

child. 6. I should speak German, but I have not had mach 
(ee (add batxxu in it). 7. I do not speak it fluei tly : I 




LESS. XXVI.] FORMATION OF THE PASSIVE VOICE. 



55 



speak it imperfectly. 8. I believe *^ your little brother fell 
inte the water. 9. I hope*^ your letter will have settled the 
matter. 10. I believe the woman to bé honest {tr, that the 
woman is . . .). 11. I liope it is not going to rain this afler- 
noon. 12. llie lady on (bci) whom I wanted (»ollen) *to* call 
lives a good distance (@trecfe) from our house. 13. Why do 
you not keep a horse and a carriage (flBagen unb ^ferbe)? 
Feople of onr position (Unferetné/ sing.) cannot afibrd (auds 
förren) that. 

*' Ohscrve, that the conjtmctioii baf / that, when omitted in English, 
may be supplied or not. Thus, * I believe he fell into the water' may 
be rendered hy 'I helieve that he fell into the water ; ' xåj glaubf/ ba$ 
er tn'é SBaffer gefaUen \% or by idji filaube, er ifl in'é SKaJTer gefallen. 



LESSON XXVI. 

FORMATION OF THE PASSIVE VOICE. 

HuLE 31. — The passive is formed by means of wcrbeit, to 
which is added the past participle of the verb ; thus : — 



JYesent, 
I am heard 

iå) n>erbe gel^&rt 

Perfeet, 
I- have been heard 

xå) bin ge^årt »orben ** 

Firat Ftitutt, 
1 shall be heard 

iå) werbe gel&årt werben 



Firat CondiäonaJ. 
1 shoold be heard 

{(fe w&rbc gel^årt »erben 



Inq>erfeet, 
1 was heard 

ic^ n>urbe ge^6rt 

I had been heard ' 

iå) rcat fiel^ort worbcn >* 

SeoondFttim% 
I shall have been heard 

icbwcrbe 9el;6rt»orbeni* 
feln 

4 

Second OoruUtianal, 
I should have been heard 

iå) n)ftrt)e gcl&Srt »orbcn^** 
fcin- 



** Obaerve, that toorben stånds for geworben when anothec \as\x^^^ 
goesbefore. 



>- nJMLyT.iET GKAKlUlt. 



4r.T xxy. 

frrn 3 ohili ten Jtintfii 
hope, Mffci" 

'Sit of iwnsTa, gtnfrt S 
■ Vara, Imwn" 
long, l^Lttjti adc. 

»irsmer, IXmtliftÖrt, n. 
, iwtd^ in'( Sinne bnngen 
' tOTel, rrifon" \j.) 



■' ['^'Tf, rhiiKNt: ;».-■=» pf tScw wtiriis which, like jaii 
ti~* [itA 4r..'. »i-Ttnil ijlher». «re verv fpfqoentlT pnt as adri 
*vr\ .-t ;.• ottirr «\'(d*, S.T th» soki? of fmphasis or eaphoDj 
r-.v.-.iv xT h«^t!^u [fcs tn*«nir.(r ii>nrej«d by the rerb or 
■..-..rf tSi-jv.jv to tå* *;v>. In th* latror oase espfciaUy sucl 
r.-; ^'.Tv j>a (»csliiV.v k!:fl«n-DC m^ioing (o Ihe eipression. i 
'.v ,-*'.:r,-: it'i>4V« hf T^cdeml liti-rallv into Enslish; ns:- 

t*. vtii j«:. i>tT Wr fit ^itindd>i bat» bo* owl itJia. aSa 
fv.~.,:v7. .\::(f fi^T.! U^t' t«ib nidit Ta tnimml 

EXXBCISES. 

49^—1. £>CT i^cticnit ift K-n Xiig iDie b» 9tii 
JM ^ 4^Ji:u jitfommcn. 2. SSaä roirb fein ^err ' 



56 



OERMäN elementärt GRA3I3CAR. f LESS. XZVL 



VOCABULART XXVI. 



OUf *é ^erjlidbffe/ veiy cordially 

bejlC/ best (sup. of gut) 

@ac,/. yard 

.♦mpfangen^"* to receive 

zrjÄ^ten/" to reläte, tell 

fcine ®€fcafd)aft/ /. select or fa- 
shionable party 

gem aefe()en werben/ to be weloome» 
be liked 

6aarf tetn/ in detail, minntelj 

Sungfcr//. maid 

rein^ clean 

fd)neU/ fast, quick 

Denretfen/ to go from home, go tra- 
yeliing 

oer|ie^en/** to understand 

wafc^eii/'' to wash 

SBoUf//. wool 

3uc!er/ m. sugar 

^au ^Cmtmann/ tbe wife of a ma- 
gistrate or bailiff 



believe, glauben* 

foreigner, Xuét&nber/ m. 

foBsit goffil, n. (p^. goffilien) 

fteqnent, befud)en'' J by, DOQ 

glad, frof) 

bat, «^ut# «». ( pt, •^äte) 

higb, bod) {comp, ^6gcr/ »up. bet 

last, Der^angen/ Dong 

many, otere 

most, bie meiflen 
news, Sfleutfifett//. 
postage, ^Joftgelb/ «. 

post-office, ^ojl//. 9)o|lamt/ «. 
spa, S3ab/ n. (p/. SBäber) 
stranger, grcmbc/ wi. (p^. grcmbcn) 
stamp, greimarf^/. 
to be sure, Ja 190^1 
villade, JDorfr n («/. JDftrfet) 
wolf, SBolf/ m. (|iJC SB6lfc) 
really, wirf lic^) 



EXERGISES. 

51.— 1. ©cr öltcn Swngfer trirt) allcS l^öörFIcin wfcber er^^ 
ial)U* 2. 2)ie Srau 3Cmtmann* f fl auf '6 l&crjlicbjlc empf ängen 
wotbcn* 3. @le giebt feine ®cfettfd)aften unb wfrb gern 
qcfel&en* 4. 2)ie bejien »^dufcr wurben t)crfauft» 5. fWcine 
^emben xoann nicbt rein geirafd()en**<^ 6. 3d) bin t)emifl 
gewcfen, obcr bte 85ricfe wurbcn gcfc^riebcn^® fein* 7. 
au(f er wirb nad^ bem ^funbe {or pfunbweife/ by the pound) t)et^ 

fauft, SBofle Centnerweife (ar nad) bem ^cntner^ by the himdred- 
weight)/ Sucll nöCb bet ette (or cttcnwcife/ by the yard). 8. SSer^ 

pe^en ®ie, waS ic^) föge? 9l{*t ganj, @ie fpre^en mel p 
fcl)nefl* 

•• Observct that worbcn is often omitted. 



♦ We hear also bic grau 2Cmtmannin/ just as we would address t^ 
wife of a élergyman^ grau ?)ajtorin5 the wife of a mayor, grått 
SBörgennfillenn 5 the wife of a privy counsdlor, grau ®c^)eimr&t^inj 
affensräPa w\fe, grau ©(nerattn 5 ihe wife of a ctmn^, grau @)i;&fiii| &ci» 



LESS. XXVII.] CONJUGATION OF COMPOUND VERBS. 57 

82«~1. Do you really beli« ve that two wolves have becn 
seen in tlie village ? To be sure* 2. Most letters have been 
written and taken (gebeii/ or trägen) to (auf ) the post-ofEce. 3. 
Many fossils have been fornid on the highest mountains. 4. 
How much is the postage for a letter to England ? The stamp 
coHts five groschen. 5. Tea is sold by the pound. The 
news was not believed. I am glad of it (baröber). 6. The 
German späs which I saw last summer were much irequented 
by strangers and fbreigners. 7. You will surely (bod^) not put 
on (auffegen) that old-fashioned (altmobifd)) hat; you will be 
laughed at (auégcrad^t). 8. I do not care for that (ni(l)t« bonad) 
fragcn). 9. Do you understand now what I say ? Not yet, 
you must not talk bo fa^t. 



LESSON XXVII. 

CONJUGATION OF COMPOUND VERBS. 
I. — Sepasablb Compounds. 

RuLE d2.-»The particle is separated and placed at the end 
of the sentence ; as : — 

l\x\)hxtXif to listen, pay attention 



iå^ ()6re )u 
bu \jhx^ JU 
er \)hxi JU 
xoix lihxzn ju 
i^r bart ju 
fte ()&ren ju 



Impeifedk 

\å) fe6rte JU 
bu I^Stteff JU 
et l^årte JU 
xoix l^&rten ju 
{^r bittet JU 
fte \)hxttxi JU 



Sing. ]()6tejU I Flur. I{;5rt JU 

BuLE 83. — The augment QZ, or the vrord JU/ is inserted 
afler the particle ; as : — 

f»He^f4 Pott, Supiné, 

JU gi Isjhxt -^^^VCK 



58 



GEBMAII ELEMENTART 6RAM2CÅR. [lESS. XXYII. 



IL — Insbfabablb Comfottnds, 
RuLE 34. — Yerbs compounded with any of the partidea 

bc, ent, tmp, er, ge, mx, jer, or mx$, f)inUt, toihzx, t)oIl, are 

inseparable; as:- 



befel&en, t 

Present. 
I look at 

id) befef)e 

bu beftcl^ji, &c. 


look at 

I looknd at 

id) befafe 

t)u befa^ep, &c 


Stng. befie^ 


Imperative, 

1 Flur. befefeet 


PcarHcipU Post. 

befefeen 21 




Supme, 

iu befefeen 



«' ObservCf that ins^arable verbs do not take the prefix ge in ths 
pirticiple past. 

VOCABULARY XXVII. 



oUer^anb, all sorts of 
auége^en (sep.), to go out 
auéru^en Isep.), to rest 
bogenen einiDenben (sep.), to make 

objectioDS to 
entgegentreten (sep.), to come up to 

one 
©ebanfe^ m. thonght 
Sugenb,/. youth 
loginen (|l(§)/ to be worth (the 

trouble), dat 
SRÖ^e,/. trouble 
^ti^UVf m, teacher, master 
riictiD&rté/ back 
fagen," to tell 
tt)un/ to do (ti)att get^an) 
^ettiVf m. cousin 
öorfommen (sep!), to tappen 



SSorfd^lag/ m. proposal 
xoiXify worth 



■ ^ 



wish, n){infd)en'', »oUen 



advise, ratten** ; a great deal, \åf 

öiel 
answer, v. a. beantworten (mMp*) 
call on, t)orfpredl)en hzi (sep.) 
Cologne, ©6ln 

come from, ^erfoiJimen {sep.) 
contradictoneself, ftd^ toiberfpre^CB 
go to, ^inoc^ien (««p.) 

question, gcoge/yf 

send to one anything, JUf ^ufen (sip) 

spend, gubringen (sep.) 

station, ©tatioit//. 
railway-station, S5a|)nfeof/ m. 
train, 3ug/ ot. 
travel to, ^inrctfen (sep,) 



EXERCISES. 

53.— 1. Seine ©ebanfcn gingen rudfmdrtS in We Saferc 

feiner SugenlJ» 2* gr trät mir entgegen unb bot (offered) mii 

tie^anb. ' 3. S5ifi t>u mutie, tuV Wd^ <'tw** 4* 2){« Änoben 



LESS. XXVn.] CONJUGATION OF COMPOUND VERBS. 59 

ftabcn bem ^cftrcr nic^t jugcl^Jrt^ Da§ fommt of t \>ox, 5. 
2Cl§ icfe St)rem SScttct ben SSorfdjlag mai)tc, baS $fcrb ju 
befe^en/ »anbtc er allerl^anb bageacn efn« 6. SSSir l^abcn ju 
\)iel JU tbun, um b^utc aué^ugepcn* 7. gå lobnt fti) ber 
Srofibc, bem ?)rofeJTor jujuboren» 8. J56re ju, waS ic^ bir 
fflcie* 9. Sdb befab bie SSucber, öber^fie »aren tdåjt t)iel 
wert^* 



b. a. — 1. Where is (wtit) this-ffam to stop (arif^aXttn, sep.)! 
It stops at (otif) the next station. 2. Where do jou come 
from? Where are you travelling to? That is nothing to 
you (JDa« ge^t ®ie nid^té an). 3. I am going (fa^re) as far as 
(bidnadS)) Berlin. I spent last week in Cologne. 4. Where 
do ypu wish to go to after dinner (Sifc^) ? To the railway- 
station. 5. Where is your niece ? I do not know, but I 
think she is gone out with your youngest sister. 

54. &.— 1. The horse^^ I sold is an Arab (2(rabtfS)ed). 2. 
The new shirts^^ you were looking at are sold by the dozen. 
3. I had no time^^ ^to call (supine) lOn (bei) the lady. 4. 
You did not pay attention. Surely, I have been paying 
attention. 5. I believe you contradict yourself, 6. The 
gentleman did not receive the money you sent to him. 7. It 
is not worth the trouble. 8. Look at the pictures ; they are 
really beautiM. 9. I have no time^* 3to look jat them 
juow ; but I think they are jworth* ja great deal (oiel) *of ' 
jmoney, 10. I advise^' you {dat.) juy answer jhis question. 
11. I am coming to go for a walk with you. 12. It is difficult 
to pay attention. 

* (worth, wcrt^) 

«• Observe, that the relative wtlåjtc, mlå)if mlå)e^f which, mxust be 
Bupplied when omitted in English; thus *the horse I bought is good' 
ought to be * the horse which I bought is good,' baé $ferb/ tt>eld)eé/ && 

*" ObservBy that the infinitive with jU/ the so-called gupine, must be 
used: — 

I. In all infinitive phrases, as a kind of oomplement to verbs like 
fontnten/ wönfd)en/ ^ojfen/ förd^ten^ glaubeii/ rat^en^ &c.; thus: 
. vij rati^e 3|)nen ben SSrief ju beantworten. 

II. After noiins and adjectives susceptible of govemment, like 
Sufb desire; 3eit/ time; ed tfl lei^t 3U/ it is easy to; \&fmii, 

difficult» &c. Thus : eé ift fd^n)er in fagen i i^ ^abe Seine 3ett 
9or}Ufi>re^en^. 
ObservCf the supine is always put last in the Beulei[i<e/&, 



60 



GERMAN ELElfENTART GBAHMAB, [lESS. JLXYIII 



LESSON XXVIIL 



CONJUGATION OF OOMPOUND VERB3. 



HL — SeFARABLB AMD InSEPABABLB CoiCFOTJNDS. 

RuLE 35. — Verbs compounded with iixxå), through ; fiber, 
över; VLtti, round, about; Utltet/ iinder, are botli separable 
and inseporable ; thus :— 

SeFABÅBLB. Iw8EPABABT.11. 

U^berfc^cn, to look över I fibcrfe'^cn, to overlook 



Pttåtni* 



I look över 

id^ fe^c fiber 
bu fiel&jl uber 
er jtebt fiber 
wfr fef)en uber 
fbr fe^t fiber 
fte fe^en fiber 



I looked oyer 

idt) fab fiber 
bu faoft fiber 
er fö^ fiber 
xo\x faf)en uber 
i^r fa^et fiber 
fte fö^en fiber 



Itnptrfécitm 



I OYerlook 

iåj fiberfel&e 
bu fiterjte^jl 
er fiberfiebt 
xoxx fiberfe^en 
if)r iberfe^t 
fte fiberfe()en 



I oyerlooked 

xif fiberfab 
bu fiberföl&jl 
er fiberfab 
wfr fiberfa^en 
f br fiberfa^et 
fte fiberfaben 



Paat Partieiple, 

fiberfl^feben, looked över 1 fiberfeben, overlooked 



Supine, 



fiber }ttfef)en, to be looked 

orer 



JU fiberfelf)en, to be oyer- 
looked 



XXVIII.] CONJUGATION OF COMPOUND YEBBS. 



61 



like manner :— 

Sepabable. 

>'brln3Cn,*^ to passthrough 
fC^Ctl/ to pass över, cross 
ritegen/ to lie under 
JcUcn, to place here and 
^re, place about 

Ohserfje^ that the separable compound has the chief accent on the' 
le, the inseparable on the verb. 



Iksbpabablil 
burcllbrrngen,** to penetrate 
äberfe^^en/ to tranalate 

untcrnc'9en, to succumb 

Umfle^ilcn, to sun-ound 



YOCABULARY XXVIII. 



Itn (8ep.\ to begin 
f m, enemy 

n^ m, ditch (pl. ®vhhtn) 
f. skin (pl. »^dule), hide 
/. hedge 

heavy 

ttatttf m, faip 
fd)QUer^ m. shower of rain 
/ m. horseman 

tfieller^ m. literary man, an- 
', writer 

/ m. chair (pl. @röl)re) 
m/ fidj) (sep.\ to take care, 
: where one is going to 

n. work 
m. road, waj 
> right 

'eifen/ to travel right throngh 

ti'\enf to be travelling in a 

itry 

'Ucn^ to surprise 

ixbttf to tumble över 



campaign, gelb jug/ m. (pl. Jeltjö^e) 
catch a dreadful cold, ftd^ bié auf 

ben S^ob erfdlten {pp. erfåLet) 
doak, fStanUlf m. 

fatigue, ©trapaje//. 
France, granfreidf) 
Frederick, gricbrtd) 
on horsebaä, ju ^ferbe 
passage, ©tette^/. 

?hrowo^}«*"'^*»0«»'*'^««^f^» 
throwacross to one, ^enoetfen (^ep.) 

fiber {prep. p. 71) 
8ofa, ®ofa^ n. 
shoulder, @i)ulter//. 
railway, @ifenba|)n//. 
take possession of, einne^men (^p.) 
take physic, !0{ebtctn etnne^men 

words (connected), SBotte (sing, 

SBort/ n. word) 
words (unconnected), ^hxUxising, 

SBort/ n. word) 
work, SBert / «. 



EXERCISES. 

— 1. £)ie SBer!c ber befien ©eutfcbcn ©ijriftfieHcr 
in'6 englifdjcfiberfc^fet* 2. £)ic JReitcr l^abcn fiber 
n unb ©rdben gefe^t 3. ?)l6felid) wurbe bie ©tabt 
ieinben um'jient^ 4. ©Int) @ie t)iel gereiji ? Scb böbe 
Deutfc^lanb burd)reif}^ 5. Der ^nabe l&at bie ©tfi^Ic 
e jiellt» ©tcUen @ie fi; tricbcr ^uxt*A. ^. •^>ö\\i^xx\ 



\ 



62 GER3£AN ELEHENTABT GRAMMAU. [lES& XXIX. 

Saf)rmarfte waren fo t)iclc fOicnfd^en, b.afl cS fd^wer biel t 
burct'j u bringcn» 7. gin l()cfti(^er Sicflenfc^)auct ubcrficl 
unS auf bem ©pajicr.qangc; baS SBaffer brang unS biå auf 
bte «^aut burd)« 8. 3Cnna ftn^ an ju (aufen, unb ba fteft:^ 
nid^t t)Drfal()/ ftel {te uber einen gropen 93aum, ber im 
SBege Iag« 

56. — 1. The professor is translating the works of Schille 
into French. 2. He crossed the river on horseback. 3 
Have you travelled in France? Yes, I have travelled al. 
över (ganj) France. 4. Are the railways good ? Yes, they 
are [good]. 5. The soldiers succumbed to the åitigues of the 
campaign. 6. The ehoes you are looking for are lying under 
the sofa. 7. Our village is surrounded by the enemy. 8. 
You should put on your doak. I have put it on. 9. The 
boy threw the ball to me across the table. 10. Our litde 
town has been surprised and taken possesaion of by the enemy* 
11. I am taking physic ; I have caught a dreadM cold. 12. 
She looked över my shoulder sto read ^the letter ^^m. mj 
uncle ; but she overlooked the words she wanted (moQcn) to 
read. 13. Are you able to translate this passage ' for* me 
(dai,) ? To be sure. Put the words di£[erently (um^ffeOen). 



LESSON XXIX. 

CONJUGATION OP VERBS WITH THE REFLECTIVE PRONOUH. 
1. In the accusativet as : fid^ ^åfimtti/ to be, or feel, sshamed. 



Present, 
I feel ashamed^ 

iå) fc^)dmc mid) 
bu fd&dmfl bic^ 
er fd^dmt ffdö 
ttHr fc|)(imen un8 
!br fd^dmt eud) 
fie fc^dmen ftd) 



Tinpet/lBctm 
I felt ashamed 

id) fc^dmte mid^ 
bu fd^mtejl bi^^ 
er fd)amte fic^ 
wir fd)dmten unö 
{|[)r fåjåmUt eud^ 
fte fd^mten fiå) 



LESS. XXn.] 00NJU6ATI0N OF KEFLECTIVE VERBS. 



63 



2. In the dative, as : ftd) einbtlben/ 
I fancy** 

id) btlbe mir etn 
bu bilbefi bit etn 
er Hlbet fid) etn 
xoix btlben un6 etn 
ibr btlbet eud^ etn 
{te bilben jtc^ ein 



to fancy. 

Imperfeet, 
I fanded 

id) bilbete mir ein 
bu bilbeteft bir ein 
er bilbete ftd^ ein 
wir bilbeten unS ein 
il^r bilbetet eud^ etn 
fie bilbeten ffd) dn 



** ObserWf that the compoimd tenses are fonned by ^aben/ as : iä) 
^aU miå) gefd^&mt^ id) ^aht mir eingebilbct 



VOCABULARY XXIX. 



anftta^txif ha9 @ffen/ to put the 

dinner on the table 
bebtenen (ftd)), to help oneself 
bcntt^Cll/ to iDAke use of, use 
befud)en/ to pay a visit 
S3rett/ n. board (pl, SBretter) 
baröber (for fiber baé), at it 
bedexif ben Sifd^, to lay the table 
cé ftd) gut fd)mecten laffen^ to enjoy 

one's dinner, tea, or breakfast 
^euen (ftd^), to be delighted, glad 
•grflbia^r/ n. spring 
@efaUen/ m. favour 
geniren (fidj)), to feel bashfol, shy, 

reserved • 
^tnfa^ren (sep,), to take a drive to 
iå} tÅtttmiv aué/ 1 beg, request 

tc^ ne^me mit bte greti^ett/ I take 

the liberty 
iå) nebme mtr t)or/ I intend, make 

np my mind 
6ffnen (ficl>), to come open, be 

opened 
^adet/ n, parcel 
@d)fiter/ m. scholar 
@*ö|Tel//. dish 
fd)laaen (ftd)), to fight, strike each 

other 
fe^en * (fidj)), to sit down 



filbern^ of silver 
ungemetn^ exceedingly 

ocrabrcben (fidj) mit einanber), to ar- 

range with each other 
oer^eiratbcn (fid)), to get married 
öorlieb nebmen/ to put up with, rest 

satisfied 
wunbem (fid)), to wonder at, be 

astonished 
n)unberfd)5n/ exceedingly fine 
jufammenf together 



be mistaken, ftd) irren 

beg one's pardon, um Skrjei^ung 

hitttn 
catch cold, fid^ er!dlten 
changeable, oerånberltdl 
decide, ficb entfd)eiben •• 

feel well, fic^ WC^ f&i)ltn, or be» 

finben 
I am engaged, betiothed, iå) ^ahi 

miå) oerlobt 
in the least, tm gerin^lfen 

make haste, ftd) beeilen 
pray, bitte (imper,); soon, boH) 
take care of oneself, ftd^ fd)Onen 
take leave, fid) em»fe^len/ or %h^ 

fd)ieb nebmen (empfe^lcn/ em» 

pfai^l/ empfo^len) 



66 



QKBXAN ELEICENTAST QHAmtAR, . [lESS. ZZX. 



II. Of an Ohjective Impersonal Verb .•— . 

a. With an Aceusative, as, mid^/ bid^f tf)n# fte/ uné/ euc^/ {te/ ben ^anii/ 
bie grau/ &c.; thug: — 

{Third Peraon Singular,) 
Preaent, 

«§ fricrt mid^, I feel cold 



Impeffedt 

cö fror mxå) 



eS l^at mtc^ gefroren 



iVeimt 

CS bunft un§, it appears to 
US, we tHink 






i8. With a Bative, as : mir/ hiv, i^m/ i§r/ un«f eud^/ SJneiv bcm SÄanw/ 
ber graU/&c.; thug: — 



Presmt, 

e§ fc^eint mir, it seems to me 

cé Ht mir gcfc^ienen 



c§ ferien mir 

First Fulure, 

ti toirb mir fc^einen 



VOCABULART XXX. 



@td/ n. ice 

etioaé/ something, any 
ganj/ entirely, quite 
gejlrtöCf of yesterday 

§en)iff oertain 
leueéf newB 
tr&umen^" to dream 
té tr&umt miVf I fancj, imagine 
toie/ as 



clear up, fic^ aufflåren (wp.) 

hotel, ©afl^aué/ n^ ©aft^o^ m. 

iim, S(Btrt^é^au</ «* (jp/. ^(^er) 

no news, nic^tö 9letted 

leave off, auf^åren {sep.) 

lighten, v, n. blt^tl 

music, SDhilt!//. 

weather, SBetter/ n. 

you like it, t$ gcfdttt 36nen 



EXERCISES. 



59.— 1. ©löubcn (Bk, bag cé ^cute regnen wirb ? (g§ ^t 
biefe 5Ra*t geregnet* 2. Sragt baS ©S ? Scfe glaubc woftl; 
e§ lS)at feit brei "SlååjUn gefroren» 3. ©§ fragt pcb, ob bic 
®cfellfc|)aft fommen wirb» gS fd^eint mir nicfet fo* 4. 
SRict) bunit e§ bligt« 2)a§ bduc^te mid^ niåfU 5. (gs festen 



LESS. XXZI.3 INTEBTED ORDER OF WORDS. 67 

mir ganj fo ju fcin, wie Sbt: äBruber frtcjte» fSRcfner Sante 
^at cS md)t fo 9cfd)iencm 6.griert(cé)@ic? ®cwi|l,cSfiicrt 
miå)* 7. é§ trdumt S^ncn nur, nidjt wa^r ? SRcin, ic^ bin 
ber @ad)e ganj gcwif ♦ 8. ®icbt eS ctwaS SflcueS? »§ier ifl 
bic geflrige Skitung* 

60. — 1. Does it rain ? No, it has left off (perf.) raining 
(sup.). 2. Do you feel cold ? I felt cold half-an-hour ago, 
but I do not now (suppli/ *feel cold'). 3. Is it freezing? It 
seems so to me. 4. Are there manj hotels ? There is only 
one. 5. Are there good inns ? Tou may imagine so (^aé l&f t 
fid) ben!cn). 6. What is there ? Nothing particnlar (SBefonbereé). 
7. What (add^eht eé) news? There is no*new8. 8. Does it 
snow? No, it does not snow, it is raining. It would snow 
if lit gwere (wåre) 2Colder. 9. Last winter jit jsnowed ^much. 
10. It has rained all night; and this morning git ^ireezes. 11. 
It has just (eben) lightened. It did not appear so to me. 12. 
How is the weather to-day ? It appears to me very warm.f 
The weather has been fine the whole day. 13. I do not think 
it will rain this moming ; the weather is clearing up. 14. 
How do you like this music ? I think (finb«n) it very fine. 

* Transl. * nothing/ t Add *.to be.' 



LESSON XXXL 

What are co-ordinate sentences? Two or more sentencea 
of equal order or importance, joined together by a con- 
JTinction. 

(The conjnnction is either copulatiWf as: also, a\xå)i åisjuncHvet as: 
oeither . . . nor, tOthiX . . . nocl^$ adveraatioe^ as: yet, bod)9 on the other 
hand, ^tngegen^ distrtbutwet as: partly . . . partly, ti^é . . . fpdl^i 
comparative, as: the ... the, je . . . Um fO/ or |e . . . jei or illaiive, or 
deductive, as : therefore, barum/ ba^er/ folglid)/ &c.) 

What is emphasis ? A particular stress of voice, given to 
any words or parts of a sentence. 

What is the inverted order? The placing of tbe tv<yc£Äsä«- 
tive a^r the verb. 



68 GERMAN ELEMENTART ORAMMAR. [lESS. XXXI. 



INVERTED ORDER OF WORDS. 

RuLE 36.— The riominative case, or subject, follows the 
verb, viz. : — 

1. When a question, supposition, command, request, or 

wiah is expressed. 

2. When, for the sake of emphasis, any member of the 

sentence is removed from its proper place and put 
at the beginning.* 

3. When the sentence is introduced by the word cS/ it, 

or by the adverbial conjunctions*'^ proper to co- 
ordinate sentences, as : — 



nlf O, f Olglic^/ thus, therefore 

t)cmna.^,mif]^in, then, con- 

sequently 
bantt/ then, thereupon 

ba{)cr, barum, bcé()alb, bcS^: 

VDegett/ therefore, on that 
accomit 



boc^,bcnnod), iebod^,yei, 

however 
fonji, or else, otherwise 
t){clme^r, rather 
llbrigenS/ as for the rest 
jnjar, indeed 



{And many others,) 

** ObservCf that the above words are for the most part adverhs^ and 
do not change the order of words, ezcept when placed at the head of the 
sentence aa conjunctions. 

The conjunctions of the co-ordinate sent<»nces which never affect the 
order of words are the foUowing : — 



obco attein/ fonbcrn/ but 
obcr^ or 
tenn/ for 



unb/ and 

fon^ol^l . . . alé (anå)), as well 
as 



4. When a subordinate sentence is put hefore the prin- 
cipal one.f 

• Almost every word of a sentence may be put emphatically at the 
beginning, and thus, for example, the sentence id^ l^dht i^n ^eUte ljuter 
gefcl^en can be inverted five times. 

t Examples illustrating the instances men tion ed above will be found 
under the corresponding numbers in Exercise 61. 



LESS. XXXI.] INVERTED OBDER OF WORDS. 



6» 



VOCABUIART XXXL 



abceifen (sepX to depart 

anfdf)af5n (fic^),.to get, bny 

aroeiten/ to work 

brauc^n/ to want 

ba/ as, since ; mal!/ one, people 

Sifenbaftn//. railway 

f^ageiv to ask 

oegenöber/ opposite 

MttC (««6;.), had 

fortfd)iclcn (««p.), to send away 

tanbt n, countiy 

S&nbet/ pL distinct countries 

SanbCf ^. indefinite parts of the 

globe. 
no^ ()eute TCbenb/ this yery evening 
^ufneben/ satisfied 



aU, aOe 
also, aud^ 

elephant, @tep^anf/ m. 
eveiybody, etn jeter 
gold, ®olb/ w. 

lay down, auf bic (grbe le^cn/ nicbets» 

felen 
note-paper, SBriefpapicr/ n. 
sadly, Uttiiht 
silver, ©tlbet/ n. 
slowly, jbgernb 
straight od, gerabe aud 
tell, fagen 

there, ba 

tum, fid) wenben 

whether, ob 



EXERCISES. 

6X — 1. ®e^t 3f)x SBrubcr fpajicren? SBenn er 3eit 
^dtte, w&rbe er fpajferen gel&en» äöitte, fragen @ie i^m 
S^un @ie ba8 nid^n gantf lebe ber Ä 5 ni a ! 2. ©egen* 
fiber wo^nt ber »^err, nfä)t l^fer* ©efd^iafen Ut ber 
Änabe, nfc|it geörbeftef* ©ttrben mfijTen alle SKenfd^en* 
3. es ijt lelne gifenba^n in biefem ganbe* 3* wolltc 
@ie fprec|)en, barum bf n i c^ gcf ommen» SSieleS njunfd)t man 
pc^, unb ioij braud^t man nur wenig^ 3c^ n?ar mit meinem 
JBebienten niå)t jufrieben, beSl^alb babc id) if)n fortgefd)idFt» 
& {{i JU fpdt/ fonfi trfirbe me in £)nlel nod^ f)eute 2Cbenb 
abreifen» 4. 2)a id^ fein ®elb l^abe^ fann id) mtr teincn 
neuen Sttodf anfd;affen* 

62. — 1. Do you know the way to the railway-station ? 
Tum 'to the ' leit (linfé)) and go straight on. 2. There he comes. 
Silver and gold I have none (ntd^t)* Of all animals the ele- 
phant is the strongest On Saturday we are going to the fair. 
3, There (ed) are no hotels in this town. It is too early, or 
else I woTild take a walk with you. Eead as your cousin does 
(ir. As (wie) your cousin reads so read you). It is raining fast 
(flarf), therefore everybody must stay at home. 4. Whether 
the servant will go or not, I cannot teU. As (ba) ^ have no 
note-paper, 1 shaU not write the letter. 5. Slowly and sadly 
we laid him down. 6. Although (obgleidj)) he is poor^ he i& 
(add Mj) honest. 



70 OEBMAN ELEMXNTABT GSAXX AB. [tESS. XXXi; 



LE S SON XXXIL 



PREPOSITIONS. 



1. WiTH A GbNITITB. 

ttnweit, tjermitteljf, fraft, and tt)d()rcnb ; 

Not far from, bjmeansof, byvirtueof, during; 
According to, by yirtne of, in »pite of; 

Dberl&alb and untert)alb ; inncrl)alb and augerl&alb : 

AboTCy below; irithin, irithoiat, ont of ; 

©icSfeit, ienfcit, f)albai, wegcn; 

On this sfde of, on the other side of, &if the sake of, on ACCOunt oi ; 

Änflatt, lingS, jufolge, trofe» 

lastead of, åloiig, in eonaeqnence of, in deflance of. 

2. WiTH A Dativb. 

SRit, naå), tiad^fl, ncbfi, fammt; 

Witb, after, next, besides, with, tog«ther -with ; 

S5c{, feft, tjon, ju, juwibcr; 

By, at, near, since, &om, of, to, at, on, contraiy to; 

Againil, towaxda, except, ont of, from. 

« 3. With an AocTisATxya» 

T)\xtd), fbt, ebnc, um; 

Tlirongh, for, irithout, abont; 

©onbct, gegcn, »fbcr» 

Witbont, UmaråBf against. 



LESS. XXXII.] 



PREPosrnoNS* 



71 



4. WiTH Two Oasbs. 

With a Datwe if ezpressing rest or motion in a place {where T) ; with 
an AccusaHveii expressing motion or direction to a place {whiiher, 
whereio /). 

2Cn, öuf, l^infer, mUn, in; 

At, npon, behind, near, in; 

ttcber, untcr, \>ox, and jwffdjcn» 

Over, nnder, before, between. 

VOCABULART XXXII. 



ftå^^^nr to breakfast 
%tnaVL/ exactly 

^afen/ m. harbonr (pl, »f)åfen) 
Snfanteric//. infantoy 
§Oa|Ta0tet/ m, passenge^ 
9{egtmeht/ n, regiment (pL fRt^ 

menter) 
SSerbec!/ n. deck 
^oUamtf n. custom-house 
la Suf / on foot 
}U ^agetl/ by carriage 

at dinner, ju S^{fci)e/ bdm ^Dlittagé^ 
effen 



be asbamed, ftd) fd^dmen 
by land, )tt Sanbe 
by water, gu SSaffeC 
cheese, Ä&fe/'* wi. 

expect, ewarten 

expectation, ^rwartuttg//. 
gardener, @$årtner/ tti. 

matter, ^CngclcgeniSieir//, ©ad&er /. 

meat, gleifd^/ n, 

potato, Äartoffel//. 

price, ^reid^ m, 

speak to, fpred)en mit/ fid^ ocrab* 

reben mit 
vegetables, ©cmöfe/ «. 



ExERaSES. 

63.-^1. 2)aS SBirt^S{)aué ijt augcrftalb ber @tabn 2. 
SSSic mclc @d^f jfc jinb im^» Äafen ? SRur wenige» 8. SBic 
toiele 9)a)Ta8icrc finb auf bem SScrbcrf c ? 3* fann cS S^ncn 
nid^t genau fagcn» 4. SBo ijt baS goaamt? 2Cm*» ??lujTc* 
5. Äann ic^ nicfet \)or brei 5Bicrtcl auf aå)i frubftudfcn? 
®ett>ig* 6. Äonnen ®ic au6 bem Seutfc^cn in'ö englifd^e 
fibcrfc^feen? Sa, ein wcnig* 7. 2)aS britte ?>reugifd)e Sna: 
fanterie^egiment l^at ben SBea t)on JBerlin nad^ 9)ra8 ju 
gug gemadbt* SSom SKorgen biö jum Äbenb^ 8. SQSie weit 
tfl baS 2)orf, baS fiber bem 83erge Iieqt ? (gå ifl uber tjier 
5Reilen \)on bier* 9. 8D3eId)eé ift ber furjefle SBeg? 3)|efet 
tji um brei 5Biertel ©tunben furjer* 

*• Obaerveiih^ combinations of the artide with prepositions, as:— 



am» for an bem 
axC^, for an bad 
beim/ for bet bem 
hwc^% tor burdj) \>a^ 



j)inter'm/ förvinter ^im 
imi for tn bem 
in'é/ for in baé 
tW^ for äber bad 



oom/ for oon Um 
oor'^/ for Dor bod 
pm/ for JU bem 



?2 GEBMAK ELEMFarrART GRASOUB. [|.ESS. XXXIII. 

64. — 1. 1 will speak to him about (&^er) this matter. Thank 
you. 2. The gardener works by (nad)) the hour or by the 
day. 3. 1 am going from Paris to Hambuig. Shall you go 
by land or by water ? I don't know yet ; I have not decided. 
4. What is the price of this dress (^Cnjug/ m.)l It coats 
between fifteen and twenty Prussian dollars. The price is 
beyond (öbcr) my expectations. 5. We were at [the] dinner, 
when you can^e. We had iish and cheese besides meat, po- 
tatoes, and vegetables. 6. How long shall you ,be (ftd) auf^alten) 
at (auf) the c£^e? At (um) what time may (börfen) we expect 
you? I shall not stay there (bort) *for* more *than' (öbcr) an 
hour. 7. He has twenty pounds at l^ast (gum wentgflen, or 
»cni^ftené). 8. Are you travelling on foot ? No, I am going 
* in a ' (^. by) carriage. 9. We could not go for a walk after 
dinner 2on account jof the rain {die^tHf m,y It has now left 
off raining (sup,), and we shall go out this evening from seven 
till {hi$) nine. Will you go with us? With the greatcst 
pleasure. 



LESSON XXXIII. 

CONNECTIVES OP THE SUBORDINATE SENTENCE.^ 

What is a connective? A word that connects or joins 
sentences. 

* Observe, that, when noun, adjectivef op adverbf are expanded into 
the form of a proposition, we term it a noun, adjectivef or adverbialf 
sentence; thus: — 

Notm-Sentence .'—ID af bu fommen tt)tllfl/t|!mu; Xxeh. 
Mjective-Sentence : —X)ev SÄenfd)/ »elever jufrieben Icbt/ tft 

Mverbid Sentence :— SB enn bu x^Xi befuc^ft/ freut er ftdj. 

ON THE ORDER OF WORDS. 

A verb in the present or imperfect tense, or the auxiliary 
in compound tenses, is placed last in the subordinate sentence; 
the other words are not removed from their usual place ; 
thus:— 



LESS XSXIII.] CONNECTIVES OF THE SUBORDINATE SENTENCE. 73 

BuLE 37. — The Connectives of the Noun-Sentence are : — 

1. T)a% that 

2. The interrogatives XOZX, who; ira§/ what, which. 

3. The interrogative adverbs XOXZ, how; tDO/ where; 

YDann^ when, at what time. 

4. The following relativas, when refeiring to a *bcr, baS/ 

* he, that,' expressed or understood, viz. : — votx . . . 
(ber), the man who, he who ; (bcr) . . . ber, he 
who ; tröS . . . (ba§), what, that which. 

5. The combinations of Waé * with prepositions, XOO, he- 

före a consonant, and tt)0 V, hefore a vowel, being 
used instead of xod^ ; thus : — 

fD0filit {for för tt)a«), wherefore, for what 
foarauf {for auf waö), whereon, upon what 



XOOtaXit wbereon 
IDoraud/ from what 
WOrin/ in what 
woröber/ upon what 
IDOrunt/ about which 



loobev whereby 
»omtt/ by which 
toonad^^ after which 
tOODOn/ whereof 
XO^yn, for what 

6. Db/ whether. 

RuLE 38. — The Connectives of the Adjective-Sentence are : — 

1. The relatives Weld^er, XOiXåjt, tt>eld)Cé, and ber, bie, 

ba§, who, which, that, 

2. The relatire tra§, what, which, and its combinations 

with prepositions, when referring to the whole sen- 

tence^® which precedea, 

.** Observe, that in tbis instance the principal sentence is conceived 
to be *the nonn ' to which the a4jectiye-sentence refers. In the other 
iTOfftjinftfta the a^ective-sentence refers to a noun in the principal sentence. 

8. The conjunctions al§, when ; ba, when ; voxt, as like ; ^ 
WO, where; VDann, when, when the adjective-sen- 
tence refers to a noun in the principal sentence.f 

* Eemember that XOCA or its componnds reläte to things, never to 
persons. SBaö answers to whatt whim, but neyer to who, 

t Examples will be foiind nnder the correspcmding numbers in 
Exercise 65« When translating Ezercises 65 ania Q^, \^<b ^\^3L^<et\^»^^r^ 
do vell to refer back to the above rules. 



74 



GERMAN ELEMENTART GRAMMAR. [LESS. XXXIIl. 



VOCABULART XXXIII. 



on!ommen auf/ to be ihe point of, 

depend upon 
biUigcn^ to approve of 
beft^en/** to possess 
Qnhtf n, end 
erinncrn^ \iå) {ttjUh a genitive), to 

remember 
fromm^ pions 

®aft/ m. guest, company (j>l. ®&{le) 
©låcP/ n. fortune, luippiness 
halten^»» to hold, take 
CieblingéblumC// favourite flower 
mbijtc {sttbj.)y should like 

runb ^eraué/ plainly 

©cbmer}/ vt. sorrow, affliction, pain 

tö^licb/ dciily 

treu/ faithful, trne {sup. ber trcucjlc) 

tjeri^e^cn^"* to pass by 

ocriicren^"* to lose 

äberflåffig/ superfluous, needless 

ungewié^ uncertain 

gei^en (pd^), to show itself 



to be accustomed to, ^<tcoo\^T(t fetn 
I am accustomed to it, i^ bin eö 
(or xj^xit fie) gewolS^nt 

(erftauntfetn 
to be astonished at, 
to wonder at, 



uber/ 
ft(^ wunbem 
äber 



come to see, befud)en 
come to the conclusion, ftdj) öbets 
jeugen oon 

convinced, to be, ÖbcrjCUgt fetn (t)On) 

depend upon, jid) öcrlaffen Qttf 

do, t^un'* (0/ a)* 

healthy, gefunb 

go to, ^inge^cn (««p.) 

in fature, funftia 

hurt oneself, ftdf fd)Qben (mtt) 

moderate, mdfi^ 

queen, Äöntgin^/. 

stay out^ auébleiben Uep,) 

watch, äafd)cnu^rf / ; well, »0^)1 

time must show, eé wirb fic^ jctgcn 



EXERCISES. 

65. a. {On Rule 37.)— 1. 2)afi man \)iclc SBortc maclf)t («^ 
SSielc SBortc mac^cn), ijl fiberpåffig* 2. SBaé fte »iD, »irb 
fic^ jcittcm 3. SSäann er fommcn wirb, unb »o er wobnen 
wirb, ilt ungeirig* 4. ©r crinncrtc fic^, waS er aefagt Isatte* 
SBer bepfet, ber lerne tjcrlieren ; wer im ®Iu(f ijt, (ber) leme 
ben ©cbmerj* 2)en xt&i)it ic^ wijfen, ber ber Streuefte mir 
Dor ätten ijl* 5. SRiemanb wugfe, worauf e§ bet ber @adbe 
anfam» ©agfé runb beraué, wofur wir eud) ju l^alten 
ll)aben« 6. ^ragt eud^ am @nbe etneS jeben Xage^/ ob i|fr 
weifer unb frSmmer geworben feib* 

65. 6. (Ow ÄwZc 38.)— 1. £)ie JRofe; welcbe ju ben fcbSn^ 
tfen SSlumen gebSrt, i|t eine gteblingSWume meler fTOen^ 
fcben* 2)u fpridb|t t)on Skiten, bie tjerganaen ftnb» 2. gr 
ftat tdglfcb ®afle, wa§ id) nic^t bittige* 8. er ift efn 3Rann, 
xon betn S3ruber. @age mir bie ©tunbe, wann bu tom^ 
men wiUfl» 

* The Towels (O/ a) indicate the Towel changes in the imperfect and 
'»articiple post of strong verbs ; a», t^UUi t^atf ^et^an. 



LES6. XZXm.] CONNECTIVES OF THE SUBORDIKATE SENTENCE. 75 



a, {On Rule 37.) — 1. You know well that it -was not I 
who did it. I have co3)e to the conclusion [of it]^^ that it is 
lar healthier to Ii ve in the countrj than in town. You may 
depend upon it^* that I shall in future take care of myself. 
You must not be astonished [at it]^^ that he haa departed so 
floon. I wonder at his^* stajing out so long {tr, that he is 
Btaying ont so long). Depend upon my bringing your watch to- 
mbrrow {tr, that I fhall bring, &c.). 2. She does not know who 
ihese ladies are. 3. When the queen will go, and where she 
will go to, is uncertain. Mark (2(df)te ouf ) what (tr, that which) 
she does, and not what she says. 4. What you have bought 
is too dear. The man who is wise is moderate. 5. Do 
nothing whereby you may hurt yoiirself. 6. Time must show 
whether these people have become wiscr and more pious. 



h, (On ämZ« 38.) — 1. My sisters have bought *some' 
new bonnets, which I do not like (leiben mogen). 2. Has your 
£ither sold the young horse? Yes, he sold it, which my 
mother did not approve of. 3. Tell me on what day {tr, the 
day when) you will come to see us. Make tke cofifee as I am 
accustomed to *have' it. 4. You must not depend upon 
this '* * matter ; ' it is too uncertain. 

•' Obserte, that the preposition by which the verb is followed (asy jtd) 
fiberjeuaen t>on) miut be joined to tbe demonstrative bad {or bem), thiat, 
it: hCit hefore a consonant, and hciV/ before a vowel, beiag nsed instead of 
baS {or bcm). Thns we have the combinations — 



baför (for för \>a^\ for it 
^ci>zi (bci bcm), thereat, near it 

bamit(mit bcm), with it, with that 
banad) (nad^ bcm), for it, after that 
bat)on (»on bcm), thereof, of it 
baju (jU bcm), to it, to that 



barauf (for auf boé), npon it 
baran (an \>Ci%\ on it, on that 
baraué (aué bcm), ont of it 
barin (in bcm), in it, therein 
baröbcr (öbcr baé), över it, of that 
barum (um \>0i%\ for it, for that 



Exampleai — ^å) XOOlX baöon öberjcugt/ I was convinced of it; er.irrt 
ft(^ barin/ he is mistaken in that. 

Propositions are joined in the same manner to the demonstrative 
btcfed {or btefcm), this, the latter : the word btcr being nsed instead of 
tiefcd {or bicfem). Thns we get the foUowing combinations : — 



^ierfÖr (/or ffir biefcé), for this 
jierbei (bet biefcm), herewith 
)t«rmit (mit bicfem), with this 
^iemad^ (nad^ bicfem), after this 
^ctoon (opn btefcm), of this 
^ierjtt (Stt bicfem), to this 



^icrauf (/or auf bicfeé), npon this 
l^ieran (an bicfcd), on &8 
^icraué (aué bicfem), ont of this 
Merin (in bicfem), herein 
^icriiber (fiber bicfcéV «*.^^^ 



76 



aERSIAN ELEMENTART GRAMMAB. [lESS. XXXIY. 



LESSON XXXIV. 



CONKECTIVES OF THE SUBORDINATE SENTENOE. 

Rule 39. — The Connecttves of tke Adverhial SerUence. — 
The relations of the adverbial to the principal sentence are 
expressed by the subordinate conjunctions. Thus we have 
conjiinctions expressing — 



1. Locality, as : — 

toO/ where 
tt)Ol)cr/ wherefrom 
tOoi)ixu whereto 



2. Post Time, as : — 
nad^bem/ after 



3. Future Time, as: — 

beoot/ before 
/ ere 



4. Coincidence of Time, as : — 
bi } "'^^®^» ** *^® ^^'^ when 

»anm wenn/ xoitt when 
bié, tUl 



5. Comparison, as > 
alé/ tenn/ than 
f o . . . alé/ 80 ... as 
ebcnfo . . . alé/ just as 



as 



WiCt as, as if, like 
fp. , , wie/ as ... as 
/Mr/b . . . wiefjust fl5 • . . as 



6. Motive, Seaeon, Frimary 
Cause, as : — 

hcif as, since 

tnbent/as 

)9ei(/ becanse, for 

7. Purpose, End, Final Cmue, 
as: — 

auf baf / in order that 

bamtt/ that 

um JU/ in order to 

8. Manner, Proportion, as: — 

fo baf/ in a manner that, so that 

alé ob/ ) 

alé wenn/ - as if 

wit wtnnf , 



i::::lV^*'---'^* 

jc nad)bem/ according as 

9. Limited Pösnbility, Approxi' 
mation, CounteraeOon, &c as : — 

fatongaaebaf, ^5„^jj^ 

ob/ obgleicb/ ) 

I althongh, thonfffa, in 
spite of, howbeit 



obfcbott/ 
toenn aud^y 



LESS. .XZXIY.] COMNECTIVES OF THE SUBOSDINATE SENTENCE. 77 



VOCABULARY XXXIV. 



ZnfanQf m, begimimg 

aufgc^n* {it di wp.)» to "»e 

auéretd^ (9ep,\ to be siifficieiit 

bctrageii/** ft($/ to behaye oneeelf 

@nbe/ n. end 

entm^^eiv to escape 

©Urni/ ^. parents 

@rbe/ m. heir 

iStbtt n, inheiitance 

®rcnjo/. bonndary 

«^immel/ m. heaven 

metnij^e (ber^ bic/ baS), mine 

mut^io/ böld 

nteberfo^lagen («^.)» to cast down, 

lower 
|)p[i*t>/. dutjsr 
fcWben'* {yti fe), to separate 
[dbmeljen"* (O/ o), to melt 
@d)nee/ m, snow 
t^eilen/ to divide 
ta?>fcr/ brave 

åbctgeugen (tn^.)» to convince 
unterge^en («e^.)» to set (as the sun) 
VLnttaxikjtt m, instraction 
SSatetlatib/ n. fatherland 
^erm6aen/ n. property 
SBeltz/world 



ambassadör, ©efanbte/ m. 

any longer, nod^ l&ngec 

approveof, biUigen" 

banker, JBanKet/ m. 

baron, SSavoit/ m., gteiberr/ »i. 

company, ®cfcUfd)aft//. 
(^<mra« t&zM ^Ae prefix ®i have 
generaUy a coltectwe meanina, 
and are of neuter gender. In 
this instance the ending fd)aft 
rules the gender.) 

give one'8 compliment, gröf en 

inherit, erben" 

Italy, ätalien/ n. 

lend, lei^en"* (ie/ te) 

next, adj\ ndd[)jl 

pleaso, hitUf ^aben @te bte ®åte/ 

see again, »iebcrfc^cn*» (sep.) 

spring, grö^ja^r^ ». 

Switzerland, bie @d)n)et2 

(ilfoA^ names oj countries and 
continenis are of neuter oen^ 
der, except bie ^åjXodif Slurlei/ 
sDlolbau/ ^aUad^ei/ #c.) 

wear, trägen"* (u/ a) 

white, weip 



EXERCISES. 

67.— 1. SBo ttiir'^ gut 9cl)t, t»a iji mein sBafcrlanb* ®e^', 
tt) o 1^ in Wc ^Pic^t bic^ ruft» 2. SR a c^) t) cm er gcjiorben 
xoax, tbciltcn bie ©rbcn baS SScrmSgen» 3. e^e biefc§ 
SKagcS ©onne unfcrgcbt, wcrbe id) fiber bie ®renje fein^ 4. 
3f(é bie ©onne aufgina, reifle er ab» ©rfaö mic^ grofi an, 
b a mir baS SBort entnjifdjte* 2)cr ©c^nee fdjmiljt inbem 
er filat* 5. er iji ebenfo mut^ig, alé tapfer* 35er »^err 
tfi grSfer/ benn (or a!S) alle |)immel finb* SBie ber Änfang, 
fo ba§ enbe» Äarl ifl fo fliet^ig/ wie |)einric^* 6. 25ic 
grud^te werben nid)t reif, weil eS ju falt i|h 3^ mug ®ie 
um etwa§ ®elb bit ten, inb em xij mit bem meinigen rncbt 
öuSreit^e* 7. @r fagte mir% um mic^ ju uberjeugen^v 8. 
S3etrage bid) fo, bap beine ©tern jufrieben feien* gr 
antn)ortete, inb em er bie Äugen mebet(4)l\x4* ^^xö^x^nj^x^., 



78 



GERUAN ELEMEirrART GRAMMAR* [uBSBhXXXV. 



öls wenn er nicfet fel&cn fonntc* 2)cr ©eutfc^e UnterriAt 
wirb i c Idn.qcr, i c licbcr* 9. Db unS We S5ergc fc^bcn, fo 
ftnb wir cine§ 58olfc§ bocb* Ser 3ufriebene ijl reicf), 
o bg le id) er t)or ber SBelt ber ärmjie ju fein f^eint* 

68. — 1. I shall go next spring to Italy and* Switzerland, 
where I was last summer. 2. Since he haa inherited tbe 
property of his uncle, the banker, 2^6 jhas 4Company 3every day, 
which I do not approve of. 3. Before the sun has rib^en, tJbe 
ambassadör will have departed. 4. You may read tiie paper, 
whilst I am writing a letter to my neighbour, the Baron of 
Söder. 5. Her teeth are as white as snow ; I have never seen 
whiter ' ones.* 6. Please to lend me two dollars, as I have no 
money with me. 7. This coat is too bad to wear [it] any 
longer. 8. He felt ((gé mat ii)m) as if he could (förnitc) not see. 
9. * Give' him (ncc.) my compliments (gropen) in case I should 
not see him again.| 



LE S SON XXXV. 

What are moods ? The various modes or ways of express- 
ing the meanlng of the verb. 

The indicative dedares a fact. 

The subjunctive, or condttional, states a wish, supposition, 
possibility, or condition, and is commonly preceded by a oon- 
junction expressed or understood. 

THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 
I. Of the Auxn.iÄBiES of Tensb. 

1. THE FBESEMT SXTBJTTNCTIYE. 



I 


have 


be 


Rhall 


I 


had 


wore 




W) 


t^aU 


fet 


ttjerbe 


i* 


t^^ti 


wåxt 


tt^ilrbe 


bu 


t)abejl 


feiefl 


werbejl 


bn 


^åttefi 


»&re|l 


murbefl 


er 


^ahe 


fei 


iDerbe 


er 


Isatte 


nj&re 


milrbe 


IDIC 


^abeit 


feten 


»erben 


»te 


l^&tten 


tt)&ren 


toilrben 


it)r 


i)aM 


feiet 


mecbet 


i^r 


^åtttt 


wdret 


mörbet 


fie 


iabcn 


feien 


tt)erbett 


Pe 


^dtten 


toåxcn 


»ätben 



* Supply • to the,' nad) ber. 

t ^or additional ezezcises see Appendiz L 



h XXXV.] 



THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 



79 



II. Of THE AXIXILIAHIES OF MOOD. 
1. THB PEESENT SUBJUNCTIVB. 



I 


«U1 


dåre 


may 


shaU 


wiU 


mnsb 


i4 


ifönne 


bihfe 


m5ge 


fotte 


woUe 


möjfe 


bu 


fånnefi 


bötfeH 


mb^cft 


foUeft 


»otteft 


mäffefl 


et 


f5nne 


börfe 


mbQi 


fotte 


rootte 


möffe 


wir f5nncn 


börfen 


magen 


foUen 


njoUen 


möfifen 


ify[ 


fönnet 


börfet 


m5get 


fottet 


wottet 


mölTet 


ffe 


fånnen 


börfen 


m5gen 


foffen 


n?otten 


möffen 






2. THK 


IMFBBFECT SUBJXJNCmTB. 




I 


GOOld 


dared 


might 


fonght 
(shoold 


woald 


mnsb 


id) 


ifönnte 


börftc 


m5d)te 


fotttc 


»ottte 


mt^U 


bu 


fönnteft 


börfteft 


m6c!)tejl 


fotttefl 


wotttcjl 


möftefl 


er 


fönnte 


börfte 


m5(i^te 


fottte 


»ottte 


möfte 


wvc 


fönnten 


börften 


måd^ten 


fottten 


mottten 


mtiiun 


i^r 


lönntct 


börpet 


måd^tet 


fotttct 


motttet 


mUttt 


ffe 


fönntcn 


börjften 


m5d)ten 


fottten 


wottten 


möften 



When is the Subjunctive used ? 

EuLE 40. — When the verb of the principal sentence is in a 
post tense, and the subordinate sentence contains the words, 
thougktSj or reasonsj of others, the verb of the latter is put 
either in the present or inoiperfect subjunctive ; as : — Your 
sister-in-law told me you were from home, S()re ^rau 

©djwågcrin fagtc mix, ia^ @ic nid)t ju »^aufc wdrcn» 

This mode of speaking is termed the oblique narration. 

HuLE 41. — When a question (as, 'where is he?*) is made 
dependent on another sentence (as, 'I asked you where he 
ti^o^'), the question, which was before a direct one, becomes 
indirect, or oblique, and the verb must be put in the sub- 
junctive : id) fragtc ©ie, tro er wdre* 

RuLE 42. — When an expression is optative, or conditional, 
the verb is put in the subjunctive ; thus : — I wish he were 
here I wdr C er bod^ l&ier ! If he were here, I should tell him, 

wenn er l^ier wdre, wirbe id^ e§ il^m fagem 



80 



GERMAN ELEMENTÄRT QRAMMAB. [lESS. ZXXV. 



VOCABULART XXXV. 



brec^n (a/ o), to break 
tteéfeitt^/ on this side, present 
entSWet^ in pieces, smashed 
^ortfe^ung/ /. continnation 
®riec^< m. Greek 
t^of^ m. farm-yard 
^leiDungéJlötf^ n. artide of wear- 

ing apparel 
9tarr/ 97». fool, jester 
SlU^C//. rest 
fcltycr,/orferbf!/8elf 
@turm/ m, storm 
Sobte (ber), the dead person 
Untetwelt//. lower world 
t)crbrennen/ to bum to ashes 

{The jpT^ Det denotes loss or 
destructiorif an error or doing 
atniss, ^c.) 



ask, fragen" 

ask for, titten um (0/ e)/ accpers, 

come again, wteberämmen 

go ovLt, auéqitt)€n (<ep.) 

go to, bingef^en (sep?) 

hoiffiekeeper, ^autt)ålUxva, f, 

husband, ^anxit m., ®tmäijilt m. 

madam (see Vbcabulary at the MuQ 

pay, bejablen" 

dftpart by, abreifen mit 

say (to), if it means *to say in 

reply,* * to reply,* anöpoirten/ exs 

wieberm" or facjen* 
servant-girl, ©ienjlmagb//., J)ienft> 

mdbd^eti/ n. 
settle an afi&ir, etne ^ö^t itCt Sttint 

bringenr ein ©efd^dft at^mad^ta 
train, 3ug/ m. 



EXERCISES. 

69.— 1. 2)ie alten ©riccben gtaubten, baS gcbcn in ber 
Unterwelt fet eine gortfe^ung be6 bieéfeitigen, unb ba^ ber 
äobte teine SRu^ie ^aben f 5nne, wenn nii^t alle Äleibungg* 
fifidfe mit i^m t^erbrannt worben wdrem 2. 2)a ber ©tunn 
auf einem 4)ofe t)lele junge S3dume entjwei bradb, fam ein 
Slarr, fab fte liegen unb fagte ju fi:b felber: ,Aä^ mhåftt 
f &r mein geben f einen |)of (baben), auf welcbem junge äSdume 
fleben/' 

70. — 1. The servant-girl told me that you were gone ont. 
2. I asked her where you were gone to, but she said she could 
not tell. 3. If you bad been at home, we could bave settled 
the affair. 4. I wish he were here 1 If he, or his wife, were 
here, I should pay the money. 5. 1 should come again if I 
bad time. 6. He told me that he must go (abfa^ren) by the next 
train. 7. If they were allowed, they would like (gern) to take 
a walk. 8. They ought to do it if they could. 9. The 
gentleman asked the housekeeper where your brother was. 
10. She did not know where he was, and told him that he was 
not at home. 11. Did you ask me for the paper? Yes, I 
asked you for it (Obs. 31). 12. People (SKan) speak much of 
it. What does [the] madam say to this (Obs. 31) 7 She says 
that her husband was right. 



LBSS. ZXXVI.] 



TH£ SUBJUNCTIVE. 



81 



LESSON XXXVI. 



THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 
IIL Of Wbåjl and Stbono Vebbs. 

1. THB FBBSBirr SXTBJUNCTITBy 

Both of weak and strong verbs, is formed by adding, to tht 
radical syllable of the verb, the endings — 



Singular, 
First Person, t 
Second Person, tit 
Third Person, t 



Plural. 
First Person, ttl 
Second Person, et 
Third Person, tVL 



The root-vowel is not cbanged ; tbus :• 

I hear see bear flee 



td) f)bvt 

bu i^bxtst 

tok ^5rett 
Q)r ibxtt 
fte ^bttn 



fe^eii 



UaQt 

txa^tit 

trage 

trägen 

träget 

trägen 



flie^e 

flie^eit 

flie^e 

flie^en 

flie^et 

flic^en 



^^** { (on horseback. 

^iijttiht 

fd^reibestt 

fc^rcibe 

fd^eiben 

fd^retbet 

fd^etben 



rcite 

reitesi 

rcite 

rettm 

reitet 

rett en 



2. THE IMPEBFECT SUBJUHCTIYB, 



a. Of weak verbs, is formed from the indicative, by in- 



serting t before the t; as : — 

J^ngulan 
First Person, etC 
Second Person, etefl 
Third Person, ete 



Plural, 
First Person, t Un 
Second Person, etct 
Third Person, t Un 



b. Of strong verbs, is formed by adding, to the radical 
ffyllable of the verb, the endings — 



Singular. 
First Person, t 
Second Person, estt 
Ihird Person, t 



Plurak 
First Person, m 
Second Person, et 
Third Ptxwu^X^ 



i 



82 



GERMAN ELEMEirrÅBT OBAMMAB. [lESS. XXXVl. 



And by inflecting the vowels of the indicative, d, O, U, 
into å, 5/ &; the vowels te and t are not changed. 
Thus:— 



I 


heard 


eaw 


bote 


fled 


wrote 


rode 


i* 


f)bxeU 


få be 


trfige 


P;*e 


fd)nebe 


ritte 


tu 


ibttuf 


\k^ft 


trÄgell 


flAbefl 


fcbnebeiit 


ritteät 


ec 


förete 


få be 


trftge 


flÄbe 


fcbricbe 


rittr 


»ir 


^bvtUn 


få ben 


triiöen 


pÄ^n 


fdbrtebni 


ritten 


if)t 


bör e tet 


få^et 


truflet 


fld^et 


fcbriebet 


rittet 


fie 


i)bvttin 


fåt^en 


trftgen 


flj^en 


fd^ttebni 


ritten 



ON THE IMPERATIVE. 

The imperatiye, which expresses a comraand, request, or an exhorta- 
tion, is taken irom the indicative of the present tense. 

The imperative singtdar is generally the same as the firat person 
singular of the present tense ; the imperative plural is always takeo 
from the second or third person plural of the present; thus: — 



Singular, 
^5rel hear! 
fågel telll 
fomm'! comel 
fe^e bid) \ sit down ! 
maåf auf I open ! 



Pltavl, 

b6rt! or ^ören@iel 
fagt! orfagenSiel 
fommt J or fommen ©ie I 
fe^t eu(bl or fe^en @ie fic?)l 
madcjt auf ! or macben éte auf ! 



The imperative singular of some strong verbs (p. 45) is, however, 
formed from the second person singular of the present tense, as : — 



fte^ ! look I 
giebl givel 
Ueé 1 read 1 



bilfl helpl 
flirb ! die I 
fprid^l speak! 



t)er0if I forget I 
ntmm! takel 
triffl hit I - 



The foUowing imperatives are derived from the present sttbfuneihet 
viz.:— »iffe! inowl (pl, wiflfetJ or wijfen @ic!)feil be! (pl. feietl 
or feien @te J) 



VOCABULÄRY XXXVI. 



.2CbIcr/ m. eagle 

befi^en (befa|^ befeffen), to possess 
{27ie prefix be changea intransi- 
tive verbs into transitives. It 
implies an endomng or pro- 
vidmg with something.) 

Ui^tnigit weld^er/ m, he who {is de- 



clined according to the firsétU' 

dension of adjectives) 

{The determinatiue pronouns are: 
berjenige, biejemge/ baéjeniger 
he, she, it; berfelbe/ biefelbe# 
baéfelbe^ the same; and tbi» 
berfelbe/ the vezy same.) 



|<BSS. ZZXVl.] THE SUfiJCNCTIVE AND IMPERATIVE, 88 

VOCABULARY XXXVI.— con<tnw6c?. 



en9Ctd)fcnf grown up 

erjtel^en (erjod/ ersogen), to biing 

up, educate, rear 

{The prefix et implies a coming 
or.bringing into exieience, or 
the acquisttion of aomething.) 
©egentoart//. ^resence 
tb^miXU to praise 
^ik^Oi^t m. cé i% it is a pity 
@piegel/ m, lookiog-glass 



Sbor/ m, fool 
S^Ot/ n, gate 
ttjagertf to venture 

jumac^cn («fjp.)> ^ s^^* 

arrive, anfommcn {a, Or ««p.) 

ink, J)inte^ Zinttff. 

pen, gebcr//. 

remain here, ]S)icrbleiben (Ufitf sep,) 

vexed, to feel, jtc^ dr0crn öbcr 



, — _ 

visit, befuc^en 

EXERCISES* 

7X-— 1. ein SEl&or woUtc wi ffen, tok er auéfilf)^ wenn er 
fd)liefe» gr fefete pc^ alfo t)or ben ©pieael unt) mac^te bie 
Jtugen ju* 2. !Kan fragte ben Äbler : „2Barum erjie^ji bu 
beine^ Sungen fo l^oc^ in ber guft ?" ©er 2Cbler antwortete : 
„SBfirben jte ftd^, erwacbfen, fo mf)t jur ©onne wagen, 
wenn iå) jte tief an ber grbe erjige?" 3. 2Clé man eineå 
SSageé einen SBeifen fragte, wer woi}l ber SRelc^fle unter ben 
STOenfcfien wdre, antwortete er: //SJerienige, welc^er mit 
bem jufrieben Uht, waS er beftfet/' 4 gUan ru^mte in 
gefjtng'^ ©egenwart t)on einem S5ud)e, bag t)iel SBabreS unb 
Sleueébarin fci* „9lur ©dbabe/' fagte Sefjtng, ,,bap baS 
S35a^re barin nxä)t neu unb baé 3ltm nxå}t wa\)x ip/' 

72. — 1. If your fether 'should see ' {ifnp. svhJJ) it, he would 
feel vexed. 2. I wished that Charles would remain here, and 
not * go out on horseback ' (auércitcn). 3. Many people would 
have more friends {imp. subj. or firat cond*^) if mej were rich. 
4. If I had 'a' pen and ink, I should write a letter. 5w I 
should be glad if you were to pay attention (jut>5ren). 6. 
Speak loud, that people (man) may hear you. 7. What should 
I do if he saw me. 8. Tell him not to run away (fKe^en)» 9. 
We should have visited your aunt if she had been at home. 
10. Tou ought to havé done this. 11« If I had been allowed, 
I should (add have done it). 12. The ladies have arrived. Tell* 
her that she may know (eé tt>ttT<^)* 

»• Observe, that the first conditional answers to the imperfect suV 
junctive, and the second conditional to the pluperfect subjunctive. Hence 
the flrst conditional is often replaced by the imperfect subiuafitisftv^JEÄ. 
the second conditional by the pluperfect Bub^un£X.V?^ 

»SupplyMt* G '2 



84 



GERMAN ELEMEMTABT ORAMHAB. [lESS. ZXXVII. 



LE S SON XXX VII. 



SPECIAL RULES ON THE USE OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 

EuLE 43. — ^The present, or imperfect, and future, sub- 
j^ncdve is employed in the subordinate sentence which ex- 
presses the vrords, thoughts, or reasons, of others, and is 
dependent — 



a, On verbs like — 

befe]()(en/ to command^ 
bc^au^tcn, to maintain 

beric^tcn, to report 

bitteit; to beg, ask, pray 33 

bentcn, to think 

crfldrert/ to declare 
crjdblen, to reläte 
ermabnen, to admonish 
furd^ten, to fear^^ 
gfaubcn, to believe 



l()Offcn, to bope 
metnett/ to suppose, think 
melbett/ to announce 
ratten, to advise 
fagcn, to tell, say^a 
fc^einett/ to seem 

tjerlangcn, to demand 

locrmut^en, to suspect 

WUnfdbcn, to wish, desire 

jweifeln, todoubt33"«i34 



•* Observe, that after »önfd^cil/ förd^tcn; bitten/ thesubjunctive is often 
expressed by möc^te/ and after befc^)lcn and fagen by fotttc ; thus, i(J 
fagte i^m§ bap er eé t))un follte} icij) roänfc^e/ \)<x^ er ^terbteiben 
mbci^te. 



h. Or on expresaions lik( 

eS {fi nJtl^f g, it is necessary 

eé fd^ldft jid), it is becoming, fit 

C§ tji-S^lt, itistime 

C§ tji Wld)tl9, it is of importance^* 

■* Observe, that the above rerbs and expressions are commonly foUowed 
by 'bap,* with the verb of the subordinate sentence in the snbjnnctiTe. 
If, however, the subject of the subordinate sentence should be an in- 
definite pronoun, or coincide with the subject or object of the principal 
sentence, then the infinitive with '^u' must bo used ; thus, H ift pett 

aufjufiepen, for e0 i)l ^ziti bap man aufftcje. 



BS». XXXVIl.] SPECIAL RTTLES ON VSR OF SUBJUNCTIVE. 85 

RuLE 44. — ^The imperfect, pluperfect, &c. subjunctive is 
sed— *• 

ö. Åfler the conjunctionfl— 
titmit/ that, in order that ^ 

bamit . . . nic^t, lest ; 

wenn, if ; 

ald wenn, di ob/ as if. 

5. When the speaker defidres to restrict his asserlion, 
reproof, or command. 

£uLE 45. — The present subjunctive is used — 

a. In ezpressing a command ; in the place of the third 
person of the imperative. 

h. In expressing a desire which the speaker hopes to see 
realised. 

EuLE 46. — ^When ihe wished-for end or object appears to 
i impossible, the imperfect subjunctive must be used. 

VOCABULARY XXXVIL 



ih m. eel {jl. HaU) ; bie Ti^Vt^ 

thebodkin 

bmmen {dt o), to eet 

rd)eiben/ restraine<^ modest 

: ^etntgeti/ jour friends and ac- 

quaintances {the possessive is here 

used as a pronominal noun) 

[b adv. only, not till 

ofd^/ m. frog {pl. gröfd^) 

t^åjmii^f n, talk 

funb/ sonnd, well 

taht n. grave {pl, (3tåUt) 

tfcité/ beyond 

H^ tedions 

fl//, a mind to, desire 

l^toet^en/ n, silence 

{Infinitives used as nouns are al' 

way» of neuter gender.) 
imme//. yoioe 



{botten/ to ridicole 

{tumm/ dmnb, silent 

umarmen/ to embrace, dose into 

one'8 arms 
unmåglid)/ impossible 
aSerbienjl/ m, profit 
SJerbicnjl/ n, merit 
DieOeid^t/ perhaps 

doctor, ©octor^ m,, 2Crjt/ nu 
fumitnre, ^bUh/- {pl- SKöbcIlt) 
lawyer, iböocat/ ftu 
live, lebcn" 
master, >^err/ m, 

plaintiff, ^tdlhi^ttt uh, Jtliget/ m. 
sit down, [tdrfeéeit/ ^la| ne^men 
talk a matter över, ftd^ äbet etne 

^aéjif or ^nöclegcn^citi <s^* 

fpred)eu 



86 OERMAK ELEMENTART GRAMMAR. [lESS. SXXVTi 

EXERCISES. 

73.— (Oti Eule 43.) ®laubc nid)t, baf , wcnn bir (^better uå)) 
cttraé fd)n)er bunft, c§ bcm SKénfc^ien unmoglicb f ef. ^offc, 
bag bu ienfdtS be§ ®rabc§ bie 25eimgcn umarmcn wcrbcft» 
{On Rule 44.) gr fprid)t al6 wcnn er unfer .^err wdre. 
Sl)ue eé, bamit er febe, bag bu fefn greunb bifl* ®u 
båttell cå wol^l beffer macben fSnnem S* ^^atU 8uji baju» 
®o wdre e6 metleicbt beffer* (Ow -Rw^a 45.) !!R6c)e bein 
SSater balb flcfunb werben! 3efet ge be jeber feineé SÉegeS ! 
(O/i i?wZe 46.) 9R6cbte er balb gefunb werben! SBenn er 
bocb nur auéginge! 

@in iunger Srofcb/ ber erfi fcit wenig SEagen feine ©timme 
bcfommen b^tte, fpottete beé 2Catö, ba| er fo fiumm Uu 
„35u bdttef! SRecbt/' antroortete bfefer, ,/tt)enn jebe ©timme 
SSerbienfl wdre* jfber glaube mir, ein befcbeibeneé ©c^weigen 
tji mebr wert^, atö ein (auteå låftigeé ©efcbwdl^/' 

74. — (On ÄM^e 43.) ]. I wish that your sister and aunt 
would remain here. 2. I hope they will {add remain here). 3. 
The lawyer maintained that the plaintifT was wrong. 4. It is 
necessary to open *the' door and windows. 5. It is of impor- 
tance that he should come to-night. 6. I do not know whether 
our fumiture is new ox not. 7» The doctor ordered me to go 
for a walk every day. 8. I wish the gentlemen were coming. 

(On Rule 44.) 1. He behaves (t^un) as if he were our 
master. 2. I should think {imp, sutj,) jon conld do that when 
you have more time. 3. You might as well have sat down. 
a^it |)dttcn pd) xodtji fe^en fönncn.) You might as well have sat 
down for (auf) half-an-hour ; we conld then have talked the 
matter över, 4. I should have liked it well * enongh ' (p/tip, 
mibj. of tt)o]S)l Suft baju ^aben) if they had not been waiting for 
me at home. 

{On Rule .45.) 1. May your father soon be well (gefunb 
»crbcn) again ! 2. Long five the king I 8. Now, every one 
pay attention ! 

(On Rule 46.) 1. Oh, that my mother would come ! 2. 
* I wish ' I were (wdrc id) bod)) rich I 8. I wish I were happy 
ahå contented I 



AFP. I.] MISGELLANEOUS EXEBaSES. S7 



APPENDIX I. 

MISGELLANEOUS EXERCISES AND RULES. 



L — 1. Sit* nearer the (an*é) fire, you must feel cold {tr. it 
'muflt be cold to you). No, thank you, sir, I am not cold at all.^ 
It is very comfortable' here. 2. I was glad that the roast 
beef * was to (nad)) your liking.^ 3. Do you know a good 
shoemaker ? I want to have® a pair of new boots^ made.^ 
4. How do you wish the boots * to be made ? * In (nadf) the 
feshion.® 5. You ought to feel ashamed ; you have taken the 
liberty to use® my stick without asking (^. me to ask '•). I 
beg your pardon, ^^ I forgot to ask you. 6. 1 did not think that 
it would lighten. The air is now become much ^^ cooler.^^ 

' Itd) fe|cn » ®ticfel/ m, • S^obo/. 

* burd)aué niå)tt gan^ unb ^av niå)t ' benu^en^ gebrauc^en 

• acmött)lid) * ^intexbtaUn, m, " fragen 

* @(efd)mact/ m. liking, taste " id) bitte @te um ^tvitii^m^ 

• iå) wiU, or muf/ mtr mad^en or enifd)ulbi9en Bie 

tajfen " mit mit " lö^l/ cool 



IL — 1. How do you like 1 London ? I like it* very much.* 
2. There are many streets in London which are three or four 
miles long. 3. I am very hungry and thirsty.^ What will 
you have to eat? 4. We have nothing but* cold roast beef. 
1 prefer* roast mutton.^ 5. Have you no potatoes boiled? ^ 
Yes, there are some (Voc. XVI.). Bring me a plateiul.® 6. 
Do you want any more (Voc. XVI.) bread ? If you please. 7. 
Is there any more wine in the bottle ? There is no more. 
8. The äpples and pears [which] you sent me were very 
beautifuL I am glad^ you liked them.^® 9. Have you got 
any more ? I believe I have some more, but not many. 
10. My brother leamt** German when [he was] young. 



I 



c« gefdUt mix, i^nif or S^ncm &c. 



• ttwill ■ burjlig 

* atö 

• »OQie^n (sep,), Kebcr mågcn 

* .^ammelbraten/ m. 



' 9c!oc^t5 !od)en/ to boll 

• ciiv or einem ZelkrooHf m, 

• ffci) frcuen/ to be glad 

*• I liked them, \it ^abcu toJx. <^* 



88 



OERSCAN XLEIIEMTART ORAlOtAB. 



f APP. X. 



How TO Render Enoush Påbticipial Phbases. 

m. — 1. Walking(*^) is healthier^ than riding or driving. 
2. Actmg^ is more d^cult than talking.' 3* Are you not 
ashamed of asking ? Were you ashamed to go ? 4. Think- 
ing(3«) is not so easy as talking.* 5. Otir govemess^ tanght 
me reading(3^), ^riting, and anthmetic ; ^ and mj little sisters 
knitting^ and crochet-work.® 6. When did you begin* 3 to 
(ju) leam iwriting ? Two or three months ago. 7. We saw 
yonr eldest sister dancing.^® I like playing^^ better than 
dancing. 8. Are you going to sleep after supper? ^* No, not 
before ten. I laid down to sleep (3*) after dinner.*' 9. Did 
you hear some one knock** at the door? Open** the door, 
and see who it is. 10. Did he bid('*) you go? No, he 
asked *^ me to come. 11. Talking is easier äian doing. 

(*^) Observe, that the English present participle (as, ' walldng is easy'), 
when subject or object of a sentence, is replaced by the infinitiye 
(withont 5U) in German ; thns, (SJc^cn ift lcid)t. 

(*«) Observe^ that the infinitive (without ju) is employed with the 
following verbs where in Engligh the present participle, or the infinitire 
with * to,' is used, viz. : — 



hltibetlt to remain 
ff^en bleibeu/ to remain seated, 
keep one's seat 
^cif cn< to call, bid, order 
^clfen/ to help 

fi6ren< to hear 
a^ren/ to drive 
ipaueren fa^ren^ to go for a 

drive 
gC^cn/ to go 

fpajicren gei^cn/ to go for a 
walk 



legen (fid^), to lie down 
ftd) fd)lafen ledem to He down 
to sleep, to be going to sleep 
le^teUr to teach 
lernen, to leam 
tc^ (erne tanjeii# I am leaming 
dancing 
XtittTif to ride 
fpajteren retten/ to go ont for 
a ride 



> gefönber, or gefunbec 

• * lanbeln 

• rebcn 

• fd)wa$cn 

• ©puoernantc//. 

^ fJtricten 
' påMtt 



• anfangen (fing am angefangen) 
" tanjen" 
" fpielen" 
** 2Cbcnbeffcn/ n. 
" nad) ilifd)c< 2jeitta06effen/ n. 
** axvllov^txi {sepX to knock at 



APP. I.] 



laSCaSLLANEOUS EXERCISES. 



89 



Additional Exercises to Lesson XXXin. — On Rule 37 

IV. — 1» What use is it* to (tr, that you) come when it is too 
late ? It is only a quarter to ten. Your watch must have 
stopped.* No, sometimes^ it gains,* sometimes it löses.* I 
was told^ that yonr house was out of the town, across the 
riyer. I was glad at^ his having done the work. 2. What 
he wants,® *time' will show.^ 3. *Time* will show^® how 
Åitbfidlj I have senred^^ my duke.** 4. He who is never 
sad ^' is happy^^ and contented. You are not one of those 
who talk mvum {tr, make many words). 5. Tell me what you 
think I am (tr, what for you hold" me). You do not know what 
the conversation *^ is about.^^ 6. I do not know whether I 
shaU likeds it. 



ed niH^t; it is of nse 

fte^n bleiben"* (te/ te), to stop 

balt) 

oorae^en (sep,), to gain 

nadQ^e^en (sep.), to lose 

man i)at mir gefaat/ or erjå^tt 

ftcf) fceuen fiber/ fcot) fein äbet/ 

to be glad at 
tooUtn, to want * ftd) seigen 



tr. It will show itself 
bienen^" to serve 
^erjOQ/ m. 
• traurt9/ betriibt 

balten (hklt, gesällen) 

fReht,/. 

n)ot>on 

gefallen (with the dat), to like 



On Rule 38.— Lesson XXXTTT. 

V. — 1. The proposal* which the count made me is not 
worth much. 2. He won' a great deal of ^ money which I did 
not* know of.* 3. Ishould like (imperf.) to have^ such a^ house 
as your brother lives in.® It was in ^ the time when Charles I. 
Kved. On the spöt*® where Troy" once*^ stood, there are 
DOW comfields.*' 



■ S3orfd)Ia0/ m., 2Cnerbteten/ n. 
' aeminnen (geioann/ gewonnen) 



* fe^c mel/ etne fOtenQt 

* nid^td 

* wijTen Don/ to know of 



* ein fold^e*/ fold)* ein 
■ bewo^nen/" to Kye in 
» '" " ©tette//. 



JU 

" Sroia 

Il eljettiOLV^ 

• ia^iti mogen, toWneto have I »» Äotti^tVbi f^ K*^^ ^wc^OO^ivS^ 



90 



GERMAN ELEMEMTARY QRAIIMAB 



[app, t 



Additional Exercises to Lesson XXXIV. 

VI. — 1. Go where [the] duty * calls you. 2. It is a long time^ 
gince t saw you. 3. I shall have departed before my brother 
knows the affair. 4. While you are waiting for an answer' 
from the countess,* you lose* too much tiine. The noble 
knight^ played^ [so long] till he had löst all. When (tok) he 
made a sign® with his (the*) finger, ^^ the door opened.*^ Who 
does not leam whilst (inbcm) he is teaching? 5. His happiness ** 
was greater than he had desired. As (tote) the master so the 
scholar. This boy looks ^^ exactly** like his father. The 
npright^^ man speaks as he thinks. 6. I cannot go to the 
theatre*^ to-night, as I have just received an invitation*^ to 
an evening-party.^® 7. The hat is not good enough *^ to wear 
[it]. You ought to behave^o yourself better, so that your 
parents^^ and masters may be satiafied with you. Eat that 
you may (in order to) live, but do not live that you may eat 
8. The nobleman 22 saluted^s you, *at the same time* (inbem) 
bowingä* (tr. he bowed). The ambassadör 2* looked *' as if he were 
ill. Speak so that you may be understood {tr. one may be abie 
to understand you). The more you give this beggar the more 
he wants.^^' 9. Although the sea^^ separates^^ us still wé 
are friends and brothers. 






Hntwcttff. 

®rdfin^/. {derived/rom ®raf) 

oerliercn (»erlor/ ocrlorcn) 

StitUx, m. 

fpielen/" to play 

löinf ett/* to make a sign 

The ariicle ta used instead of the 

possessive when the possessor 

cannot be mistaken 

» Kl.^ff"^"''^ *o openi get open 
" a«f fe^eiy» to look »* ganj 
^WUv, n. 



10 

11 



IS 

u 
u 



IB 
20 
21 



" Sinlabung//. 
» ^benbaefcUféap//. 
~ QtnviQlindedmabie) 
fid) bctraqen** 
@(tern^ pl. 
** (Sbelmann; m, (pl. (SbeUettte tN^ 
a coUective »ense; pl, ÖhtHfi 
m&nner in a distr^nUivesen»é) 
» ffc&^tnr to greet, salute (to take 

off, or touäi one*8 hat) 
«* fid) ©crbcugcn/ eiiie SSecbeugung 

mac^en/ to bow, maka a bov 
" ®cfanbtc/ m, " 

^* t)ahin woUtnr to want to haye 
sea, bie @ee/ ber Ocean 

the lake, ber ®ee 
fc^eiben"^ (k, ie), to sepante 



27 



28 



APP, I.] 



HISGELLAKEOUS EXEBCISES. 



91 



How TO Eender English Participial Phrases. 

VII. — 1. On going (tr. when I went(«») into the shop,* Imet^ 
your cousin with two other (nod) jiocl) ladies, 2. 1 met your 
cousin going into the shop with two other ladies. 3. Whilst 
Btanding at the window, I can see all the people in the street. 

4. I see all the people in the street, standing at mj window. 

5. When standing at the door of the house, we could see all 
the people pass.^ 6. Not having any more paper,* I cannot 
give you anj. 7. As it snows and rains, we cannot go for a 
walk. 8. Being iU, I sent for the physician* living next door. 
9. Having done* his business,^ he left (abreifcn) by the next 
train. 10. The messenger,* having given me lie money, 
went away without waiting for an answer. 11. Having 
written my exerdse,® I copied'® it again. 12. 1 am sure** of 
his having aaid so. 13. A man that does his duty ^^ serves*^ 
his master well. 14. I wonder at*^ your sister staying out so 
long. 15. Enowing that you know the Count of Rode», will 
you, please, introduce** me to him ? With the greatest plea- 
sure.'® 16. The wind being favourable,*^ we set sail.** 

(") Observet the English present participle, being often nsed to 
express tiTne, eattse, reason, &c. must be replaced in German by one of 
the conjunctions (Lesson XXXIV.), with the proper tense of the verb ; 
thus 'on going into the house, I. met your brother/ is translated * ali 

td) tn'é «&aué m^ begegnete id) 3&tem ^^errn S3ntber. 



Saben^ m. (pl. S&ben) 
bte iabmt the Bhutters 
etnem begegnen/'' to meet one 
eincn antrcjfen'» (sep.) 
»orbciöe^jcn* {8ep,\ to go past 
^apict/ n. 
Titit, m, {pl. Xcr jtc) 
abmad)eii^ (sep.), to do, finish 

SSoter ffi. 
2Cufaa0c// 
"• abf(§reiben*» (sep.), to copy 



" bcffen aewi^ fcin/ or ed ganj 

gewif wiffen 
»^ ^mtff. @c!)ulbiö!cit//. 
*• bienen/" to serve 
" fid) wunbcrn fiber^ to wonder at 
** to introduce (a person Xo an- 

other), (einen bcm anbern) 

DOtfiellen (sep. ; with a dat.) 
*• JBcronugcn/ n. 
" ÖÖnjtiQ 
" bie @cge( auffpannen (sep.), to 

set sail 



Note, — ^The principal separable partides are— the preposUions mit/ 
nad)/ bci/ »on/ jU/ entgcgcn/ anét axu auf, ©or ; the adjectives frei/ glcirt)/ 
loé/ wicber/ xoolfyc ; the mmn ^iatx ; the adverhs Q^, bar^ dxit empor^ fe^l/ 
fort> ^cim/ flbcrein; Dorbci/ weg/ wieber^ jurfic^ gufammcn* \9X\ i«ä.%^% 
the compownds of Ij^et/ I)in/ 9or/ as, ^eciibet) ^^m^Xi ^^x^^>Ui ^^ 



92 GERMAN ELEMEKTABT GRAMICAR. [aIT. I; 

On some Adjectives. 

Vni.— 1. It is [a] mere> talk,* and nothing else.* His feet 
are bare.^ He poseesses (befinn) nothing ^ but merelj (alg btof ) 
a small house and a little garden. 2. The man who talks 
only* [ber] seldom* acts.* The mere talking^ is of no use.^ 
3. The beggar sleeps on the bare' ground.* 4. We eat dry* 
bread. Your hopes*® (sing,) are vain.' 5. It is [a] vain* 
talk. It is all* i nonsense-V* 6. [The] Women are vain.* He 
is a vam man. 7. The ice is smooth.*' It is a rongh ** and 
diy 15 "^ind. 8. Your friend is a rough*^ fellowJ^ He is veiy 
böld.*® 9. Your boys are impertinent.** It is nothing but" 
water. 10. An impertinent fellow. Your sister looks (tr. is) 
pale,^ Is she ill? 11. Your dress is *a * light red.** It is 
Tciy thin.«2 It is all** wool. 



« btof 


" bummcé 3cu3/ n., Unjtnn/ m. 


« ®i\éfto^f n. 


" 0(att 


» wciter nic^té 


" raub 
" trorfctt 


* felten 


* CtW)aétt)Utt/toact,doanything 


" QWb 
" SCevX, m. 


• ©agcn/ «. 


' maå)t eé ntcl^t> is of no use 


" breift, fecf/ fö^n 


« erbc,/. 


" fred); Dcrweacn 


• eitcl 


•• blaf 


*• ^ojfnung//. 


«» blafrot^ 


" lautec/ nic^tg aH 


" bonn 



On some Adjectives. 

IX. — 1. It is getting very dark.* I think it is going to 
rain. It was dark* all the day. 2. It is pitch dark.* What 
a dim* light. 3. It looks very gloomy.* It was getting dusk* 
when we came home. 4. We are sitting in the dark. It is a 
light ^ evening. 5. It will be getting light.^ What a bright® 
day. She is very cheerftil.* 6. The sky* looks clear.**^ The 
water is not clear; *<^ it is very muddy.* 7. Have yon any 
new-laid** eggs? No, we have not; but we have freah** 
butter. 8. Are there any new*^ vegetables (©crnftfc/ n. stn^,) t 



' finjler 
* bunfeJ 
' ftodftnftet 



lidbt 
getter 



' ttåbe \ ^* tVax 

/ båflet i dusk, bSmmcria \ ^' \tx\*> 



AFP. I.] HISCELLANEOUS EXEBCISE8. 93 

I don't know. 9. Do you sell new** milk ? Yes, we do {adi, 
sell some). 10. Have you anj new^' books? No, I bave 
none. 11. This is an old^^ coat of mine (^r. one of mj old ooato). 
It is very shabby,** but it is of stronga* material. ^^ 12. The 
cake *8 is veiy light.*' It is too sweet.^ 18. We have had a 
blue*^ sky* all the week. Yes, the weather was very fine.^* 
14. A fine» thread.2* Puxe» gold. A refined*» taste.«* 
w neu »• loc!er « fög 



"olt 

^ fd^&big/ abgemt|t 

*• berb/ baucr^aft 



«» blau 

^ fd56n 

*» fein 

** gaben/ m, {pl. gdben) 



On Advekbs.('*) 



(•») O^erve, that adverbs are placed before a^Jectives and pafticipVs, 
and after the principal verb in the present or imperfect tense. Thej 
should be always placed before the word which they are rntended to 
qualify.' 

X. — 1. I have written only^ a few lines.^ 2. I have only 
been writing a little. 3. We have not seen the lady. 4. 
The king has received^ the ambassadör most graciously.^ 5. 
My brother was not received* in the best manner.** 6. Be so 
good as to read^ this letter, which I received to-day, 7. 
Pray, give® me the large knife, and bring me a glass of water, 
if you please.* 8. I regret^® not being able to do more. y. 
He declined^i in a very polite manner.^^ 10. He was un- 
commonlyi* polite. ^^ 11. The dress will be (foften) fifteen 
dollars at the most.^* 12. We shall probably** start ^'^ the 
day after to-morrow.^® 13. The^* oftener^o you read good^ 
books the^* more you will improve.'* 14. The longer I 

" auf « Wi*fte 

" duferjl/ auferorbentltd)/ unge^ 
mein 



nur 

3eilc,/. • 

emjpfanöen (insep,), to receive 

aufé dn&bidfle 

aufnc^men («cp.), to receive 

gum beflen 

ir, read kindly (kindly, QifhU 

Kgfl) 
tr. give me kindl^r 

if yon please, gefålltgfi 



" obreifen/" abfa|)ren"« («ep.) 

" öbcrmorgen 

>' the ... the, je . . . befiOr 
ie . . . it 

_ ^ _ ^ , „,, „.. *• b^texi\iiM$%«t 

bcbauern'V to regret \« \id) ^ttxicJVÄ^mrnXÄXv VV^»<?2•^^^ 

fifd; bebaniettf to decime, thank I «oxX\^xtvUxv> V?*^^ 



94 GERSCAN ELEMENTART ORAMKAB. TaPP. I. 

know him tlie better I like^^ him. 15. You write rather^* 
quickly.'* We should neither read nor write hurriedly.^* 
16. I told you so [it] once,^^ I shall not tell you a second 
time.^^ 17. I called for you twice^® in vain.^* 18. Will you 
have any more of these äpples ? Yes, certainly.^^ Give me 
two more.^^ 



" leit)cn mbatxit to like 

2* jiemtid)/ cin wcnig 

«* rafdv fdbneU 

" in ber ®iU, mit Uebereitung 

*• fd)oit cinmal 



" jum jttjeiten SRale 

" jwcmtal 

» öergcbcné/ »ergeblidS)^ umfonjt 

■• ja »0^1/ getoip 

•* nod^ j»ei 



On ' auf ' AND * off en ; ' ' l)cr ' and * l^in.* 

XI. — 1. Please to open (aufmad)en ("•) the door. The door 
is open ; I opened it. 2. Open(*®) your book. It is open. 3. 
Unlock the door. It is unlocked. 4. She is going there.(*°) 
lie was coming here. 5. Are you coming from town? No. 
I am going there. 6. He told me to come in. I was told to 
go out. Come in ! Go out I Go up I Come up ! Go 
down 1 7. Your father called me out when I was going in. 
8. I did not do it before (oor^er). Do not tell me afterwards 
(må)h€t) you had no time. She did tell you so before. 9. 
Is the chamber-door (Äammert^ör//.) open ? 

(•») Observe the force of the adverb auf in aufmad)cn/ to open ; auf« 
fd)licfcn/ to unlock; auffdhlagen/ cin SBudh/ to open a book, &c. It 
expressfns the reverse of offen fein/ to be open ; as, hit S^äc fUf)t offexu 
the door is open. 

(*®) Observe the marked difference between the adverbs fieT/ hither, 
and f^irif hence ; viz. : — 

1. .^er denotes ' motion ordirection to a plaoe or person,* ^tn denotea 

'motion /rom a place, away from a person; ' thua, cr ge^t \)int 
he is going there ; cr Jommt t)nt he is coming here. Th«y 
cannot always be rendered into English, as, er Commt t)On bct 
@tabt t^&Ct he is coming from town. 

2. When prefixed to prepositions— as, ^ercin/ ^inein^ into ; f)txavift 

^inauff np; ^crunter^ t)xn\mtn, down— they retamtheir proper 
force; thns, tomm* ^crcitt/ come in I gc^' binauS/ go out! 
When subjoined to prepositions — as, oor^cr/ before; nadj^O 
after— they stånd for öorbcm/ nad)bcm/ and do not indicate 
. motion or direction. In the former case, regard mnst always 
be had to the speaker; as, et ttcf tbn ^craué/ he called him out 
(to him) ; cr ricf ibn l^erein/ he called him in (to him). 

3. Verbs compounded with l^er or ^in^ or the compounds f^tXWHt 

j^muntcr/ &c are always sepazable. 



APP. I.J MISCELLANEOUS EXEBCISES. 95 



On *man,' *bann,' 'trann.' 

1o/'41\ aorr tViaf rrnny trar^ iin^ 



XII. — 1. People(**) say tbat yonr very unfortunate brotber 
died two years ago. Can it be possible wbat you say ? One (*^ ) 
can bardly believe it. 2. One is fer (bci wcitem) bappier when 
one is contented. 3. Do you know wben (**) tbe baron and the 
baroness wUl come ? I(*^) bave not been told wben tbey will 
come ; I sbonld tbink at balf-past seven. 4. One cannot bear 
one's (* ^) own voice (SBort^ «.). Be quiet ! 5.1 believe tbat some- 
body(^^) wants to speak to you. I must go, I am expected.(*^) 
6. People take (|)atten fÖr) your wife*s brotber for an artist. 
One often tbinks oneself more prudent tban one is. 7. Tbe 
nobleman' s property is greater tban is (man) believed. No, it 
is not. 8. If one löses one's best friend, one (dat.) is sorry 
[«for' it] (leib t^un). 9. It is far better to risk (aaf é @ptcl fc^en) 
one's money tban one*s life or bonour (S^jrc//.). 10. One xjan 
only be praised [then](*^) if(*^) one bas done (mad)en) one's 
work. 11. 1 do not remember (fid) erinnem) wben(*^) I bad tbe 
bonour of making your acquaintance (SSeEanntfc^ft//.)- 

(**) Observe, that the English passive (as, *I am told* ) must frequently 
be rendered by the indefinite pronoxm * man, ' denoting one, we, you, 
they, somebody, man, people, or any person in general, foUowed by the 
verb in the. active voice änd th4/rd person singular ; thus, man t)at mit 

' ^an' being indeclinable, its genitive is replaced by etneé/ of one ; 
the datiye by etnem/ to one, and the accusatiye by einen/ one. 

* 0ne*8,* before a noun, is rendered by fein ; * oneself' by fid) felbjl, 

(**) Observe, that * bann/ then, at that time,* and * toannt when,at what 
time,' are adverbs of time, and must not be confounded with the con- 
junctions 'benn^ for* (reason), and *n)enn/ if* (conditional). 



Xm.— DO AS YOU WOULD BE DONE BY.i 

A student^ once* asked* one of bis fellow-students * ta be 
80 kind as to lend® bim a certain book. But tbe latter^ did 
not like* to lend bis books, and answered, * I never let^ my 
books go^® out of my room,*^ but if you will come and read 

•' SBic bu mir, fo iå) bir. • Uii)tn, oer(ci^/en"* {itt te) 

* ©tubcntr m, * biefer/ ber anbere 

* einmal ■ öccn m6gen/ to like 

* beg, hittzn'* (a/ e) ■ erlauben ba^/ allow that, or l<s%^ 

* SOlitjlubent/ m. " lommeu ^^ ^\^\ä* i 



96 



0£RMAK ELEMENTÄRT GRAHMÄR. 



[app. i. 



it in my study,^^ you are quite welcome** to do so the whole 
day 4ong.* 

A few days afierwards,^^ the disobliging^'^ student could not 
get his fire to bum,^^ and ' so * sent'^ to his fellow-student to 
borrow^® his bellows^^ for a minute. But the latter replied,*^ 
* that he never allowed' his bellows ** to go ^® out of his room, 
but if Mr. Stone would come and use*^ them in his room, he 
was quite welcome to do so the whole day long.' 

" ©tubtrftube//. " fd)i(f en/' to send 



" »iUfommcn fein/ to be welcome 
" nattj^iV, or tr, after a few, ^c, 
*• ungcfdUig 
" in iBranb befommen 



" lei^cn/ borgen 

>' IBlafebalg/ m, bellows 

*• ant»orten'(MMtfp.),topeply 

" benu^en 



XIV.— A THIEF OUTWITTED.» 

In America, a thief ^ once went into a shop to buy some 
wool. When the wool had been weighed out,* and put* into 
a bag,* the shopkeeper^ went to the shop next door to get 
change.^ The thief, who thought that no one saw him, took 
the opportunity * to put a large cheese into his bag. But the 
fihopkeeper had seen all,^ and when he gave the man his change, 
he took hold ^^ of the bag, exdaiming : ^^ ' I must have made a 
mistake ! * ^* * Oh no ! * ^* said the other,^* * I am sure, you 
have not.' * Well, well,' ** said the shopkeeper, * we can 
easily ^^ weigh it again.' >^ So saying, he put the bag into 
the scales.!^ * There I ' said he, * I told you so, I have 
made a mistake of nearly^' twenty poimds. But if you don't 
wanc the whole, I can take some out^^ again.' ^ No, no I ' '' 
Baid the thief, who was afraid^^ that the cheese would be 
foamd, * I will take*^ the whole ; ' and so he had to pay^» fcr 
his cheese the high price of wool. 

• jDer öbcrliftete ©ieb * ^izhf m. 
abmiegen (mog ahf abden>ogen) 
ftetfen 

@act/ m, • Ärdmer/ m. 

fleineé ®elb gu ^olen^ or hai 

@e(b JU wec||)feln 

• hit ©elegen^eit wofycm^mzn, to 

take the opportimity 

• bem 2CUen jufefjen/ or 2CUeé mit 

anfebem to see all 
»•» anfaffen/ aufteben (^)ob auf/ auf* 
ee(f0(fen) 



" auSrufen»* («fp.), to ezdaim 

" SJerfe^en/ «• 

" nein 

" anbere " aut 

" leid)t 

" noc^ einmal wiegen 

" auf/ or ixif bie Söage legen 

" beino^e 

«• berauéneljjmen»* 

»^ bange 

^ nebmen» 

*• beaablen 



APF. II. . AN AOCOUKT OF THE LANQUA6E. 97 



APPENDIX n. 

A BKIEF ACCOUNT OF THE GERMAN LANGUAGE.* 



German, the modem representative of High German, or what 
grammarians term New High Geirman, is the literary and con- 
versational language of ahout förty millions in the centre of 
Europé. Its progress during the last three centuries has been 
signalised by few changes in the language itself, and in the 
main it is still the same as that used by Luther in his träns- 
lation of Scripture. Its orthography might be simplified, and 
of late, many changes have been effected in that direction, biit 
the new orthography not having become generally used, it 
would be premature to introduce all the alterations into 
this book. 

The German language inherits a power of assimilation 
only little inferior to that of English, and affords remarkable 
&cility for forming new words and compounds, similar to what 
we see in Greek. It possesses a far greater stock of words 
than any other modem language, and would, Hke the English, 
be eminently adapted to become a imiversal language if 
its mode of inflection and construction were less complicated. 

The more a language becomes simplified in its grammar 
the more it will be adapted for the conunon intercourse of 
nations. In all modem languages may be noticed a tendency 
to throw off the inflections, and to substitute for them a system 
of auxiliaries and particles. Thus, for instance, the pos- 
Bessiye case in vemacular German is now generally rendered 



* One often meets with such stränge and mistaken notions as to the 
origin and character of the German language that the author was 
induced to append this brief acconnt of tiie langaage, more for the 
perasal of teachers, and more advanced students, than for studenttt is 
generaL 

U 



98 GEKMAir ELEMENTÄRT GBAIOIAR. [aFP. IL 

by the possessiye pronoun fetn and t()r (although this praddce 
is repudiated by fastidious grammanans in classical Grerman), or 
hy means of a preposition with tbe dative or accusatiTe case. 
Other instances might be cited, but thej are too few and too 
insignificant to promise a rapid change in the aspect of the 
German langnage. There always will remain a certain syiitem 
of inflection by means of endings, and by inflection of the 
root-Yowel.* The latter especially presents some difficulty to 
the leamer, as there is nothing analogous to it either in French 
or English. The German accidenoe, once divested of its jdii- 
losophical dress, is not so difficult a study as is generallj 
imagined. On the other hand, the study of German withont 

* By vowd inflecHon or sofiening we underatand the Taiying or 
modifying of the yowel sound. An inflected vowel ib, therefore, the 
Tariation or modification of the sound of the original voweL The 
inflected yowel is indicated by putting two döts or a small e över the 
original yowel ; thus we haye d/ 5/ & dU/ the inflections of (V O/ U# au. 

The soiind characteristic of the inflected yowel was originally caused 
by the yowel i of the termination, the i being in Old High German, and 
in the early Middle High German, employed in endings of inflection, to 
form the cases of nouns and the persons of yerbs, where we now nse e. 
This i of the termination then produeed by blending or fasing with the 
Bonnd of the radical yowel the inflected yowel sound; thus, (Old H^ 
German) ' gast ; * plural nominatiye, * gesti * (for •' gasti '), or, in modcini 
German, ®dfle. ta Old High German we find two yowels infleded, 
especially a ; in Middle High German we haye no less than ejght in 
flections, whUe in the Gbthie language we haye none. 

In modem G«rman the yowel inflection is obserred in forming — 

1, The plural of tnany nouns, as S&aöif pl, IB&d^ (Lessoni IV. 

and V.) ; 

2. The comparatiye and superlatiye of a limited nnmber of ad- 

jectiyes, as altf hlttt, ålteft (Lesson IX.) ; 
8. The second and third persons singular of the present of a /ev 

strong yerbs, as ttage^ trågft/ tt&gt (Lesson XXL) ; 
4. The subjunctiye imperfect of strong yerbs from the iadieative, 

as fålje/ from fa^ (Lesson XXXVL) ; 
6. DerivativeSf viz. : — 

a, Diminutives, as gråulcilt/ from grau 5 

b. Feminine appellations of persons and animals firom the nu» 

euline nouns, as @rdftn/ &om ®raf ) 
e, Abstract names, as JCdlte/ from {alt $ 
d. Adjectiyes in ig/ t(f)t/ ifd)/ and lid)/ from snbstantiyes, at 

mdd)tt9/fromSDlacf)t5 
^. MaacuHinoa in iXt as lildnaeiv from San|. 



APP. II.] AN ACX30UNT OF THE LANGUAGE. 99 

the asfiistance of grammar is productive of no lasting know- 
ledge. 

German being one of the most phonotypically spelt of tlie 
tongues of Europé, the pronnnciation may be readilj acquired. 

No other modem language affords so many materials for 
£icilitating tbe study of German as the English, comprising 
upwards of 21,000 words of purely Anglo-Saxon origin. If 
teachers of German pointed ont, and students kept in view, 
the progress of changes which English words have undergone. 
and how new forms are stnmg and held together, as it were, 
by invisible threads, muoh useless labour wonld be avoided, 
and, instead of the study of German being a heavy task-work 
for the memory, it might be made an intellectual and mentaily 
stimulating employment. 

The greatest difficulty of German wiHbe fonnd in fhe «on- 
struction of sentences, and in the idioms, with which Uhe 
language aboands.* A certain place is assigned to every word 
in the sentence, and from the laws by which the order of 
words is ruled there is no deviation ; thus, for example, the 
infinitiTe, or participle, in compound tenses, is invariably put 
last in an independent sentence. The sentence * I have not 
given the book to yova: brother to-day^ but I shall give it him 



* A mere lUeral rendering of any Gennan idiom (as, for ingtance, -to 
come off witha whole skin, mit gånger or ^cilcr »&aut baöon fommcn), 
höwetfer desiroMe for the sdke oj grammaticod analysis, doea not bring 
the student any nearer to the real ^meaning* of the expression, which is 
always best conveyed by some corresponding idiomatical ea^pression in 
EngUsh {thus the above ought to be rendered by * to come off eafe *). As 
students of German have to rdy to a great extent on their dictionary for 
the aocurate rendering of any tdiom, it wUl be weU to draw aitention>to a 
work reeently pvhlished, *A Practical German Dictionary, by the Rev. 
W. L. Blackley, M.A., and Dr. Friedländer,* which, being 'Orwinally 
designed f&r English stvdents, and rendering the German idioms by their 
English equivalents, is greatly calculated tofacUitate the study of German, 
jie English-Gepman part of that dictionary deserves, Siowever, speddl 
mention, The explanaticms beina given in Englifih, <md not in German, 
as is usuaUy the case, it will be of great assistance to students who, having 
gone through aU the English exercises in this Grammar, may take up any 
pieee of English prose compositionfor translation inio Gcfrmau. 

b8 



100 GEBMAN ELEMEKTABT GEAKMÄB. [aPP. ». 

to-mörrow,' would be in German, * I have to jovx brother the 
book to-day not given, but I shall it him to-morrow give,* 
^vhich sounds pei-feetly imintelligible to Englidi ears. To 
mention one of the most common idioms: 'cill SBicttcI äuf 
brct/ literally, ' a quarter to tkree,^ means, that it is a quarter 
pasfc two; or, * brcivicrtcl brci,' literally, *^tkree quarters to 
three,^ means, that it is a quarter to three. Anj difference in 
the idiom of two languages naturally arises from a difference 
in the mind of the people. The German mind conceives the 
hand of a clock procecding on its way towards tAree, and 
reasons thus : Afler having gone fifteen steps or minutes, the 
traveller has accomplished one quarter of his waj to three; 
after having made thirty steps, he has accomplished half of his 
way to three, and so on. Thus every language possesses a 
system of ideas of its own — ^the genius of the language — a 
something belonging to its essence, and a condition of its 
substantiality. The character of a nation is again reflected in 
the genius of its language. In the self-subsisting unmallable 
nature- of the German suffixes and affixes, which, when joined 
on to words, never blend or iuse with them, but preserve their 
original force intact, as in the case of the separable partides 
of compound verbs, we see, for instance, the stiff conservative 
character of the German people. In the philosophical train 
of thoughts, which predominates in almost every Grerman 
writer, we discover the general tendency of the German mind. 
Leibnitz was right in saying, ' German seems to be the 
daughter of philosophy.* 

* Much of the haziness of conception and mistiness of ex- 
pression, so frequently attributed to German authors, arises 
generally not from defects in the thought or idiom itself, but 
more from the circumstance that most other European lan- 
guages are inferior to German in power of philosophical 
expression, and also from the fault of translators, who do not 
Btrip the idea of its peculiar German dress, and re-clothe it 
in a garb in all respects familiar to their readers. The more 
tliorough our knowledge of a foreign language is the more 



APP. II. J AN ACCOUNT OF THE LANGUAGE. 10 T 

difficult we find it to translate into our own, with some degree 
of faithfulness and accuracy, anything that lies beyond the 
common run of thought.' * 



German, in a general sense (that is, all the dialects and 
languages of Teutonie origin taken as a whole), belongs to an 
original type of speech, known as the Aryan, or Indo-Euro- 
pepn, iamilj, the chief varieties of which are the Sanskrit, 
Persian, Greek, Latin, Celtic, Slavonic, Lettic, or Lithuanian, 
find the Teutonie languages. 

As the languages of all the Teutonie nations bear a strong 
sisterly likeness, not merely in their roots, or in the general 
aspect of their words, but in the whole of their forms and in- 
flections, and as there are said to be among the different tribes 
of Germanic origin such features of mutual resemblance as 
to demonstrate their original identity in all the material 
elements of national existence, it has generally been supposed 
that, at some time before the Christian era, and in some 
locality or other, one common and uniform German or Teutonie 
language must have existed, from which, as from a common 
centre, all the existing dialects of that name have radiated 
and diverged. Such a supposition may be admitted for the 
sake of grammatical analysis, but it becomes mischievous as 
soon as the grammatical abstraction is invested with an 
historical reality. 

There probably never was a single and uniform Teutonie 
language ; at least, it cannot be proved. The Germans first 
appear in histoiy as a semi-nomadic race, displaying a höst of 
séparate tribes, elans, and families, each one independent of 
the other, and speaking a dialect of its own, sometimes with 
the features peculiar to High German, sometimes with those 
peculiar to Low German, but asyet neither one nor the other. 
Thus the ancient Germans lived on for centuries, each tribe 
going hifl own way, without troubling himself much about 

» Dublin Seview, July l^^^. 



i02 OERMAK ELEMENTART OHAHMAB. [aFP. IL 

the other. But in times of common danger, or of a joint 
enterprise, we find a number of these tribes banded together 
in a confederacy, at the head of which a tribe that had become 
more powerful than the rest took its position, and bestowed 
its name and some of its pecnliarities of its dialect on the 
other tribes that had been subjugated, or had joined the con- 
federacy of their own accord, nntil again this new tribe, after 
its dissolution or loss of power, was absorbed in another tribe 
that had grown strong meanwhile. Thus arose different con- 
federacies and nationalities, as that of the Francs, which laid 
the foundation of the empire of Charlemagne ; and * as we find 
a powerful empire formed from a multitude of entirely inde- 
pendent tribes * so in like manner, from a multiplicity of 
dialects, there arose a single imiform national language, the 
High Grerman (»^odjbcutfd)), which became the literary and 
official language of the Franconian empire. But it cannot be 
proved that a uniform and primitive High German language 
was the source from which sprang the Old, Middle, and New 
High German languages, together with the Alemannic, Swa- 
bian, Bavarian, and Franconian dialects; nor is there any 
dear evidence to show that there existed at any time a uni- 
form and primitive Low Geiman language. We cannot alto- 
gether derive Frisian, Diltch, Anglo-Saxon, the old Saxon, 
Flemish, or modern Low German dialects from the ancient 
Low German (^licbcrbeutfd)). All we can say is this: a? 
there were various tribes, elans, and families, before there was 
a distinct nation so there was a multiplicity of dialects before 
there was a national language.* These various dialects gave 
in the course of time rise to four distinct varieties, or branches, 
of Teutonic speech — the Scandinavian, Low German, Gothie, 
and High German — which, together with their minor branches, 
occupy a co-ordinate position, viz. :— 



^ * Max MuUei^s Leetures on t%t Science of Language. This ad- 
mirable work s^oold be studied by e^ery teaÄ\i« oi ^iÄftQc«tBaal^3Mk- 
^»^^ö, and wovdd be of great uso to Oie "moT© ^^ÖL-^aLiitfe^ «XM\«i\^ 



APP. n.] 



AN AOOODKT OF THK UHaUAOI. 




The Scandinav&m Iranch coumiits of three literary laa- 
goages, thofie of Sweden, Denmark, and Iceland. Its earllest 
literary docmnentB are tlie two ' Bddas.' 

The Low German branch iocludes ihe lai^ageB in the 
north, or tlie löwlands, of Genuany — the Frisian, Saxon, 
Änglo-Saxon, Old Saxon, Dutch, Flemidli, and modem Low 
German, or ^lattbeutfij) (i.e.Plain German). 

The Friåian language had a literature aa early as the 
twéifih centtuy, and still lires in ita former purity in many 
Beduded parta of the countij which formed the western 
portion of ihe former kingdom of Eanorer, now annexed hy 
Pnueia ; the majority of the people, however, epeak a modem 
di&lect of the Old Friaiaa Jangoage. The oldest literary docu- 
ment of Lovr German is the Christian epic ' HÉliand,' i.e. 
SaviooT, written in the Old Sason dialect, which was spöken 
in the cotintiy between the Blbe and the Rhine, and which 
continaed to he the national language of these diBtricta to the 
end of die siicteenth centuiy. A comparison of the QVd. 
Saxon and Anglo-Saxon dialecta lea^ea tio (knÄA »a ^ ^tiä-a 
comntOD oT^in. The term' SaxoTi Yaogvuig,'*' \% s^^iwi- m 
Äa6* diAlectg be&re they wcre two distinct \aQeiÄ%'*- 



104 6ERXAN ELEMENTÄRT GRAHSCAB. |^APP. H. 

A critioal understanding of English, such as an Englishman 
Bhould have, is hardlj possible without some knowledge of 
Anglo-Saxon ; and the works written in tlus langnage afford 
Bome gems of thought, as well as much nseftd histoiy. 

The Dutch is still a national and literaiy langnage, ihon^ 
confined to a 9mall area. 

The Flemish has been considerablj encroached upon by the 
French, thongh not yet extinguished. 

The ^^lattbeutfd;),' or modem Low German^ besides having 
a literature of its own, is even now the colloquial langnage of 
the peasantry and working classes, chiefly in ihe North of 
Germany ; the langnage spöken by the common people of the 
South consists of dialects of High German, and mimt not be 
mistaken for Low German. 

The Gothic language is still extant in some fragments of 
a translation of the Bible, which is amongst the earliest records 
of German literature. Gothic has been mistaken by some 
grammarians for the original source of Teutonic speech, as 
being the only one of these four parallel branches that can be 
traced back to the fourth century, whereas the others are löst 
to our sight previous to the eighth century. 

The High German language^ which took its rise with the 
empire of Charlemagne, comprises three periods, or stages, of 
existence — the Old, Middle, and New High German. The 
Old High German period dates from the seventh century ; the 
Middle High German commences with the twelfth century. 
Middle High German literatuie flourished under the Hohen- 
staufens as emperors of Germany ; and Swabia being their 
native country, the language bears eminently the type of the 
Swabian dialect. The grand national epics of this time are 
* Der Nibelunge liet, der Nibelunge nöt,' and * Gudrun,' both 
written in the thirteenth century. 

The New High German period commences with the Re- 
formation, in the fifleenth century, and the modem High 
German language (in England simply termed ' German ') owea 
jts present poÄtåon and importance as the literary and oon- 



APP. II.] AN ACCOUNT OF THE LANG UAOE. lOJ 

versational language of all Germany to the influence of the 
great German Reformer, Dr, Martin Luther, who, in his 
numerous writings, and especially in hia translation of the 
Scriptnres, made use of the dialect which at that time was 
spöken in the law-courts. 

Since Luther's time, German literature has steadily ad- 
vanced ; it rose to the highest perfection in the last centurj, 
the time of Leasing, Göthe, and Schiller. The object of 
Lessing^s life was to create a national literatnre ; and he did 
create it. He was the first German who gave to German 
literature its national tendencies and physiognomj. Klop- 
stock had made it English, Wieland had made it French, 
Lessing made it German. The two greatest poets and drama- 
tists that Germany ever produced are Schiller and G<)the. 
In order iully to appreciate and understand their works, they 
must be studied in the original. 

There are now in the German language works of the 
highest merit in every branch of literature, the power of 
perusing which will amply reward the toil of acquiring 
German. 

In concluding this artide, a tribute is due to the memory 
of Jacob Grimm, who died in September 1863, the greatest 
philologist in a country greatest in philology. What progress 
philology has made beyond the confines of classical lore is 
due to him. Eising above the triviality of the model Latin 
Grammar, he was the first to treat of language as an historical 
science, showing the progressive evolution of a nation*8 mind. 
The four volumes of his * German Grammar ' worked a revo- 
lution in the grammar of every people. He composed a 
chronological account of almost every grammatical form ; he 
showed the growth of language, the change of views it 
Implied, and the goal it was tending to. He was the first to 
discover the fundamental law of comparative philology, on the 
ground of which arose an entire science of the highest impor- 
tance for psychological, plulosophical, and historical purposes. 
The regular interchange of sound between Q^e^cQa^Ci^^■^^^^ 



106 GERMAN ELEMENTÄRT GR AMMAR. f APP. 11. 

and Latin, first noticed by bim, became ihe comerstone upon 
which Herr Bopp built bis åtmous system of comparative 
grammar. Grimm publisbed, besides bis graniinar and dic- 
tionary, a bistory of the German language, a variety of essays, 
treatises, and fairy-tales. Language witb bim being one ex- 
ponent only of national life, be endeavoiired to trace and lay 
open tbe sonrces of tbat instinctive and xmconscious feeling 
wbicb, prevailing in early times of bumanity, alike engendered 
a national speecb, religion, and poetry.* 

* 8ome of the materuUs for the above essav have heen derwedfrom 
* Lectnres on the Science of Language/ by Professor Max Muller, MJL ; 
Professor DoUinger^s *Gentile and Jew;* the 'Dublin Beview,' Jtdy 
1864; from an artide on Grimm, which, at ihe time of his death, 
appeared in one of the daily papers, and from * A Lecture on the 
German and English Languages,' by the Sev, A Lowy, 



:i.] 



GEBMAN AKD ENGUSH VOCABULABT. 



107 



APPENDIX III. 

5RMAN AND ENGLISH VOCABULARY. 

(SuppleTJientaiy,) 
TO BE USED Yfrm THE GERMAN EXERCISES. 



rtMds fop poffe; E. for Bule; Voc. for Vocabulary; Olw. for 



fn, evening 

nj. but 

7 part. departed, set out 

" (««?•)» to depart, set off, 

1, everything (from aUeCf 

lUcé) 

O, E. 18 

refore 

old 

an bem/ on the, p. 71, 

So 

mtttf part. arrired, come 
Jinie 

■n, ontwortctc/ gcantwors 

answer, reply 

. äpple, ^/.2CepfeI 
effen/ p. 45 

;. & adv. sIbo, too, eren, 
Obs. 17 
». on, upon, up 
(sep.\ to get up 
eye, p; 12, E. 9 

to) tpcrbett/ to become of 



1 

bittcn/ p. 46 
'nbitten,p. 46 

JT^k small farmer, i vvmwu v« 



naetäar Gennan aometmea bed 

S3auren ^ ^ogelbauer/ m. & n. 

bird-cage) 
SJquto/ m. tree, pl. SBdume 
©dume/i>/. of IBaum 
beantiDotteti/*' to give an answer 

to a letter, qttestion, &a 
SBehienUf m. nx>tman, man-serrant 
bet/ at, near, with 
befanb m\ä)i imperf, of ftd^ be< 

finben 
SSerg/ m. monntain 
S3erltn/ n. city of Berlin 
be jle (ber/ tAii ba«), the best» #tMw2: 

of 9ut 

bcffer/ compar. better 
befuci)en/'' to yisit, call upon, pay 

a yisit 
S3ettler/ m. beggar 
b€«)O0/ from bewegen/ p. 46 
S5ilb/ w. picture, image, pl, JBttbCC 
bitten-* (a, e), to bec, ask 

bleiben/ blieb/ geWieben/ to remain, 
stop, stay 

bliebft/ from bleiben/ p. 49 

bligen/'' to flash, lighten 

öl^me//. flower 

S3(ut^e//. bloom, blossom 

bot/ «OT^cr/. of bieten/ bot/ geboten/ 

to offer 
bräder from \Jx^^^w^^ \jc^ \ss«ä». 

(like ^pxt^^xvi ^. ^S> 
SBcle^r m. \e\X«r , »pl, ^"OÄ^t 

bxlnaexi ^\^ xcvVxi >srv'D%xaft 



108 



GERMAN ELEME3n'ÅRT 6RAM1IÅB. 



[aPP. III 



S3rob/ or IBrot/ n. bread, loaf 
S3iuber/ m, brother 
^udy n, book, p/. SBädiec 
S3ä(l^/i»/. of Il3u4 



@t;atfe//. chaise 
S^ampag ner/ m, champagne 
@l^arlata'n/ m. quack 
eéar(o'tte/ or ©d^artotte^ /. Char- 
lotte 
©JarpieV/. lint 
@^ef/ 972. chief, head 

©éocola'te/ or @^ofo(ate/ /. choco- 

late 
CTbot/ 97». chorus, choir 
épot/ n. the place where the choir 

8it 



bO/ 1 a<2v. ofifiace^ there, present ; 

here 
ba/ 2 aåv, of Hme, then, at that 

time ; thus, menn er ba nod^ lebt/ 

if he is then aliye 
hat 3 conj. exjpressifng reason, fe, 

as, since, because, p.76 
bO/ 4 coTi;'. expressing coincidence 

of time, when, at the time when, 

p.76 
Ibamtif lady (-Bwy^. dame) 



jDani^ m. thanks, gratitude 

(Sinem ^toai gu )DanI madtcit/' 
to do anything to one's liking 
or satis&ction 
bartti/ p. 75, Obs. 31 
badf n«t«^ artide, p. 8 
baé/ <2i097zon«^a^ttw; ^ee the foot- 

note, p. 14 
bod/ rdaHve, p. 34 
baf / 009^'. that, pp. 34^ 76 
baau (for JU bem), to it, p. 75, 

Obs. 31 
bentet)/ to think, p. 61 
X)eutf(^/ acf;\ German* 
X)eutfcl^lanb/ n, CFermanj 
^Ut\d)lanbéf gen, of Germany 
bte4/ abbreviation of biefed/ p. 14 
biefer/ biefe/ btefe^ p. 14 
X)tcbter/ m. poet 
bo(^/ then, really, certainly, in- 

deed, &c. p. 54, Obs. 17 
^Orf/ n. yillajge 

brang/from bringen (a/ u), to entet 
by force, press (like finben/ p. 51) 

bönet/ eö bönEt mid)/ it appears to 
me, I think, &c p. 66 f 

a 

tbtru jnst now 

etnem/ dat. of einet/ p. 14, R. lo 

cini^e/ a few, |)^. of ciniger/ ctnigo 

etntgeé/ some, any 
emflie,/. EmUy 



* The adjectiye beittfd) signifies ' known to the people* * pertainiiw t9 

the people,* hence it has Siao the meaning of powdar, native. It is 

derired from the Gothic word * thiitsdiaka^ Old Hign German * diutisc* 

which became diutsch, deutisch, and deutéch. The Gt>thic word ' thiue» 

disks* comes from the nonn * thitida,* which means ^people* The woid 

)Deutfci)e (the English *Ihitch') is the proper name for the people 

which are generally termed Germani, or Germans. It is certain thi.t 

the ancient Germans themselves did not use the term * Germani,* or 

* Gennanen,* originally, but adopted it from the Komans or the G^uls. 

The word Germani is commonly held to signify *warlike men* as derived 

from * ©e^rman ; ' but attempts have also been made to explain it from 

tAe Celtic, PerBian, and Latin signiftcation, as *brothers,* that is, 'brothers 

^ ^Åe Crattia.* 

t The forma which we hear in YernaculaT QrOTm-öÄ^^^xcCvQcj^iVÄ^^X» 

ÄT/r båud)t^ mit bånttei &c. are not good grammai. 



APP. III.] OERMÅN AND ENGLISH VOCABULART. 



109 



©nglifdb/ a^, English 
@rbe//. earth, gromid 
CrwartCt/i>ar<. expected 
@ffen/ n. a meal, as dinner and 

Bupper (the eating) 
QXco^%t indef. pron. (if used with- 

out a notm)f something, anything 
ettoaé/ adj, {with a noun), some, 

anji a little 

% 

fåat/ from fallen/ p. 47 

gamilie//. family 

fertig/ ready, finished 

pel/ from fallen/ p. 47 

fincj/ from fangen/ to catch, Voc 

xxn. 

glafd)e//.bottle 

^eif ig/ adJ. diligent, industrious 
fort/ away, gone, on, off 
fbrtgelaufen/ from fortlaufen/'* to 

nm away 
trägen/" to ask 
granj5flfdf)/ aéy, French 
V^raU//. woman, wife, Mrs. 
freuen/" fid^/ to be glad, rejoice 
frif^/ fresh 

grud)t//. fruit, pl, gröci)te 
frul^/ o^/. early 
firö^er/ before, earlier, some time 

ago, formerly 

fu^r/ from fa{)ren, p. 47 

® 

gan}/ 1 o^/* ^> ^® whole ; 2 ae?t7. 

quite, entirely 
©arten/ m. garden, pl. ®&cten 
geantwortet/^jar^.answered, replied 
geben @ie mtr/ give me 
geflo^n/* from flie^em p. 49 



gefroren/ from frieren/ p. 49 

gefunben/ part, found 

gegangen/ ^r^. gone 

gcgeben/ ^ar^. given 

gegelTen/ jwir<. of effen/ p. 46, Voe. 

ge^abt/ par^. of ^aben/ to bave 
geben'* (i/ a), to go 
ge^bien/ to belong 
gebårt/ belongs 
gebt/ goes 

gepf é/ for ge]()t eö/ from gc^en 
Ctefauft;^ar^. bonght» purchased 
©elb/ 91. money 

gelungen/ ;?aw. of gelingen/ p. 61 

genug/ enongh 

gereiit/ ^ar^. of reifen/ to travel 

geritten/ from reiten/ p. 49 

gefagt/ «>ar^ told 

gefd)enfi/ jpar<. given, presented 

with 
gefd)oren/ i>ar<. of fdf)eren/ p. 4ö. 
gefd)rieben/ ;?ar<. of fd^reiben/ p. 49 
gefebem par^. seen 
gefprocben/ part spöken to, met 
gejlanben/ from fle^n/ p. 4ö, Voc 

XXI. 
gejlern/ yesterday 
geftern 2Cbenb/ yesterday evening^ 

last night 
getban/ from tbun/ Voc. XXI. 
getreten/ from treten/ p. 45 
getrunfen/ ^r<. of tnnEen/ p. 61 
gewif/ certainly, surely 
geworben/ ^ar^. become, got, from 

merben 
gtebt/ from geben/ p. 45 
giebt/ eé/ there is, there are 
gingen/ imperf, of geljjen/ ging^ ge* 

gängen 
©låfer/ pL of ©laé/ n. glass, 

tumbler 



* The augment ge of the participle past, corresponding to the pre- 
positive particle 'y' in the early English, wiU be best illustrated by thé 
following lines taken at random from Chaucer: — 

There was the hart ywont to have his flight . • . 
When Hector was ybroaght, all fresh yslain, to Troy ; . . . 
Here t/wont answers to geivo^nt; ybroiight^ \si ^xqAj^N >iÄ.«!».>M* 
getbbtet or gefallen. 



110 



OERICAN ELEMENTÄRT GRAlOfAR. 



[app. m 



gHanhenr to believe, think 
oolben/ gold, of gold 
®åt^e/ (Goethe, the greatest poet 
of Germany (aee Appeiidix U.) 
QlÖcRiC^ happy 
gro^ p. 20, R. 17 
gut/ good (U^tt, oaa Befleti) 

f)QXb, adj, half 

«&anb// hand, ^/. ^&nbc/ p. 12 

<^onbfd)u^/ m. glove, ^. ^anh^ 

(idngen/ ^Atr^f j9«r«. pi, pres, of 

^angen/'^ ^tng/ gej^angetv to be 

hung upt 
^aué/ «. honse, jp/. •^ufer 
4)nnrici)/ m. Heniy (^en. .^mrid)éi^ 

dat. & occ. «f)eit)rici)/ or ^ein^ 

xidjcn) 
^etp/ hot 

i^emh^ n. shirt, p. 12, B. 9 
*!|)en:/ 7/2. gentleman, Kr. (maeter, 

or lord, see S3år), p^. ^nxn 
^^er^/ n, heart^ p. 12, B.. 9 
^nttf to-åskj 
l)ieU, imperf. of f)aUin (kf a), to 

hold, keep, p. 47 

fci)n>er l^altetv to be difficult, 
cause some trouble 
f)iiVf here 
^ierbleiben (^-X to step here, re- 

mam here 
(od)/ p. 20, B. 17 (f^bf)it, ber ij)6(l^fk) 
bofferv" to hope 
^fibfd^/ pretty 
J^&teipl, of ^t> ».hat 

3 

{l^t/ to her (dat. of the perMfud 

pronoun)f p. ^0 
3$r# p. 16, B. 11 
intf for in hem p. 71, Obe. 28 



m, p. 9, Voc III. 
i$tf present of cffcri/ p. 46, Voc 
XXL 

3 (CoTisonant) 

JCU tidv. yes, oertainly, surelyi p. 

64, Obs. 17 
Sa^r^ w. year, p^. Sa^re 
jeber; jjebe/ jebeé/ every, each, p. 14 
jemanifindef. pron, somebody (y«i. 

jlemanbeé/ <2a^. jemanbem) 
jcnent/ <fa^. of \tmxf p. 14 
jen«r/ m, p. 14, B. 10 
|eneé# n. p. 14, R 10 
\i^tf now, at present 
jung/ p. 20, B, 17 
2lunQe^ boé/ n. the young one, i.e. 

animal 
SungC/ betv fTt* the young feUow, 

i. e. boy 
jängfle/ superL of jjung/ p. 20, B. 17 

Ä 

J^aff^C/ m. eoffee 
^olb/ n. calf, pL ^Ålber 
falt/ p. 20, B. 17 
tam, from fommea/ p. 4>5 
^arl/ m. Charles 
Äagc//. cat 

Baufen/" to buy, purchase 
fein; p. 16, Voc. VI. 
^inb^ 91. ehild, ^. ^tnbec 

tiein, small, liUle 

^nabc/ m. boy, p/. ^naben 
^6ni9< m, king 

fran£/ ill, sick (poorly, ugmo^l) 
tuxhet, from fura, p. 20, B. 17 



la^, from liegeri/ p . 46 
ganbe, p. 69, Voc XXXL 
länge/ adv, long, a long time 
Idnget/from long/ p. 20, B. 17 



* Observe that the compoimd nonns take the gender and declension 
of their last component. 

t Must not be mistaken for ^ngeU/'' t)&ngte/ Qi^åXi^^U to häng up^ 
iMUach to; see j^, 44, Ob«. 14. 



AFP. III.] QEKMAN AKD ENGLISH VOCABULART. 



111 



loé/ from Icfen^ p. 45 

laflen (ie^ a), to let» leave, p. 47 

laufcn/"* to nm, p. 47 

lantf loud 

gcbcn/ w. life 

leben/" to live, b© alive 

Sctpgig/ 92. the town of Leipsic 

Sefftng/ a famous German fable- 

writer and poet (see App. IT.) 
lernen/^ to leam {must be distin- 

gtdshed from le^ren/" to teach) 
\t%t, last 
8eute/ pl. people (bic fieute< gen, 

ber ftcutc/ <^^. ben Seuten) 
£idS)t/ «. p. 28, Voc. XIII. 
lieb (eé ift mir), I am glad of it 
lieb/ dear, i. e. beloved 
lleber/ from lieb 
fiteb/ «. song, />^. IHeber 
lief en/ from laffen/ p. 47 
lobte/ praised 
£uft// air, atmosphere, jp/. gflfte 

g» 

madb^n/" to make, do 

SOidbdf)en/ ». (a diminuiive of 

SCftagb//. maid), girl, maiden 
ntci^/ p. 38 
matif peopLe, they, one, &c. p. 95, 

Obs. 41 
manå)tvt p. 14, B. 10 
^am, m, man, pl, SQ^ånnet and 

Seute 
SRarie//. Mary 

met)v, more (biel/ me^t/ am meiften) 
SKeile//. mile 
mein/ p. 16 
SKenfc§/ w. man (^/. bic SDlcnfdf)en/ 

men, mankind, people) 
mit, with, p. 70 
SDlonot/ wi. month, ^. SÄonate 
tnorgen/ adv, to-morrow 
SJiorgen^ m. moming 
möbe/ tired, sleepy 
SRutte*//. mother, p. 12 

nad^/ after, p. 70 

SftaéjlbaXt m, neighbour, p. 12 



ndcl)jl/ next 

ndd)flen/ sw^cr?. of na^e 

nod)fu(^en/ to lo(^ after, seareh 

after 
^aåiUf. night, jp^. 9(l&d)te 
Staber//, needle,^. 9labeln 
nabe/ near, dose, p. 20, K. 17 
nåper/ compar, of na^ 
9latton/ /. nation 
netn/ adv. no 
neu/ ne\7 
9leueé/ anything new 

nid)t/ not 

nid^t me^r/ no longer 

ntc^té/ nothing, not anything 

niemanb/ no one, nobody {gen, Xi\t» 

manbed/ daU niemanbem and 

niemanb) 

nod)/ still, yet 
nur/ only 

SRup//. nut,;)/. Stftjfe 
Slfiffc/ pl of Sfluf 



obfT/ or 

Dfen/ wi. stove, oren, ^. Cefen 
oft/ often, ofb npcm a time 
t>xiit\tm, nnde, |)A bie Onfet 



^aao «. pair, pl, 5>aate 

^an'é (^ow<m«ce *Pareece*), dty 

of Paris 
?)atte'nt/ »i. patient 
5)ferb/ n. horse, p/. 5>f«fbe 
plb^ltd)/ snddenly, all at onee 
$5be^ m. mob, common pec^le 

^reuf ifd)/ «4/* I*i?Mflian 
f)t:ofe|Tor/ m, professor, pl, ^xa» 
feffo'an 



jQual//. pain, torment, j?/. IQualen 
qudlen/ fid)/ to pla^e, i<st\a8t\&. 
onea^äi, \o -woxV ^cr^ >öax^ 



112 



GEBHAM ELEMKHTABT OBAUMAB, 



£app. dl 



St 

dtat^ m, advioe, ooandl 

ratben"* (te/ a), to counsel, advisa 

ffUitt «. right, p. 17, Voc VIL 

teidii^rich 

rcif/ pipe, p. 13 Voc V. 

rief/ imperf, of rufcn (k/ u), p. 47 

fftmOf tn. Ting, pl. StittQt 

Btoit m. ooaVp. 9l6cte 

rot^ p. 20, R. 17 

rufcn»» (te/ u), to call, p. 47 

ru^t)/* to rest, lepose 



€$a({)e//. affidr, matter 
faaen/" to say 
\afy from fetjen/ p. 45 
liegen fe^en/ to see anytlung lying 
on the table, the ground, the 
floor, &c. 

!äf / from ft^t)/ p. 45 
a^orf/ p. 20, R. 17 
Aeint/ from fdf)einen/ p. 49 
G(^ff/ n. ship, yessel 
Gd^tUer/ nezt to Göthe the greatest 

of Gherman poetfi (see App. IL) 
fcblu^ from f($laaen/ p. 47 
fc^milst/ from fd^melsen/ p. 44, 

Obs. 13 
fc^ott/ already 
fdb6n/ beautiful 
fAreiben/"* to write, p. 49 
®ci)Ul^/ m. shoe, pl. é(^U^e («ee the 
note to Zai) 

iå^waxi, bla^ p. 20, R. 17 
åftottf difficult, härd 

®^n)ejler//. sister, ^;. ©cftmejlern 
fci)KHeg/ frx>m fc^ioeigen/ p. 49 

(ej^r/ Tery 
ht/ since, p. 70 
fe|en/ ftd^/ to seat oneself, sit down 



fO/ BO, tllTLB 

fo f (etn ed/ #e. howerer small 
ék>tn/ m. 8on, 1^. @6tne 
kommet/ m. enimmer 
®onne//. snn 
^pattt m. crevioe, chink 
^paiVK^anOf m, walk, promeoade 
fpaiteren gepeiw to go for a walk, 
take a walk 

fpcad)/ from Spctåfnu p. 46 
jprec^n/'* to speak 
étah, m. BtaS, pi. ®t&be 
&tabt, /. town, city, pl. ©tdbtc 

(like 9lQd)t/ p. 12) 
ftanben/ from ffejeft/ Voc XXI. 
jlarb/ from fterben/ p. 46 
ftaxt, p. 20, R 17 
jtejen"* (o/ a)* to stånd, p. 46, 

Obs. 14 
®tube^/. sitting-poom 
®tå(if n. piece, pl, ®tåcfe 

fäf/ Bweet 

SE 

SSag/ w» day, pi. Me SSage* 

Sante//, aunt 

t^un/ t^at/ get^att/ to do, act 

S^ör//. door 

Sinte/ or JDtnte//. ink 

S^ifc^/ m. table 

Sod)ter//. datighter, p. 12, R. 8 

tobt/ dead 

ttageit/^ to bear, wear, p. 47 

tvatf from treteit/ p. 46 

Sugenb//. virtue 

U 

fiber/ över, p. 71 

fiberfegen(en«^.)|to traii8late,p. 6 
Ubt//. dock 
uni/ ^ep. about, for, p. 70 



* Tliis is one of the few masculines wbicb, contrary to the genen 
mle, do not inflect the Towel in the plural. In like manner : — Tia 
eel; "KvmfBrm; ®rab/ degree; «^uf/ hoof; «£)unb/ dog; ^fab/ path 
€f(pup/ Bhoe; étaar/ starli^ ; ®tof/ material ; ©trauf/ ostrich» &e. 



APP. III.J GERMAN AND £NGLISH VOCABULART. 



113 



um gU/ conj, in order that, to, p. 76 
unfcr/ p. 16 
unter^ under, p. 71 

SS 

S3atcr/ m, father, pL SSdtcr 
»crgangen/ from ocraeben/ p. 74, 

Voc. xxxnL 
oergnögt/ meny, joyful 

Än, } fr»"» »""'"»i' P- " 
oerftebetu oerfianb/ oerflanbett/ to 

nnderstand {insep. compound of 

ftc^cn), Voc. XXI. 
Dtel/ ac^j' & adv. much, many, a 

great deal, p. 29, Obs. 6 
S3ieteé/ n. many a thing, many 

things 
SSierteC «. quarter 
SSol!/ n. p. 10 
oon^ prep. of, from, p. 70 
»or {of place)j in front of, before 
»or (of iime), ago, since, p. 30, 

Voc XIV. 
»orgenommeti/ from »orne^meti/ 

p. 63, Voc. XXIX. 
»orfa^/ from öorfe^eti/ p. 61, Voc. 

xxvin. 

2B 

SBa^I//. choice 

n>ac{)fam/ 'watchfdl 

»a^r/true (SDSa^reé/ anythingtpue) 

SBanb//. waU, pl Södnbe 

iranbte/ from »enben/ p. 51 

VOCLnxif adv. when, at what time, 

p. 95, Obs. 42 
worum/ why 
kuaé/ p. 32 
aSaffcr/ «. water, pl. bte SBaffer/ 

ooUectively, baS ©cwSffer 
SS^e^/ w. road, way 
SBetn/ «w. wine, p^. SQScine 



tt)cife/ wise, prudont 

äSeife^ m. 8ag«i^ wise man (ein 

SBetfer/ a sage) 
SSJeife//. manner, mode 
n?ci^/ Mtrc^ |?cr«. «wy. ^e«. of 
/ wiffen/ p. 51 
weip/ white 
»dt/ far 
wem/ to whom 
»enig/ adj. & adv. little, few, p. 

29, Obs. 6 
mVf p. 32 
tpcrbe (as sign of the fnture tense), 

shall, will, p. 16 
romf)f worth 
Xokf adv. & conJ, how, as, like, 

p. 76 
tok mel (of price)f how mnch, (of 

time) what 
tt>ithttf adv. again, a second time* 
mi^slm, m. William 
»irb/ see »erbe 
SSirt^ö^aué/ n. tayem, inn, publio- 

house 
Wiffen/ p. 61 
IDO/ where 
83Sod)e//. woek 

XO0f)U well («ee also p. 45, Obs. 17) 
IDO^ncn/" to live, dwell 
tVOt)ntf liyes, dwells 
aSort, n. word, p. 61, Voc. XXVIU. 
tt?Önfd)en/'' to wish, desire 
JDÖrbe (a« ji^»» of the conditional 

or 8vhjunctwe\ would, should, 

p. 53, Obs. 16 

xow^iii from wiflen/ p. 61 

3 

5aHretc^/ numerons 

3«it//. time 

Beitung//. newspaper, paper 

JU/ to, at, on, p. 70 

JU v^aufC/ at home 

}Ufneben/ satisfied, contented 



* Must be distinguished from »iber/ ^ép. against. 



114 



GERMAN ELEMENTÄRT 6RAMMAR. 



pAPP. m. 



ENGLISH AND GERMAN VOCABULAEY, 

( Suppfementary.) 



TO BE USED WITH THE ENGLISH EXERCISES. 



a, an, p. 8 

a little, adv. etn menig ; aéy. ein 
biéc^en/ or tin mn\% 

able, to be, p. 38 

across (the riyer), jenfettö (ufith a 

ffenitive)t öber (with a doHve) 
advise, to, ratten/ vktf)t gerat^en 

(with a dative of person) 

aflfair, @ad)e//., TCngeleöenécit/* /, 
after, nad)<j). 70 
aftemoon, 9ca(f)mtttag/" m, 

this aftemoon, Voc XIX. 
again, a second time, toteber/ sep. 

particle ; against, n)tbet> p. 70 
ago, ootT/ Voc. XIV. p. 30 
air, euft//, pl, gfiftc- 

all, m. ailevf f. aUe/ n. aUii, pl. aUe 
all night,bte qaiiK^aåit, ben gängen 

2(benb 
all the, or the whole, bet/ btC/ or 

bai aan^e 
allowed, to be, p. 36 
always, immer 
Amelia, 2Cmalte//. 
America^ 2Cmen{a/ n. 
animal, Z^itct n., pl. S^ierc"' 
answer, 2CntW0rt/*/. 

answer, to, antworten/'^ awiebern/" 

i^ur Unttoovt geben 
any, not (i.e. none) fetn/ or feuieo 

hinct !etneé 

any longer, nod) länger 



any more, p. 34, Voc. XVL 
äpple, Äpfcl/ «*., pl. Äcpfrl*» 
appioye of, to, p. 24, VocXXXHL 
are there? gtebt ed bO/ or ftnb 

(Jtartoffeln) ba? 
amve, to, anfommen"^ (tep, a# o) 
artist, J^änfUer^ m^ {printer) 

as ... as, p. 76 

ashamed, to feel, or to be, ft4 

fci)åmen/ p. 62 
ask, to (i. e. requestX bttten** 
ask, to, ftragen* (the question ifl^ 

eö fcagt fid)), p. 66 
at (at the honse of, &«.), bev pi^ 

with adat. 

aunt, ZanUf^f. (tSta^mtf Skfe ■» 

almost out of date) 
away, fort/ Wt^ sep, parHeU 



B 

bad, fd^Ie^t 

ball,S3aU,ffi..i)f.»&lD[e-* 
baron, S^ron/"* m., SreC^ecT/* m. 
baioness, bie SSoroneffer gftei^an* 
basketfol, ^ocbOoQr m. 
a basketfol o^ etn/ or etneii/ Jtorb 
t)oUer/ or t)oU 
be, to, fcin 
beam, p. 12, R. 9 
bear, Sdr^ m. p. 9 
beautifol, fci)bn 



* This is one of the few mascnlines in el which inflect the rowel in 
the plural. In like manner: — ^amiMlt wether; »^anbel/ tnide^ 
bargain,^/. ^ånbel/ quarrels ; ®aUil, saddle; SSogfl/ bird; ^ang/Ar 
defect ; manUlf cloak; 9label/ navel ; @d)nabeö beak. 



APP. III.J ENQLISH AND GERMAN VOCABULART. 



115 



become, inf, »crbcn/i?ar^. Qetwrben 
I have become, i(^ bin geworben 

become of one, to, tperben OUÖ . . . 
bed, p. 12, R. 9 
beer, SSiet/ «., i>^. SSiew"* 
before (ago), t)OC 

before (in fh>nt of), prep. oot/ p. 71 
before, conj. e^e/ beioor/ p. 76 
beggar, SScttlCT/^ w». 
believe, to, glauben'» 
belongs, 0e66rt 
best, the, bet/ bte/ or baé befle (om 

beflen) 
better, bcfler (compar, of gut) 
better in <to like better,' Ueber 

tnftgen/ »orgtci^en'* («cp.) 
bird, SSogel/ m., jp^. SSågel (we 

äpple) 
bonnet, or hat, ^ut/ m., pL ^äte** 
book, äud^/ n., pl. IBöc^er** 
botde, glafc^e/"/. 
bought^ part gefauft 
boy, Änabe/ w., pL Änaben** 
bread, IBrot/ or IBroiv n., p?. 

aSrotc'*! 
bring, to, inf, brinaen/ p. 61 
brin^ [you], tmp. bringm €Sle (me, 

tntr) 
brother, JBrubet/ w., |rf. SBråbcr •• 

{see fatber) 
brought» part. gebtac^ 
bnt, aber 

butter, aSuttCT/"/. 
bny, to, faufen'' 
by {in frequented by, cmirounded 

by, &c.), »on 
by tbe ponnd, yaid, dozen, &c. p. 

56, fb^ercifie 51 



Gsesar, @&far 

call, to, rufen/'* p. 47 

cannot, tanxi nirt)!/ p. 38 (bin nid)t 

im ©tanbc) 
castle, @d)lof/ «., p/. ©ciiWjfer'*^ 
certain, gewtf 
Charles, ^arlj Charles I. ^orl 

ber @rftc 
cheese, SCå\tt ^* {decline like SSad)) 
child, Äinbf w., jp^. Äinber" (see 

aieo eastle) 
ooat, SlocE/ w., ;?/. Slécfe*' 
coffee, Äaffee^'* m, 
cold, colder, &c. p. 20, B. i 7 
oome, to, lommen/'* j^Z. 45 
come home, to, nad) |iau{e !ommen# 

5u «&aufe anlangen 
eontented, jufneben 
eost, to, feftcn " 
could, pp. 38, 79 
countr^, ganb/"* «. (p^. ^nbciv 

distmct countries; ^. Sanbe/ in- 

definite parts of the globe) 

in the conntry. Ex. 39 
coiisin,wi. @oufin/ SJcttcr/"*/. ^ou» 

fine" 
cup, ZoL^trf (saucer, Untcrtafie) 



D 

daughter, p. 12, B. 8 
day, Äag/ «., ^/. Sage^ 
by the day, tagemeife 
day befoDe yesterday, ijorgejletn ^ 
deal, agpeat deal, fe^r t)iet iiemltct 

otel 



* One of the masculines in e belonging to the weak declension, as: — 
Sote/ messenger; «^afe/ hare; «^etbe/ heathen; £5n)e/ lion; Zia^Oi» 
xaven, &c 

t Not *S3t5te,' as the common peo]^ say. In like manner*.— -toé 
®Aaf/ the sheep, pl ©d^afe, baé Sa^tV the year, ^. Sa^rc. 

I The principal neuter nonns which take et in the plural, and inflect 
the vowels a, 0/ U/ aU/are: — S5ilb/image; SBlott/ leaf ^ S3rett> boar*».; 
IBud^/book; ^ac^/roof; X)orf/ village; @i/ egg; ©elb/money; ©laS/ 
glass; «|)aud/ house; ^alb/ calf; $inb/ child; ^(etb/ dress; Sant/ 
coantry; Cid^t/ light; SDJann/ man ; Ort/ ^lace; @d()lof'/ lock, castle ; 
S^aO dale, valley ; Åud)/ doth ; 9Sol?f nation ; SSe\fe| ^orcoass.*^ *&^'ö«» 
.vondt&c 

12 



116 



GERMAN ELEMENTÄRT 6RAMHAB. [aPP. III. 



dear {of price), t^euer 

dear (f/ it means beloved), lieb/ or 

decide, to, ftd^ entfd^etben/"* ftdj) enU 

fd^liefcn"* 
depart, to, abreifen" (f.) 

I have departed, iå) bin obge* 
reifi) I shall have departed, 
iå) njcrte abgereijl fcin 
desire, to, månfc^cn" 
did, 8ce do* 

did come, or have come, p. 16 
died, he died (third pers, per/.), ifl 

aejlorben 
difficult, fd^wcT/ fcftwierig 
dinner, SWittagécITen/'* n. 
do, auxUiary* 

do, to, ti^un'* (ti^at> getjan)/ ^an^! 
beln" 

doctor.physician, 35octor/ 2frjt/** w. 

dog, «|>unb/ m., pl. «|>unbc'* 

dollar, p. 28, Voc. XUI. 

don't, for do not it» eö nid^t/ and 

the present tense of the verb * 
door, Z\)txrf 
dozen, JDulenb/** «. 

by the dozen, nad) bem jDu|enb^ 
or bu^cnbweife 
dress, 2(nut9/ m.,p/. ^Cnjöge i ^leib/ 

«., p/. Äleiber"* 
drive, to, fa^rcn^** p. 47 



E 



early, ftö^ 
eartii, ©rbC/" /. 
easy, lcid)t 



eat, to, cffcn/ of/ gcyflfen" 
iVe«. i(^ ef[e/ btt tpt/ er tf t> xovc 
eflcn/ #c. 

egg, @v n, (see castle) 

eldest, superi, of oid, p. 20 

enemy, gcinb/"* f». 

England, (Snglanb/ n., gen. Gng» 
lanbd 

Englishman, Sngl&nbet/^ m. 

Englishwoman, Sngl&nberin/*/. 

enongh, genug 

erening, Xbenb/** m. 

every, p. 14, K. 10 

eyeryone, ein jcba 



fair, éw?;. fd^bn 

feir, ««*«<. Sa^nnorft/^ «. T 
faithfnlly, treulid)/ getteu/ tebUd) 
far, mitt hd mittm 
farmer, Hnhmann^m. (for S3au(ti 

«ee p. 12, B. 9) 
father, SSater/ m.,pl. JBdtcr-^J 
feel ashamed, to, \lå^ fdb&men ^ 

I oiight to iféel ashamed, i4 
foUte miåi fd)&men/ i(^ ^tte 
mi(^ fd)ämen foUen 
fetched, gc^olt/ par<. of ^olen* 
few, p. 29, Obs. 6 
few (i. e. a few) eimge/ etUdb^ 
find, to, flnben^** p. 51 (see aUo fcfwaå) 
fine (i. e. beantiM, excellent), fd)50i 

auégejetd^net/ oortrefflidb 
fine (i. e. fine in textnre), ffin 
fire, geitet/»* n. 



fish, gifd^^** fn. 
flower, S5lume/*/. 
footman, S3ebiente/' 



9». 



* i>o, doeSf did are not translated if expressing the English emphatie 
and compound tenses. * I do hear,* * he does hear * are rendered by the 
present, as, * idj l)6re,* * er t)6rt ; ' * I did hear,* by the perfect or imper- 
fect, as, ' id) babe ge^brt,' * id) i^btte: See p. 36, R. 28 & 29. 
t A large fair, like the famous Leipsic fair, is termed ^effe^ f, 
} This is one of the few masculines in er which inflect the vowel in 
tbe plural; fchus :— 2Ccfer/ field; SBtuUXt \)xoO=^et\ *§ammco hammer; 
^c^ttfaget/ brother-in-law. 



APP. III.] ENGLISH AND GERMAN VOCABULARY. 



117 



ffev p. 70 

for a minute, auf etne ^nute 

for dinper, jum SRittagéejTen 
forest, SBolb^ m.,pl, SB&lber"** 
forget, «w/. wrgejlcn/"* p. 4ö 
forgotten, ^r<. oergeffen 
found, part. aefunbeiv p. 61 
found ; wouldf be found, ttJÅrbe ge* 

funbenmerben 

bas been found, j)at jtd) ge^ 

fimben 

Prench, adj. granj5flf(% 

Frencb (the French langaage), ha^ 

%tanmWf V' 25, B. 22 
friend, greunb/"* 7»., SJreunbinr/. t 

from, 9011/ p. 70 

fruit (as appleSf pearSf pluTns, &e.), 

Obfl/-* «., pl. bte Dbjlarten'' 
fruit in genera], yegetables, &c. 

gntd)t> /., pL bie grfld^te^'» the 

crops 



G 



garden, ®artf n/ w., |>/. ®drtcn"* J 
gardener, ©drtnet/" wi. 
gentleman, ^ert/* 9»., jp^. bie «{)crrcn 
German, Oé^. ^eutfd) 
Germany, JDeutfci)(anb/ n., ye«. 

)Deutfd)Ianbö/ p. 18, B. 15 
^rl, 3»db(^|cn/«* n, p. 10, R. 6 (pt. 

bie ^dbd^en ; ^A^ c^immef^tt^ of 

sQtagb/ maid) 
give, ««/: geben (^aht aegeben), p.46 
give [you], imp» ge ben ©iei or 

gebt i 



I 



given, part gegeben 

glad, to be, fid) freuen/ froft fein 

glass, ®laé/ »., jp^. ®ldfer»* (s^* 

castle) 
glove, ^anbfcf)ub/"* ««., 1?^. *&anbs: 

fd)U?)e§ 
go, to, gefjen (ging/ gegangen), p. 

47, Vol. XXII. 
go, to (i. e. to leave, go away), fort* 

ge^cn/ »eggenen (sep.X ge^en'* 
go for a walk, to, einen ^pajievgang 

mad)en/ aué bem .£>aufe gebep 
go home, to, naö) .f>aufe ge ven 
go out, to, aué^e^cn/ fpajieren gc^n^ 

einen ^pa^tergang mad)en 

going, we are, tr. we go 

going to (w generjally rmdered by 

the fvture ; «ee a^o p. 40, 6) 
gold, adj, golben 
good, gut 

great» p. 20, R. 17 
great manj, tr. very many 
groschen, p. 28, Yoc. XILL 

H 

had, p. 36 
half, adj, ^alb 
anbert(;al6/ one and a half; 
britte^alb/ two and a half 
ham, ©d^infen/'* m. 
happiest, p. 20, E, 16 

iiappy» glucf (id^ 

härd, p. 20, R. 17 

hardly, faum 

hat, ^ut/ w., ph »^öte" 



* The other masculines which add et/ and inflect the vowel in the 

Eltuml, are: — %zi% spirit; ©ott^ God; SetW body; fOlann/ man; 0ianb< 
rink; ^onnunb/ guardian ; SBumi/ wonn. 

' t Kotice that the ending in is almost inyariably nsed in deriving 
common nouns which denote female persons, as, ©rdftn/ ^reunbtn/ from 
the nouns which denote male persons, as, ^raf/ ^reunb. In many in- 
Btances the vowel is inflected. 

X This is one of the few masculines in en which inflect the vo^^K 
thus c—IBoben/ bottom ; fiaben/ shop ; ©tabexv» d\tc&L-, %^\^'^^ ^-sf^N ^^3^^% 
öven, fltove ; @cl|)aben/ damÄge ; gabeUi tlueesA. ^ Xea.^Ca 

I In eompounds tbe second component <ynly \a ^^c^MiÄ. «sä."cö^ö* 
geuder. 



118 



GEHMAN ELEMENTÄRT GRAMMAR. 



[afp. IIL 



hear, to, l^ören/ p. 43 

Herny, see ^nrid) 

bere, l^tet (sometimes ha) 

hers, p. 22, Obs. 2 and 3 

high, p. 20, R. 17 

bim, p. 30 

bis, p. 15 

bome, to come bome, ju «^attfe/ or, 

better, nad) «|>aufe/ fommen 
honest, c^rlic^/ aufric^tig^ vtdjU 

f*affen 
borse, 5)ferb/ «., pl, ^fcrbe** 
botel, ®a|l^aué/ «.,^/. ®a|l^dufer 5** 

®aMof/ «»., ;>/. ®afl^6fc"* {see 

glove) 
bour, ©tunbC/"/. 
bouse, .f)aué^"* ». (/or <Ä« plural 

see castle) 
bow, xoit ) bow mucb, ime otel 



ice, @ié/'* «. 

if, wenii/ p. 76 

ill, franf? unmot)!/ unp&f lid) 

in, in/ p. 9, Voc. IIL 

iiytirious, fd)db(id) 

ink, J)inte/ or ZinUrf- 

insect, 3nfcct/ n., ^. Snfectttt/ p. 12 

mto, inj into the, tn'é/ p. 71 

it> 7». er//, fie^ «. (g 



just, etern foeben 

K 

keep, to, galten'* (ie/ a) 
kind, mit/ gfitiö/ freunblid^ 
king, Äbnio/ w., j?/. Äbnige"* 
knife, SRe|fer,»» «.,i>/. bie 2Äeffer 
know, to, p. 51 

to know well, eS Qut genug 
»iffen 



lady, ^merf'f pi- bk jDamm 

large, p. 20, R. 17 

last, oergangeR/ oortO/ le^t 

last eyening, geftal Äbenb 

late, fp&t 

leam, to, lemeR/* p. 88 

lend, to, letl^'* (i^ tf), ftie fd^xei» 

betvp.49 
letter, Sriefr"» «i., p^. »ne fe 
life, geben/* n., ii. bie Eeben 
ligbt, p. 28, Voc Xin. 
lighten, to, btt|en* 
like, conj, roiif p. 76 
like, to (of eatables, 4^.), m6ge«/. 

gern efTen/ nad^ bem ®efd^ma(£f 
fein^ p. 38 
like, to {of persons and tkinjfs), 

leiben mb^n, gem ^abcn 
like mncb, to {of eaiabUst fe), gern 

magen 
like mncb, to, lieb f^aUn, fe^ ltebeR# 

gern teiben mdgen 
like to take a valk, to, gem fpo^icren . 

ge^en 
Uon, see hoj 
little, fiein 
little, meniga thusr little monej, 

menig ®elb/ p. 29, Obs. 6 
little (i. e. a Httle}, adv. tia toem^ 

aéy, etn bidd^en/ ein totxdq 
Ii ve, to be aliye, leben* 
live, i. e. to dwdl, too^nen • 
loaf , see biead 
loug, lang/ p. 20, B. 17 
look, to, auéfe^^en'* {sep.) 
lose, to, »erliercn» (O/ o) 
löst, part, oerlocen 

M 

madam, SÄabant/ /., SRamfeDf/.* 
maintain, to, bebaupten* 



* The first applies to married, the second to nnmamed, women. 
Tbese terms are now only nsed among the lower classes. In good 
society a married lady is addressed by ^vavi/ and a yotma lady by 
gr&ulein. If you talk of a lady, you speak of ber as bie X)amc> tat 
»r&ulein. 



AFP. III.] ENQLISH AND GERMAN YOCABULART. 



119 



make, imper, t/ing. mad^ ! fl. mad^n 

®te/ or mac^t! 
make, to, madbétl'' 
make a mistake, to,ft(l^ t)eitei()en/ etn 

SSerfe^n mad^en 
man,§0^ann/ m., i?^. ^Annet/^ men, 

j>^ I^Ute/ people (««e also forest) 
many, pl. of much 
mastei, S^ectr m* (teacher, Se^rer/** 

m.) 
xnay, to, lönnen/ bfirfen/ p. 38 
me, p. 30 
meat, gletfd)/^ n. 
merchantk p. 84, Voo. XVI. 
miH SReiU/"/. 
milk, sRttc^,»/. 
mine, p. 20, Obs. 2 & 3 
minuto, SRinute/"/. 
Hiss, St&uletn/** n., ^;. bie ^&U:s 

letn (the diminntiye of ]^au/ 

Mrs.)* 
Aoney, m0 castle 
nore, mc^rf 
xnonung, SRorgcn^"* w. 

this moming, ^eute SJtorgen 
moital, fterblt<$ 
mother, p. 12, R. 8 
mountcoD, IBerg/"* 9». 

N 

near, p. 20, B. 17 

neighboor, p. 12 

neither . . . nor, webet . . . nod)/ p. 

67 
never, ntC/ ntemalö 
new, neu} 
nezt, n&(^fl 

next, auperl, of na^e/ near 
next door, nebenan 
nioe, b^bfd!)/ meblidt) 
niece, 9lid)tC//., SJenöanbte/*/. 
night, 2Cbcnb/* w., 9'lad)t/''/. 
no, {ein/ leine/ Cetn# p. 15, K. 11 
no, adv, netn 



nobleman, @belmonn/^ m, (see p. 90) 

none, feinet/ !etne/ leinö 

not^ nid)t 

noUiing, ntd^té 

now, \t^t, nun/ degenm&ttid 

nnmerons, ^ablteid) 

O 

of, t)on/ p. 70 

old, p. 20, R. 17 

on, upon, aixff p. 71 

on the, am//or an bcnt/ p. 71, Obs. 

28 
once, adv. etnmal/ etnfl 
one, numeral adj. ein^ ber/ bic/ baé 

etne^ etnet/ eine/ eind (p. 14, R. 

10 ; p. 27) 
one, indef, pron, man/ p. 95, Obs. 

41 
one of those, einer t>on benen 
only, nur 

open, adj. or verb, p. 94, Obs. 39 
order, to, befel^len ■* (befabl/ befo^Ien) 
onght, p. 40 

I onght to have, id) f)ktt folien 
our, p. 15, R. 11 
out of, aué/ p. 70 
ont of town, auf er^alb (with aye».), 

p. 70 
oren, see garden 



pair, |>aar/ n., pl. ^aate 
paper, newspaper, ^titnnOff. 
passage (in a book), @teUe//. 

auf ber ^UVLet on the spöt 
pay attention, jubbren (sep.), p. 67 
pear, aSirne/"/. 
pen, geber//., pl bic gcbern 
people, pl. nom. h\Z Seute^ gen. ber 

gente/ dat. ben Seuten/ acc. bie 

Seute 

picture, SBilb/^ n. (see castle) 



* In answering, or addressing, a lady, the Germans say mein 
St&uUin« 

t More, as sign of the comparative, is not translated. 

X If nsed of butter, milk, bread, eggs, &e. it is rendered by fri(d\ ; i£ 
nsed of Tegetables, potatoes, &o. by iltn^,' 



120 



-GERMAK ELEMENTART 6RÄMMAR« 



[app, m. 



piece, ©tfirf/" n^ pl, btC ^töcfe 

please, imper. bitte! 

please, jef&UtGft/ göttgft 

please (i.e. if you please), toenn i(^ 

bttten barf/ totnn ed S^nen Qe^ 

fålltg ifb n>enn ®te fo gättg fem 

»oUen 
pleasure, SJer^nögen/'* n. 
poor, p. 20, K. 17 
poBsible, mådltd) 
potato, Äartojfel/"/.» 
pound, 5>funb/«* n. 
praise, to, loben" 
pray, imjfer, bitte I 
pray, to, hitUn '* (bat/ öebeten) 
pretty, ^öbfd)/ nieblicb 
price (i. e. value), ^reié/ m., SBectJ/" 

m, 
professor, ^^wfeffot/ w., ^. ^tos 

fefii/ren, p. 12, E. 9 
propérty, SSermbgen/'* n.f 
pnident, !(ug 
rrussian, o^;. $reuf ifd^ 

Q 

quarter, p. 28, Voc. XIII. 

a quarter to, ein S3iertel auf 
quiet, ru^ig 

to be quiet, ruljjig fein/ fid^ rulj^ig 
t)er^alten 
quite, ganj 

H 

railway-station, IBa^tl^of/ m., 2^. 

a3a^^6fe«» 
rain, to^ regnen/" p. 65 
reåd, to, lefen'* (toé/ cjelefen^ pres. 

Oj lefe/ bu (tefi/ er ttefl/ »ir lefen^ 

#c.) 



really, »trfUd) 

receive, to, eri^atten/ er^elt/ ett)aU 

teni empfängen/ empflng/ em* 

pfangen (vulg, frte^en) 

remain here, l^ierbletben"* (xtt Xtt 

tep.) 
rich, reid) (wealthy, wo^l^aUnh) 
ride, to (in a carriage), fa^en^^ 

p.'^9 
ride, to (on horseback), reiten/*^ p> 

47 
right, to be, Sled)t Jabctt/ Voc VIL 
ripe, retf/ p. 13, Voc. V. 
river, g(up/«* «*., pL glöfle 
roast meat, gebrateneö Sléifdj)/ n^ or 

SSraten/"* w». 
roast-beef, 9{tnberbraten# ar SltnbJ» 

bråten/"» m. 
room, äimmer/»» n. 



S 

said, part gefagt 
satisfied, iufrieben 
Saturday, ©onnabenb/ m. 

on Saturday, am ^onnabenb^ 
or ©onnobenb 
say, to, fagen/ fagte/ gefagt" J 
scholar, @cl)öler/ m., Bogling/'* «». 
see, fe^en"* (a, e), p. 46 
see again, mieberfe^n*» (sep.) 
seen, part. gefe^en 
sell, öerfattfen" 
send, to, fd)icfen/" fenben/» p. 62, 

Voc. XXIV. 
send for, to (used both of person» 

and things), bolen laffen 4 (tfMe2 

of persons only) rufen latfen 
servant {\. e. man-servant) J^ned^t** 

«*., 2)ten|lbote/"?Ä., S3ebiente/"ffi. 



* Other feminines in el are : — IBibel/ bible ; ®abel/ fork ; Snfel, 
Island; ^uget/ ball, globe; 9labe(/ needle; @d)a^tel/ box; @ci)äftfl. 
dish ; SBurjel/ root, &c 

t This is one of the infinitive nonns whieh have almost löst their 
verbal meaning. Thus : 2(nfe^en/ n. authority ; 3)afein/ n. existence ; 
@ljen/ n, eating, meal; SSerfe^en/ n, mistake; äSefem n, being, cha- 
racter. 

X * Say' anything in reply may be rendered by jur 2Cnt»ort geben/ «f 

antwotteru 



APP. II1.J ENGLISH AND GERMAN VOCABULART. 



121 



8er7ant(ie.maid-seryaiit), ^agb/"* 
/, 2)ienjbndbd)en/»* n. 

seyeral, p. 29, Obs. 6 

•hall (as siffn of the futti/re\ vi^ 
)9erbe« bu mirfl/ er xovtt, xoxc 
nrerbett/ t^r n>erber/ [te merben/ 

p. 16 
flhalli inf. {auxUiary ofmood\ foUen/ 
p. 40 

ship, @(i)iff/«* «., 'pl, bie ©d^iffc 

shirt, p. 12, K. 9 
Bhoe, ©d^u^/"* w., ;?/. @(f)U^e * 
shoemaker, @d)U^mod)er/'* m. 
Bhop, Saben/'* wi., jp/. 8&ben (i>^. 

Saben signjfiea shutters) 
shoiild {08 sign of the conditional 

OT sMunctivé)f id) wörbc/ bu 

wflrbeflf/ er wörbe/ wir wörben/ il^r 

n^rbet/ fte mörben< p.5d, Obs. 16 
since, fett/ feitbem 
Sip, mein ^errl (if a friend) mein 

greunb! 
sistep, Bd)XOi^zxrf,pL ©c^wejlern/ 

p. 9, B. 3 
small, llein/ unbebeutenb 
Bnow, to, p. 65 
snow, subst, ^djXitt/ m, 
■o,fo 

Böld, part of sell 
some luelc^er/ Voc. XVL 
some ooe, jemanb/ gen. jemanbeé/ 

dat, jemanbem/ or jemanb 
son, @o^n/»* w., j?^. éå^ne 
Boon, balb 

speak, fprecften** (o/ o), p. 46 
speak to, fpred^n mit 
epoken, part, 0efprod)en 
stånd, to, fie^en/ jlanb/ geflanben"* 

(f.) 
8tay, to, Weiben/ blteb/ gebiteben/'* 

p. 49 
Btay at home, to, ju «{)aufe bleiben 
Btay out, if\f, auéWeibcn'* (stp.) 
stick, @toct/"» ^.,i?/. @t5cte 



still, conj. hoå)f bejfenun9ead)tet/ p. 

68 1 
still, adv, nod) 
strong, p. 20, R. 17 
Street, ©trafe^/* 

in the street, auf ber ©traf e 
summer, ©ommer/ w."* 
sure {to be used affirmativd^), ja 

»0^1/ gonj gewtf 
sure ; I am sure of it, iå^ bin (bet 

@ad)e) ganj gewifo or fid)er 
surely, oc^v. ftc^er/ gewif lic^/ wa^^ 

Saftig 
sun, ©onne//." 

T 

table, Sifd^/"* w., pl Sifd)e 

take a drive, to, or go out for a 

driye, auéfa(}ren/ fpo^ieren fa^ 

ren'* {sep.; see p. 88, Obs. 36) 
take a drive, to {to a place), \)infi 

fa^ren nad)»* {sep.) 
take a walk, to, fpajieren ge6cn# 

einen ^pajiergang mad)en 
take care of oneself, to, \iå) fcftonen** 
take the liberty, p. 63, Voc XXIX. 

talk, to, reben/" fprecften'* J 

tall,grof/p. 20,R. 17 

tea, ä^ee/* m. {pl, hk Sljeeforten/ 

kinds of tea) 
teach, le^ren/' p. 88 
tell, wf fagen" (reläte, erjd^len'^) 
tell, imper. sing. foge I pl. fogen 

éiel orfagtl 
than, p. 20, R. 18 
thank, inf. ban!en (banfte/ gebanttj 

with a dative of person) 
thank (you), imper, banfei or 

banfe S^nen I , 

that, demonstrative, n, hai/ bieé/ 

biefeé/ p. 14 
that, rdative^ p. 33 
that, conj. ba^ 



* This is one of the few masculines of one syllable which, contrary 
to Rule 6, page 10, do not inflect the voweL 
t For bO(^ see also page 54, Obs. 17, 
' X @(||n>a(en* is nsed of a person vho t&IkA o^«t-T!iAf^ 



122 



GEBMAK ELESCENTABY ORAMMAB. 



[app. UL 



that which, hait toa^ p. 73 

them, p. 30, f[e 

there, ba/ boct 

there (exdamaiion), fte^ ba ! fe^tl 

®te! 
there are, or there is, Cé fiiebt/ or 

eö gibt* 
think, to ^i. e. believe), glauben" 
think of It, to, bown UnUxu p. 76 
think, to, bmhtit p. 61 
think oneself for, to, fidj) ^)altcn för 
thlB, p. 14 
time, 3eit//. p. 9 
tired, mube 
to {before the infinitive of verbs), 

au 

to, prep. (before the natnes of tovms, 
eountries, ^c, indicating direc- 
tion to a place), må) {dat.), 
p.70 
to, prep. {before numerals indicating 
the time), auf^ p. 71; thua, *to 
three,* auf breif 
to-day, ^cute 
to-morrow, morgen 
to-night, ^ute 2Cbenb/ bfefen 2Cbenb 
told, ^ar^. gefagt/ erjd^lt 
too, oif <;. gu (ir i^ meam also, like- 

wise, au(^/ ebenfoUé) 
tooth, 3a§n/^ f»., ©/. 3&5nc 
town, @tabt//.,^. @t&bte t 
tradesman, p. 34, Voc XVt 
travel, to, rctfen/* rcifte/ öereifl (f.) 
tree, SSaum/"* m.^pl. S3&ume 



U 



nmbrella, Stegcnfc^irm/"' w. 
tmde, £)n!el>** m. 
under, unteT/ p. 71 
onderstand, to, öerjte^en/ t)cr|lanb/ 

öerftanben"* {ineep. compound of 

fie^en) 



nnfortnnate, unglöcflu^ 
npon, auf/ p. 71 
ns, p. 30 



very, fe^)r 

viUage, 2)orf/«» «., |rf. JDkfcr (i 
casUe) 



W 

wait, to, »arten'' 
wait for, to, wartcu" auf 
walk, to, ae^en/^ fpajicrcn geben 
wall : a detached waU, a waU sur* 
rounding a toton, garden, orjidd, 
is tenned ^Sftauetf f, pl. bu 

wall: in speaking of the toatts of a 
hottse, espedaUy of the inner 
tvalls, of a partitum, of the sur- 
face of a wall, you must use 

^anb//., pl, fEB&nbe 

-wall. in speaking of earthworkSt 

fortificaiions, cf^c. you must 

fS^aVifm.,pl.mhViz 
want, to (i. e. to have need 

braud^n {wUh an aec.), fe^I 

(with a dat, of person) 
want: do you want? ^0. tooQén 

®te ^aben ? or »önf^ien &te a» 

^aben?#c. 
want: what do jon want?.n>a$ 

moOen^te? p. 40 

warm, p. 20, B. 17 

was, p. 36 

watch, aafd)€nu^t>/ (Utpcf dock) 

water, ^aflet>»Mj^* bte XSajfer^ 

{coUectively baé ®e)oäffer) 
way, road, SBeg/"* m, 
weak, p. 20, R. 17 
wear, to, traden/** p. 47 



of 



* ^a is often added, as, e$ gtebt ha, 
t 3u is seldom used ; see p. 28, £z. 26, b, sent. 6. 
/ Tbe pnndpal feminine nonns of the mixed dedension wfaich inflect 
Äfte rowel in the plural are :— S5anl# bench-, ^wÄjtilroal-, ^t(.i, ^ose ; 
4>antf band; Stu^, cow; gup> air; sjjtadjti w>^«t;^a9ö&|TöMA*3.^i^\, 
ai^ht; 9lup, n^; ^toSoti town ; IBanbi inSl, 



n.] 



ENGLISH AND OEKMAN VOGABULART, 



12S 



r, SBctter/ n. 

fS^tr /. 

0^1/ gut/ p. 64, Obs. 17 

low a thing well, ttmai gut 

mq wtffen 

^ay, see go away 

hey, jic »aren 

, »a« för tin, wa$ för einer * 

)p, or for what, p. 37, 6. 

'dock? wic mel U^r? 

o^v. (i. e, at what time), 

1/ p. 96 

xmf, (i. e. at the time when, 

wä hy the imferf. or plu- 

) al$f ha, p. 76 

wnj, (i. e. at a fdture time 

XfjoUowed by the present or 

•v), wenn/ p. 76 

mo 

>, p. 73, B. 37, 6. 

r, p. 78 

interroyaiitfe, p. 14, B. 10 

er/ mel(l)er> pp. 32 and 33 

a4f- 9an5 

^hole, Uxt b!e/ or baé ganje 

[is either aec, or dat,\ intet' 

Htfe, p. 32 ; reiative, p. 83 

arum 

rau/j/., !>/. bie grauen '^ t 
w 8iyn of the future), idi 
Zt bu wirfi/ er wirb/ ^. p. 

ney^^t^re, p. 16 
re, ftUvret p. 16 



William, 2BiH)elm 

wind, SBinb/* m. 

window, §en|leo"» n,,jil, bie genflcr 

wine, SBein/"* m, 

winter, SBinter/"* m^ 

wise, meife/ !lua 

wish, to, njönf^n/" p. 84 

without, o^ne 

woman, grau/ /., p/. bie granen " t 

wool, SBoUe/'/. 

wopk, Tfrbeit/"/. 

wori[, to, arbeiten/ arbeitete/ gear^ 

would, »ottte/ p. 40 

would (as sign of the oonditional 

or subjtmctiye), mörbe/ p. 63, 

Obs. 16 
write, to, fd)reiben/»* p. 49 
WTong, to be, p. 17i Voc VIL 



yeap, Sci^r/»» n., pl, Sci^re {see also 

bread) 
yestepday, geftem 
yet, nod) 4 not yet, noå) n{d)t 
yon, p. 30 
younff lady, gråuleini* «., pl, bie 

graulein {dminutive of grau/ /. 

woman) 
your, p. 16, B. 11 
youTS, p. 22, Obs. 2 and 3 
yonrself, p. 30 



nsed in exclamations, or in questions, when the answer is leqnired 
t ont the spedes or kind, the condition of a person or thing, the 
', &c.; as, roat för em ^ferb ? Before nouns in the plnial, and 
which denote a substance or material, toa^ för is nsed. SQSaé för 
^aö för IBödier ? 

be woid fSkihf n, womanf wife (pl. fBkiber/ toomen), occnrs mor© 
ical and dramatic language. In common language it is freqnently 
>ntemptuonaIy. 



124 <}EBHAN ELEMENTABY GRAlfXAR. [aPP. IV. 



APPENMX IV. 

KET TO THE DECLENSIONS OF NOUNS. 

The ierma IV^eak and Strong: which have replaced the former 
appellations, regrnlar and Irregrular, suggeated thefnselves to the 
master-mind of the great grammarian Jacob Gbimm. 2%ey are eha- 
racterised as ill-chosen and vague by some more recent philologists, who, 
however, neither offer nor suggeet anything hetter in their steady and etm 
votichsafe to retain the very terms they condemn, Ifvague^ it is their 
vagueness which renders them comprehensive. 

For the purpose of becoming acquainted with the mflectional ehanget 
of the German language^ they are invaltiable ; they enable us to divide 
the inflectiomd changes of all noiins, adjectives, and verbs into two gr^ 
comprehensive and distinct classeSf the weak (or modem) and stronff 
(op ancient) mode of infiection» 



The terms themsdves almost suggest their own meaning. 
Tneans : ftdnt, sllgrbt, not powerftU. Strong: sign%fies : taXL of 
force, powerftil. 

a. NowM of the strong: declension are suoh as have distlnettvo 
case-endingSf marking almost every case. Thus eé or é for the genitivs 
singvlar^ en or n for the dative plural^ and e for the other eases, in 
words where it is required. Most strong nouns observe also in the 
plural number of declension the inflection or modification of the radieal 
vowds 0/ 0/ U/ QU. 

b. Nouns of weak declension are such as are wanting in dtstlnettTa ' 
case-endings, their only and uniform case-ending being en or ti/ whieh is 
added to feminines throughout the plural and to masetdines for all caseSf 
singular and plural^ except the nominative singvlar. Nouns of the weak 
declension are not capdble ofinfiecting or mod\fying the vowél in the 

piural. 



A?P. IV.] KET TO THE NOUN-DECLENSIONS. 125 

Ä, The Weak or h-Declension. 

Uniform case-ending : en or tU 

T%e principal modd of thia declension is 3ett. 

I. Like 3c{t (plural in en) are declined : — 

1. About eighty feminines of one sjllable. Thus : 
Zi)^X, doop ; SBett/ vorld ; Vii^x, dock. 

2. All feminines in : ei, \)zit, Uit, fc^aft, ung, unft, tn, 

(plural innen). Thus : 

(Sntfernung/ distance ; ^öntgUw qneen. 

3. All feminines of foreign origin in : ton/ il, \XX, åt, Ztl}^, 
inj* Thus : 

^taHoXif nation ; gabrif/ manufactory ; Unioerfltdt/ university ; SRatUt/ 
natnre; ^rooin^/ province; @eine Gminenj/ His Eminence (title); 
@etne SKajejlåt/ His Majesty, 



The second model in importance is fRo^t» 
n. liike JBof e (plural in n) are declined : — 

1. All feminines in e and te. Thus : 

Sante/ aunt; ^amt/ lady; IBlume/ flower; HxhCf earth; @onne/ 
snn ', &t\lht/ parlonr ; ©d^ulC/ school ; ©orge^ eorrow, care ; glafc^Cf 
bottle, fläsk ; SRinute/ miuute ; gamitie/ family (say : famee-lee-ay), 

2. About förty feminines in er and about seventy feminines 
in el. Thus: . 

SKauCT/ wall (murus) ; Stlotel/ needle ; Äartoffel/ potatoe. 



7%e third model represents the masculines of the weak declension. No 
neuUr nounfoUows the weak declension, 

III. Like SBdr (singular and plural in en or n, except 
nominative singular, which bas never a case-ending) are de- 
clined : — 

1. About twenty masculines of one syllable and about 

twenty-five masculines in e. Thus : 

.f)cn:/ gentleman {sing, bed «^crrn/ pl, bie ^iXXiXii &c."); sjR^xy5ji^%Tö»Ä\ 
görjl/prince; @raf/ cotint; 8öwe/lion; JQ\^e|\iiMc-, ^x^qJq^i^ätj. 



126 GER3IAN ELEMENTART GRAMMAt* [aPP. IV. 

The word Saueo boor, peasant, is now generally referrad to thia 
declension ; genitive^be^ SBauern or SBaurerv &c 

2. The national names in C/ the participial nonns in C/ and 
8ome adjectival nouns in e. Thus : 

T>tt ^bfVLi\&)if the German ; ter Sratt)ofe> the Erenchman ; ber 9)reufef 
the Prussian ; ber 9{«|fe> the Russian ; ber S3ebtente/ the footman; bec 
(Sefanbte^ the ambassadör ; ber ®eiflUci)e# the elezgTman ; ber 9tet4e# 
the rich mao. 

The fortidpial and adjeetival nouns of tki$ deelmåum are properhf 
epeaJdmg adjectwes used éuhstantively. Tkey may be rtferred eUker to 
the weak declension of nouna or the weak dedenekm of aeffeetket* 
Eenoe U is evident that the weak declension of nouns eomddes wUh 
the weak declensio» of adjeciities, their common oase-emåÅmg bemg en 
or». 

3. Maaculines of foreign origin terminating in : ax,, åtit, 
Ct, cnt, and tf . Thus : 

^ufar/ hussar; ^voteftanU Protestant; 6olbat> soldier; GtttbenO 
etudent; ^at^oli!/ (fiomaH) Catholic 



B, The Strong or ^-Declension. 

Principal case-ending : § or e§ in the g^tive singiibur. 

Charactertstic, — Mest maaculines and neutera, efipeciallj 
those of one syllable, which have the vowels d, 0/ U/ AU/ 
modify^ or inflect the same in the plural. Thus : i, i, ii, iu* 

The vowels e and t are not modified. 

S*all Varuåm — I%e principal model of this declension ie SSad^ 

I. Like S3ad) (nominative plural in e ; dative plural in en) 
are declined : — 

1. Mest masculines and neuters of one syllable. Thus: 

a. Masctdines^—MnCif ring ; ^SkitU wine ; SBaunt/ tree ; SBtVQt monn- 
tam; glu0/ river; Sifdj/ table*, Jput# hat; @tern/ står; Za^ (jrf- 
^age)/ day; Sifd)f fish; grcunt), friexiÖL-, %>3Lxv\> Vt^l». %mty<V dog; 
JIBooöCp^. 2)?onbe> moon ; 9loc^ coat; ^ta^jVVil. ^X^^cjf^ ^x«^ 






APP. IV.] KEY TO THE NOUN-DECLENSIONS. 127 

b. Neuters. — S3ieo beer ; S^icr/ animal ; ®d)iff/ ship ; ^^fcrb/ borse ; 
StedjU rigbt ; 3a{)r {pL Sa^re)/ year; ©töcf/ piece ;, @d)ocl (i>^. 0d)ocfe> 
■core. 

2. Nouns of two sjllables witb the prefixes S&t^, (ix^, 

SScr^/ and nouns terminating lu: \^, xiCj, tng/ Ung/ which are 

mostly masciiline. Thus : 

jDerlBegrifff tbe conception, notion; ber @rfotg/ the flnceess; bet 
SSerbtenfl/ the profit ; ber Sthnx^ the king ; ber fRzttx^ the radiBh ; ber 
3öngltng/ the youth; ber «^&rtng/ the herring ; bad S$erbe(f/ the deek. 

3. Nouns with the prefix ®e^ and those terminating in nt^, 
which are oflen neuter. Thus : 

^ad ®ebirge/ the monntain-range ; \ia^ ®efd)en!/ the present ; bad 
®ef(i)tt)d|/ the talk; bad ©e^etmntp/ the secret 

4. A few masculines of foreign origin terminating in: W, dXif 
al/ ter, and the neuters in : a\, dt, CU/ Zt, tU, Xl, ill, VO, iCT/ 

mcnt, em, om* Thus: 

®er |>affd9ier/ the passenger ; ber Äapitåit/ the captain ; ber Jtapeffait/ 
the chaplain ; ber ®enei*al/ the general ; ber ©arbier/ the barber. 

^ad ^rocobil/ the crocodile; bad Jtompliment/ the compliment ; bad 
|)apier/ the paper ; bad ^d^tti the parceL 

5. Also a few noims like 2(benb/ m. evening ; SRonat/ m. 
month ; Unterrict)t, m, instruction ; ber ?)a(afl, the palace 
{pl. d); baS ?)arabieé, the paradise ; baS Scl^O/ the echo ; ber 

JHtar, the altar {pL d) ; ber ©ålat, the salad ; ber JBöron, 

the baron ; ber &i,\z, the cheese, &c., which cannot be classed 
with any of the above. 



Contraoted Fomu — The second model in importanee is SO^aler, 
Observe that qfter the liquids If ti/ Xf preceded hy cm unacoented e (el/ 
eit/ er)/ the e of the ettse-endin^f which is also unaccented, becomes absorbed 
and is thus omitted* 

IL Like 5!Raler (nominative plural no case-ending; 
dative plural in n, except when the word already terminates 
in n) are declined : — 



* Compare: Latin pater, gen, patris, and. "EtchcNi'. '^^Y^g^a^fe ^^^o^w*. 
Bjfpeler, je méne/rom mener, j'espére Jr om eapferec» ?>w^ 



123 GE Itu AN ELEKENTäRT GRAVUAR. [aPP. it. 

1. All masculines and neuters in er/ e{/ cn^ fc{/ tel/ å)Ctl, 

leitl/ and the national names in et« Thns : 

jDer OnUl, the imde ; ber ^id^Uv, the poet; baé 9Xdbd)en/ the girl; 
ber %t^kVf the fanlt ; bad ^xMmf the yonng lady ; ber ^OVQtn, the 
morning ; ber ©ommer/ the suiumer ; bad S^effer/ the knife ; bdö ^etteri 
the weather ; ber S3ettler/ the beggar ; ber Spieler/ the gambler ; ber 
Småler/ the dollar; baé SSiertel/ the quarter; ber ^k^u^mad^r/ the 
ehoemaker ; bad @täctci)en/ the morsel ; ber SBetter/ the cousin ; bad 
3immer/ the room; baé 9{&t^fel/ the riddle; bad @ilber/ the silyer; 
ber ©årtner/ the gardener ; ber IBanfter/ the banker (no case-ending in 
plural or é) ; hai Z^^eatev, tho theatre; ber (Snglånber/ the EnglUhman; 
ber Stalteneo the Italian, &c. 

2. The following nouns in et/ zl, etl/ modify or inflect the 
vowel in the plural, viz. : 

^er HäiVf the field ; S3ruber/ brother ; jämmer/ hammer ; &åjimCL^n/ 
brother-in-hvw ; SJater/ father ; 2(pfel/ äpple; ^ammel/ wether; 
»&anbe(/ quarrel ; ®attel/ saddle ; SSogel/ bird ; SÄangel/ want ; Mantel/ 
cloak ; habilt nayel ; @d)nabel/ beak; IBoben/ bottom ; ®arten/ garden; 
©rabem ditch; «^afen/ haven; Saben^ shop; JDfeiv oyen; ®c^aben/ 
hurt ; S^^^n/ thread ; bad ^lofler/ the convent, cloister. 

3. The masculines formerlj ending in etl/ are given under 
the mixed declension II. 3. 



Bnlargred or Sxpandea Form. — The third model represents thé 
neuters* which take the formatlve eyllahle (SBtlbuttddfttbe) er/ Ohg, th 
in the plural number of declensUm, The vowele dt 0/ U/ ait/ are alwagt 
modified in the plural. 

* These neuters correspond to the Latin neuters like ; 

genus, pl. gen>er-a (for gen-es-a) ; opus, pl, op-er-a, &a, 

The formatiye syllable er/ Ohp^. Ir, is in German originally derived £Doni 
an es or as of the singular, which has been turned into er in the pluraU 
This er is in Nhg. inserted between the stem of the word and its case- 
ending proper; thus SS6lB«cr*n/ dative plural of SSolf. Althou^hthe 
er has become a formative element (SSilbungdmtttel) in the declension of 
msny neuters and of a few masculines, yet it can hardly be called a 
case-ending. It is fornign to the Ohg. declension, where we find it 
only in the following words: Ohg. krutir, Nhg. Äråuter; Ohg. hMtt 
Nhg. ^dufer; Ohg. holzix, Nhg. »Ööljer; Ohg. bandity Nhg. SSdnber; 
Ohg, idetir, Nhg. S3(ätter. Gradually this ir. afterwards er/ beeam* 



AFP. IT.J KET TO THE NOUN-DECLENSIONS. 129 

in. Like 83 o I f (genitive singular 8 or eé ; plural in er, 
dative plural in Ct^n) are declined : — 

1. The foUowing fifty-one neuters of one syllable, viz. : 

2Caé/ carrion ; 2Cmt/ office ; S3ab/ bath ; S3anb/ ribbon ; SBilb/ picture; 
SSlatt/ leaf ; SSrett/ board ; S5ud)/ book ; ^aåjf roof; JDorf/ village ; di, 
egg; gad^/ compartment ; gaf / cask ; gclb/ field; ®elb/money; ®taé/ 
glass ; ©tieb/ limb ; ®rab/ grave ; ®rQér grass ; ®ut/ estate ; »^QUpt/ 
head ; fallit house ; ^olj/ wood ; ^orn/ horn ; »^U^n/ fowl ; Äalb/ calf ; 
Äinb/ child; Äleibr garment; Äocn/ corn; SCxaixU herb; gammr lamb; 
ganb/ land; gid)!/ light; gieb/ song; Sod)/ hole; gjJal/ mark; sjJiaul/ 
moath, maw; 9lcft/ nest; ^^fanb/ pledge; 9tab/ wheel ; SJeié/ twig; 
fRinhf heifer, beef ; @d)ilb/ sign-board ; @d)lof / castle, lock ; ©d^wert/ 
Bword ; Z^ah valley ; Stud)/ handkerchief ; SSol!/ nation, folk; SBammS/ 
jacket ; SQScibr wife, T^oman ; SGBort/ word. 

2. The following neuters with the prefix ®c^ and a few 

others, viz. : 

J)aé ®emad)/ apartment ; ©emfitlj)/ mind ; ®efd)led)t/ sex ; ®efid[)t/ 
face; ©efpcnjl/ spectre ; ©ewanb/ garment; baé »^Oépitalr the hospital; 
baS JCamifol/ thevest, jacket; baé Slegtment/ the regiment. 

3. The following twelve masculines, viz. : 

SDcr ©6fen)id)t/ villain ; JDom/ thorn ; ®ei|tr spirit ; ®ott/ God ; Ziihi 
body ; SÄonn/ man ; föttf place ; 0{anb/ edge ; ©traud^/ shrub ; SSor* 
munb/ goardian; fBalb/ forest; fBumt/ wonn. 

4. All the neuters terminating in ti)\xm ipL tlf)umcr) and 

the two masculines in tl)Um. Thus : 

^éw^cra.— »^crgegt^um/ görftenti)um/ dnchy, principality; ®rof^)ertf 
aogt^um; ©ropffirjlent^um/ grand duchy ; SSiét^um/ bishopric ; Äaifer» 

t^Uttl/ empire, imperial dignity. 

Masculines.— 2)er SRcid^t^um/ riches ; 3rrtI)Um/ error. 

transferred to other neuters, and even to twélve mascnline nouns. To 
Tise er where the regular plural in e should be employed, seems to 
have become a marked tendency in the vernacular tongue. Thus we 
hear among the common people frequently: ©töcfcr/ tjingcr/ fRbittt 
©tbcBcr/ and even SKcnfd^CT; &c. Of course grammarians tell us that 
these formations are abominable barbari sms, and so they are ; but we 
cannot altogether overlook the fact that language originates in the 
mouth of the people, as it were, and not with grammarians. These 
ezecrable barbarisms which we now abominate may at some future 
time swell tho list of plurals in er. 



130 GERMAN ELEMENTÄRT GRAMMAR. [aPP. IV. 

C. The Mized Declension. 

Tkxs 18 no new form of declension ; U is, as ita najne indicateSy a 
mlxture of the weak and strong modes of declension. The words which 
it comprises, like 9laåjtf ^c, are^ so to speak, exceptions to the strong 
declension, and should have been arranged as such. But experience hos 
shoum that such an arrangement is very inexpedient, as it tends to per- 
plex the student of German by introducingj^eminine nouns into the hirong 
declension and adding strings of exceptions to the already difficuU rtdes, 

I. 91 a C^ t is a strong noun of feminine gender, but in the 
singular it has, like all feminines, no case-ending. It is there- 
fore declined like 3cit in the singular and like S3ad^ in the 
plural. In the same way are declined :— 

1. The following thirty-two feminines of one syllable, viz.: 

)Dic Tfngft/ anguish ; 2C)rt/ axe ; SSant bench ; SBraut/ bride ; löruntl/ 
conflagration, heat, fervoup; SBruff^ breast; gaujt/ fist; grud^t/fruit; 
©onér goose; ®eif/ goat; ®nip/ tomb; ^anb/ hand; «^aut/ skin; 
M\xftt cleft ; ^roftf strength ; Äu^/ cow ; Äunff/ art ; gaué/ louse ; guft/ 
air; £ujt/desire,lu8t; SRac^t*/ might; ^a^t maid, servant-girl ; !Dlaué/ 
mouse ; SitOi\)tt seam ; 9'loti)/ need ; S^uf / uut ; ©d)nui;/ cord ; @tabt/ 
town; @talt/ stead; SBanb/ wall (panes); SBurft/ sausage; gunft/guild. 

The compounds : bic 2CuéfIucl^t/ subterfuge ; bic ^ZVitt^\ycmi% confla- 
gration ; Me ®efd)n)ul|t/ swelling, tumoup; bte ^ufammcirtunft/ the 
meeting. D]()nmQd)t */ /. fainting-fit, swoon, and S5ollmad)t/ /. full power, 
anthority, make in the plural D^nmad^ten and SSoUmad^lten. 

2. About eighteen feminines in xA^, like: 

ginfierntf/ darkness; ^enntntp/ knowledge; IBefocgntf/ apprehension; 
@i;!enntnif / cognisance, recognition ; (Stlaubntf / permifision, &c^ 

and the few feminines in fal/ thus : 

)Die S^rangfal (/. orn.), oppression, distress; bic SRÖ{)faI/ trouble; 
bic Sröbfal/ tribulation. 

3. The two feminines SSJluttcr, mother, and Soci^tcr/ 
daughter, foUow the declension of 5!Röler in the plural, and 
injflect the vowels. Thus : 

Fl. bie SÄötter/ ber SRötter/ ben SRuttecn/ bie SKötterj bie Söc^^ter^ &c 

II. Like ^tCLdi (singular, strong; plural, weak) are de- 
clmed ;— 



APP. IV.] KET TO THE N0UN-DKCLENSI0N8. 131 

1. The following mascalines which add mostly en in tlie 
plural, viz. : 

®er ©oni/ the thorn; SDJaj!/ mast; Cluett^ spring; ©porn/ spur; 
€tca^l/ beam; Untert^an/ subject; $faU/ peacock; ®a\Xt tract, district 
of a cormtiy; ©ttattf/ ostrich; 3iné/ interest (of money); 2C^n/ 
ancestor ; gotf!/ forest ; SorbeetV laureL 

2. The following mascnitnes whieh add mostly n in the 
plural, viz. : 

^et; 5Bater/ the Bavarian; ®t»atttVt godfather; ^\xiMt musde 
9ta(i)bat> neighbour ; ^antofel/ slipper ; ®ee/ lake ; @ta(i)eW sting (of 
an insect, &c.) ; SSetteo (male) cousin. 

The word S3auec/ which at one time was strong in the singular and 
weak in the plural, adds now generally n or en for all cases, singular 
andploraL 

3. Like .^erj is declined : 

@d)merj^ m, pain, gen, beé ©dimerjené (or eé)/ dat ^m @d)mergcu/ 
4Kic. ben ©d)mer5/ p/. bie @cf)merjen/ &c. 

In a similar mauner are declined 

the following masculines formerly ending in en. (They bélong pro- 
perly to the contracted form of the strong declension.) 

Nom, ber S3ud)flabe/ the letter, gm. bed S3uc^flabené/ dat. bem SBud^^ 
ftahtru acc, ben S3ud)jlaben/ pl, bie 3ud)jlQben/ &c Thus : 

iDer griebe/ the peace ; ber gun!e/ the spark ; ber ©ebanfe/ the thought ; 
ber (BlOMhZf the faith ; ber «^aufe/ the heap ; ber ^axatt the seed.; 
ber ®d)abe/ the injury ; ber SBitte/ the will. 

in. Like £)|()r (singular: strong; plural: weak) are de- 
clined : — 

1. 3)a« ^Cugc/ eye; S5ett/ bed; <gnbe/ end; ^emb/ shirt; Snfeft/ 
insect ; f{3e^ woe, pains ; ^ttif heart (which has been already included 
under IL 3). 

2. The following neuters of foreign origin take i en in the 
plural. Thus : 

®a« %C\% the fossil, pl. bie gofTiKen 5 baö Jtcqjltal/ capital, money 
put out to interest ; §!OlineraI/ n. mineral ; ^atzddlt n, material ; @oUes 

fiiutti/ ». {pl, ien or xa)^ ©ipmnafium/ ». (i?^. ten) $ ^on|i|locium/ «. (jp^. 
i£n> &c 

&2 



132 6ER1IAN ELEMENTARY QRÅMMAR. [aPP IV: 



SUPPLEMENTÄRT EXERCISES ON THE DECLEN- 
SIONS OF NOUNS, FOR TRANSLATION INTO 
GERMAN. 

[The dedensions of nouns present so many difficulties, especially to 
the younger pupils, who are apt to forget that Glerman nouns re- 
quire a case-ending, that it has been deemed advisable to add these 
exercises, which may be used when occasion requires.] 



To Lesson III. p. 8. 

Words to befound in Voc, III, See also p, 71. Prepositions 

with two cases, 

With Terbs indicating a motion or direction to a place, these preposi- 
tions with two cases require the accnsatiTe. When rest or motion in a 
place or locality is expressed or implied, they require the dative. 

Ex. 6. h. — 1. [The] man lives {[tit) upon [the] eai*th and 
under the sun. 2. We stånd (jlc^en) at the door of the sitting- 
room. 3. Under the earth. 4. Among (unter) the flowera 
are roses. 5. They are behind the door. 6. They go (ge^n) 
behind the door. 7. We go (9ei)cn) into the parlour and walk 
(gc^en) in the parlour * up and down ' (auf unb ab). 8. Before 
the door. 9. In the earth. 10. Near the queen. 11. Över 
the parlour-door. 12. Between the earth and the sun. 

To Lesson IV. p. 10. 

Worda to befoundin Voc. I. — IV. See p, 71. Prepositions 

with two cases. 

Ex. 8. b, — 1. We go (gel^en) under the trees of the wood 
and walk (9ei)cn) under the trees up and down (auf unb ah)- 
2, We stånd (fitf)tn) on the mountain. 3. The garden lies 
(liegf) near [at] the river. 4. In this duchy *are' (cjtebt e§) many 
mountains. 5. Among (unter) Hons and bears. 6. Under the 
tables. 7. Under tlie heaven. 8. He stånds (jte^t) at (an) the 
tree. 9. On (auf) the stars of [the] heaven. 10. Between the 
books. 11. Behind the table. 12. The river flows (ftieft) in 
the valley. 13. Among (unter) the poets of Germany. 14. 
We go (ge^en) to (an) the river. 15. In all brooks and rivers 
are (giebt e$) animals. 



JkPP. IV.] SUPPLEMENTART EXERCISES. 133 

See words in Voc. I. — /F., and prepositions on p, 70. 

Ez. 8. c, — 1. We live (njo^ncn) on the other side of the 
river. 2. The garden is situated (liegt) on this side of the 
river. 3. He is *at the house of (bci) the king. 4. Since the 
time. 5. Without (o^nc) the prince. 6. Together with the 
poet. 7. Without (o^)nc) the ladies. 8. With the girls. 9. 
In spite of the aunt. 10. With all the books. 11. The 
mountains lie (licgen) not fiir from the valley. 12. Within 
the duchy. 13. *At the house of (bei) the uncle. 14. In 
all the duchies of Germany are (gicbt eé) many brooks, 
rivers, valleys, and mountains. 15. There are ((5é gtebt) 
many kings and princes of Germany, bijt (abec) there is only 
(nur) one emperor (kaffer). 16. We go (geijjen) through the 
gardens. 17. About (um) this time. 18. In this valley and 
on this mountain are many lions and bears. 

To Lesson v. p. 12. 

See words on pp, 6 to 13, and prepositions onpp. 70 and 71. 

Ez. 10. b, — 1. On the ship. 2. During the day and during 
the night. 3. In all villages of Germany are {Qkht cö) geese. 
4. Without (o()ne) the professors of the imiversity. 5. *Atthe 
house of or^vnih ' (bei) the professor. 6. In spite of the dark- 
ness, we went (gingen njir) into the wood and on the mountain. 
7. On the walls of the sitting-room. 8. Near the wall. 
Through the wall. 9. With all hands. 10. Under tlie 
benches and upon the tables. 11. In the eyes. Without 
the eyes. 12. In the heart of man. 13. We live {tvoi)ntn) 
in a village. 14. For the pictures. Near the pictures. 15. 
In [the] bed. 16. In spite of the insects. 17. Instead of 
the professor. 18. The powers of [the] heaven and [of the] 
earth. 19. On the other side of the ship. 20. Över the 
masts of the ships. 21. Without my (mcine) daughter. 22. 
In the ears. 23. Within the university. 24. In spite of the 
rain (Slegen/ «t.). 



184 



GERMAN iXEMENTABT GKAMMAB. 



[afp. 1 



t 

o 



a e8 







.\PP. V.J 



PARADiaUS OF VEBBS. 



185 



ge^årt ^aben 











JJ gc^ftrt ^aben 6 



I 



SS öfi.^ 




s .- r 



o 




i* Ä — 

r il 



I 



O 



c Irf 



8 

X* 



^ JB^^f-Ä-iÖ-O 



S 
S»3 ** 












J 



^t> 






v» 1-» 
«o«o .. 






i: 












186 



GERMAN ELEHEMTART GBAJCMAB. 



[app. v. 



9 



É 

I. 



•»5 5SS 

•o U»_g ti 0C3^,O 



ge^5rt tooxhtn 

t ' s 



•o 



•C 

s 

JO 



I 
I 



.1? 



J. 






t: Ä 



►^ 0e]!)6rt »orbcn 






^ ö St g 



»« 2 



ö « s 



•5^0 «* fi^i^ 



•O »O" i* «J '»'^O* 

*P -^ ^ >-» iS "^ 



^e^årt worben 



•** •**^.^ i5* *C .2i 

s 









I 
I 



tStf 



,_ ,1 -s. — 050) 

§2 8e.e& 



fl 
o 
« 

I 



9c^6rt »orben 



JO _ 

c lj± ,5 Ä e 

•«3 JO «* st;: c^ 



r 






« a; 



i 



APP. V.] 



PARADIGMS OF VERBS. 



187 



a 






o 



i 

p£3 



I 






5^ 

JO QQ 

•o M 

OJ**-' 

<s 

B 



1 

f£2 



•& 









o c 



•f .s '^ 



OQ •w 






11 



00*0- 



'^ 



«n ® 

r 

SD »» 

Sa 

I -2 
o © 

Ii 
I- 

® « a 

Is 

« »^ S 



V^ 



.'^^ 



"fe 



r^ 



138 



GERMAN naOKTABT GRAMMAR. 



[aPP. T. 



c 



3 



4» 



i 
I 

I 

00 

03 

a 
o 

I 



ti 

t^ .5 




— S c e 

»2.2* o «>^ 



SJ ÖBSÄ 



I «» ^ SJ v« s «* 



I 



e 

tt» 



^ bo 

I -^ 






v» 
B 

•5 



ii ii ** S « b 
g 2 o fi S g 
fi g g « fi g 



i=i c 






t^leiä 



«2 



I § 
I? 

I 



Q) 



CM 



5tjg 



08 




*M 



I 



»e 




60 








S^3 


Bl.e& 






^5P 


^ 


•-ig 


«; 




»o 









i 



APP. V,] 



PARADIGMS or VKRBS. 



139 



gefaUen fetn 

é ' v 

s 
Sv 9f S & S ^ 



g >^ s v» o tOss j SJ 



I 

I 

* gefallcn fcin 
' "c ' 

S-Ö.*i § S S 






»5 

O 



O 







s 



"2 d 



.-f^ 






ti 

II 



^"^ e8 



«^ «: w 






SS öfie-^ 



.0 



JO v 




'** 5^ tt* 



.^ 

« 



i 



S 



S »a "^ Jo 
2 ** w 

-SfiB 

••-• jO 



I 




O 08 



140 



APPENDIX VI. 



TABLE OF STRONG VERBS. 



§ 

1. 



2. 



3. 



4. 



ö. 



* Both weak and stroDg. 
f. Compound tenses with fein. 







Yowél ohangeB, ia the 


iKJfUirUVK. 


Impf. 


Part. 


2nd. & 8id. 


Lnpf. 






Ind. 

a 


Fast. 



Pres. 


Babj. 
d 


tx) command 


.befel^len 


te 


to apply one's self 


ftd) befletf en 


• 

1 


• 

t 


ei 


i 


t» begin 


beöjtnnen 


a 





• 

t 


( 


tx) bite 


betten 


• 

t 


• 

t 


et 


• 

t 


to conceal, hide 


bergen 
berjten/ f. 


a 





• 

t 


d 


to burst 


a 





• 

t 


d 


to recall to mind 


ftd) beftnnen 


a 





• 

t 


d 


to cheat 


betrfigen 








ö 


( 


to induce, move 


bewegen * 








e 


( 


to bend 


btegen 








• 

te 


( 


to oflfer, bid 


bieten 








te 


( 


to fästen, bind 


btnben 


a 


u 


• 

t 


d 


to beg, pray 


bttten/ hat, gebeten 


a 


e 


t 


d 


to roast, irj 


bråten * 


it 


a 


a, d 


te 


to blow 


blafen 


te 


a 


d 


ie 


to stay, remain 


bleiben/ f. 


ie 


te 


ei 


• 

te 


to break 


bredden 


a 





i 


d 


to thrash 


brefcben 


a/O 





t 


d/d 


to enter, press 


brinaen/ f. 

empfe^len 


a 


u 


t 


j 


to recommend 


a 





• 

t 


to mn away 
to grow påle 


entrinnen/ f. 


a 





t 


d/( 


erbleid)en/ f. 


• 

t 


• 

t 


ti 


• 

t 


to be extmgoished 


erWfd)en/ f. 








• 

t 


5 


to resound 


erfd)aUen * f. 








. a 


ö 


to be frightened, 


tc\å)vzdin ♦ f. 


a 





i 


d 


firighten 












to consider 


em>&gen 








d 


ö 


to eat 
to drive, (fare) , 


effen/ gegeflfen 


a 


e 


• 

t 


d 


fa^ren/ f. 


\« 


^ * 


\ ' 





APP. VI.] 



TABLE OF STRONG VERBS. 



141 







Vowel changes, in the 


IKVIMITIVH. 


Impf. 


Part. 


2nd. & Srd. 


Impf. 






Tnrt. 

te 


Past. 

a 


Pres. 


Bubj. 


to fa,n 


faUcn, ficl, f. 


& 


ie 


to catch 


fangen 


• 

t 


a 


& 


• 

t 


tofigbt 


fed)ten 








e/i 


b 


tofind 


ftnben 


a 


u 


• 

t 


d 


to plait, braid 


fled)ten 








e 


a 


to fly 


ftimn, f. 








te 


a 


to flee, run away 


flie^en/ f. 








te 


5 


to flow, nm 


Piefen^ f. 








ie 


a 


to eat, devour 


frejfen 


a 


e 


• 

i 


d 


(of beasts) 












to be cold, freeze 


fcieren 3rd. pers. 








te 


a 


to ferment 


giren 








& 


a 


to bring forth, bear 


gebären 


a 





Ä/ie 


d 


to give 


geben 


a 


e 


te 


d 


to prosper 


gebeil^en/ f. 


ie 


ie 


ei 


ie 


to please^ like 


gefaUen/ f. 


te 


a 


d 


ie 


to go, walk 


ge^en/ ging/ gegan* 
gen/ f. 


• 

i 


a 


e 


• 

t 


to succeed 


gelingen^ f. 


a 


u 


• 

t 


d 


to be of valne 


gelten 


a 





• 

t 


d 


to recover 


genefen/ f. 


a 


e 


e 


d 


to enjoy, taste 


gente^en 








ie 


a 


to succeed 


gerat^en/ f. 


te 


a 


d 


ie 


to come to pass 


gefd)et)en,f.3rd.per8. 


a 


e 


te 


d 


to gain, win 


gemtnnen 


a 





i 


d/a 


to pouT, cast 


gte§en 








ie 


a 


to resemble, liken 


glcidjen 


i 


• 

t 


et 


i 


to slip, glide 


gleiten/ glitt/ ges 
glitten, f. 


• 

t 


• 

t 


ei 


• 

t 


to shine faintly 


glimmen 








• 

t 


a 


to dig 


gråben 


u 


a 


d 


il 


to lay hold of 


greifen/ griff/ ge* 
grijfen 


• 

i 


• 

t 


ei 


• 

t 


to hold, keep 


Ibalten 


te 


a 


d 


te 


to häng, dangle 


Isängen/ f. 


• 

t 


a 


d 


• 

t 


to hew, chop 


^auen/ li)izht gelbauen 


ie 


au 


au 


ie 


to lift, heave 


Uhen 








e 


a 


to be called, bid 


betten 
pelfen 


te 


ei 


ei 


ie 


to help 


a 





i 


d/ö 


to cleaye 


flieben 








te 


a 


to climb 


flimmen/ f. 








1 


v ^ 


to soiind, tinkle 


flingen 


\' 


\ ^ 


\ \ 


\ ^ 


to pinch - , 

1 ' 


{im,cn/ !ni|f 


\ ' 


.\ . 


A 



142 



bEBXAN ELEMEXTARY ORAMMAB. 



[app. VI. 



29. 









Yowél clumges, in the 




IVBTNTnVE. 


Impt 


Park. 


2iid. & 3rd. 


Impf. 








Ind. 

a 


Fast. 


Pres. 


Sabj. 




to arrive, comfl 


fommeit/ !am/ f. 








d 




to creep 


fried)en 


C 





te 


5 




to cboose 


fören 








ö 


d 




to load, freight 


läten* 


u 


a 


O/d 


11 




to nm 


laufen/ f. 


ie 


au 


du 


te 


13. to siiffer 


leiben/ litt/ gelttten 


• 

t 


i 


ei 


• 

t 


to lend 


letten 


ie 


ie 


ei 


ie 


to read 


Icfen 


a 


a 


te 


d 


to lie 


Uecjen^ f. and t^. 


a 


e 


te 


d 




to tell a lie 


logen 








ö 


d 




to avoid 


meiben 


ie 


ie 


ei 


ie 


14. 


to milk 


melfen * 


c 





e^i 


d 




to measure 


nttffen 


a 


< 


• 

t 


d 




to go amiss 


miélin9en/f.3rd.pers. 


a 


« 


• 

t 


d 




to tak« 


ne^men/ genommen 


a 





• 

t 


d 




to whistle 


pfeifcm pfiff 


i 


• 

t 


et 


i 




to cultivate, ntmse 


pflegen * 








t 


5 


15. 


to praise 


preifen 


ie 


ie 


ei 


ie 




to spring forth 


quellen/ f. 








• 

t 


ö 




to advise 


tati)zn 


te 


a 


d 


ie 




to rub 


reiben 


le 


te 


ti 


• 

te 




to rend, tear 


reifeit 


• 

i 


i 


ti 


• 

t 




to ride, go oa 


reiten/dtt/f. 


• 

t 


• 

t 


ti 


i 




horseback 












IG. 


to smell 


ried)en 








ie 


ö 




to wrestle 


rincjen 


a 


u 


• 

t 


d 




to leak, run 


vinmn, jl 


a 





i 


d 




tocall 


tntfen 


k 


u 


tt 


ie 




to drink (of beasts) 


faufen/ foff 








dtt 


ö 




to Buck 


faugen 








au 


5 


17. 


to create, shape 


fd)a|fen/ fd}uf 


u 


a 


a 


ö 




to separate 


fcbetben 


ie 


ie 


ei 


• 

te 




to seem, shine 


fc{)einen 


te 


• 

te 


et 


ie 




to scold 


fd^lten 


a 





• 

t 


d/( 




to clip, fiheap 


fd)ercn 








e 


5 




to push, shove 


fd)icbeii 





• 


ie 


5 


18. 


to shoot 


fci)te$en 








te 


5 




to flay, oppress 


f(l)inbett 


u 


u 


t 


a 




to sleep 


fd^lafen 


ie 


a 


d 


ie 




to strike, elay 


fd^lagen 


« 


a 


d 


a 


1 


to roove gently 


fd)lei3)en/ f. 


t 


i 


et 


• 

t 


/ to grind - 


fdöleifen/ \icjfx^ 


• 


t 


• 

et 


• 

t 


\ to cloae, lock 


fd)liefen 


\ *> 


\ '^X ^^ 


1 n 



APP. VI.] 



TABLE OF STRONG VEBBS. 



143 



6. 







Vowd changeB, in ihe 


iNFINmVE. 


Impf. 


Part. 


2nd. k 8rd. Impf. 




■ 


Ind. 

a 


Past. 
U 


Pree. 


Snl)j. 


to sling 


fd)Unaen 


i 


d 


to fling, smite 


fcl)mcifen 


9 

X 


i 


et 


i 


to RTTielt 


fd)mclä€n * f. 








i/e 


( 


to cnt 


fd^neiben/ fd)nitt 


« 

1 


• 

t 


ei 


i 


tobreathe heavily, 


fc^nauben 








au 


5 


snört 












. to screw 


fd)rauben 








au 


5 


to wnte 


fcl)rciben 


te 


te 


et 


ie 


to scream, cry 


fc^rctcn 


te 


te 


ei 


ie 


to step 


fcbrciten/ felfritt/ f. 
fdbwctgen 


• 

t 


i 


et 


i 


to be eilent 


te 


te 


et 


ie 


to swell 


fd)n)cUcn/ f. 








• 

t 


5 


, to swim 


fdbwimmen/ f. 
fdowinbcn/ f. 


a 





• 

t 


d 


to vanish 


a 


u 


t 


d 


to swing 


jid^wingen 


a 


u 


• 

t 


d 


to swear 


fd)n)örcn 


0/ u 








Ö/U 


to see 


fc^cn 


a 


e 


te 


d 


to boil, seethe 


fteben/ fött 








ie 


5 


. to sing 


fingcn 


a 


u 


• 

t 


d 


to sink 


jintcn/ f. 


a 


u 


• 

t 


d 


to meditate 


finnen 


a 





• 

t 


d 


to sit 


filen/ fag 


a 


e 


i 


d 


to spit 


fpeien 


ie 


te 


• 

et 


ie 


to spin 


[pinnen 


a 





i 


d/d 


. to speak 


fpred)en 


a 





i 


d 


to spront 


fprie^en 








te 


a 


to spring 


fpringen/ f. 


a 


u 


i 


d 


to sting 


fted)en 


a 





i 


d 


to stånd 


fteben/ flanb/f. and §. 


a 


a 


e 


d 


to steal 


fle^Ien 


a 





ie 


d/5 


, to mount 


fleiaen/ f. 
fierbcn/ f. 


te 


te 


ei 


ie 


todie 


a 





i 


d/il 


to fly oflf 


fKeben 








te 


5 


to stink 


ftinSen 


a 


u 


• 

t 


d 


to posh, thmst 


floden 


te 





5 


ie 


to stroke 


fh:eid)en 


• 

t 


• 

t 


ei 


• 

t 


to contend, quarrel 


fhreiten/ fhitt 


• 

t 


i 


ei 


i 


to do 


t^un/ t^at 


a 


a 


u 


d 


to cairy, wear 


trogen 
trejfen/ traf 


u 


a 


d 


tt 


to hit 


a 





• 

t 


d 


to drive 


tretben 


te 


te 


ei 


. ^'^ 


to tread 


treten/ f. 




1 


\ w > 


to drink 

^ / 


trinfen 


\ : 


\ 



144 



GERMAN ELEMENTÄRT GRAMMAR. 



[app. VI. 







Yowel chaoges, in täe 




iKVINinVB. 


Impf. 


Part 


2nd. & 3rd. 


Impf. 






Ind. 


Pasfe. 


Pres. 


Sabj. 




to deceive 


trugcn 








a 


6 




to lose colouT, 


ocrbleicf)cn/ f. 


• 

t 


• 

1 


et 


• 

t 




to fade, die 














to ruin, spoil 


oerbcrbcn/ f. 


a 





• 

t 


&/ft 




to enter into service 


tid) oerbingcn 


u 


u 


• 

t 


Ö 




to vex, put out 


Dcrbrief en/ 3rd. pers. 








t 


a 


27. 


to forget 


oergeffen 


a 


e 


• 

t 


d 




to lose 


oerlicrcn 








ie 


ö 




to get extinguished 


ocrWfd)en/ f. 








t 


5 




to disappear 


öccfd^minbcn/ f. 


a 


u 


• 

t 


d 




to pardon 


oergei^cn 


te 


te 


ei 


• 

te 




to grow 


tt)ad)fen/ f. 


u 


a 


d 


ä 


28. 


to wash 


n)afd)en 


u 


a 


& 


ö 




to weigh, poDder 


m&gen 








& 


ö 




to weigh, rock 


iriegcn ♦ 








ie 


ö 




to yield 


»cid)en/ f. 


t 


t 


ei 


i 




to show 


tt)cifcn 


ie 


te 


et 


ei 




to levy, woo 


»erben 


a 







d 


29. 


to throw 


werfen 


a 





t 


d/Ö 




to wind 


ttJinbcn 


a 


u 




d 




to confii8e,entangle 


tvintnf* öertt)frrcn 










ö 




to accuse 


Scil&en 


ie 


ic 


ei 


ie 




to draw, pull 


ikijzn, hoq, gejogcn 








ie 


5 




to force 


gwmgcn 


a 


u 


• 

t 


d 



Verbs of mized inflection are given under Lesson XXIV.; and 
the auxiliaries of mood under Lessons XVIII, and XIX. 



Observe, — The above List of Strong Verbs bas been 
divided into paragraphs of six verbs each, and (me or 
two paragraphs may be leamt {and occasionaUy wriäen 
out) for every other lesson, altemately with the words 
and phrases on pp. 147, &c. 



APP. VII.] INTERGHANGE OF OONSONANTS. 145 



APPENDIX Vn. 

INTERGHANGE OF CONSONANTS IN GERMAN 

AND ENGLISH, 



CHmrrCaLaw of Progression of Mutes^ or ,;8aut\)erfd^icbun9»" 

I. Labial or p-mutes. 

1. German b, if not Initial, answers to English f or V : 

®t(ih, staflf ®raÖ, grave 

2. German f, if not initial, answers to English p : 

©d^iff, ship Oficn, open 

3. German p( corresponds to English p : 

iPfcjfet/ pepper l^fropf; prop 

II. Lingual or t-mutes. 

1. German answers to English th : 

laieb/thief S3aDr,bath 

2. German t or t$ answers to English d : 

SD8ort, word Cfjur, door 

Lingual Sibilants. 

3. German 0; f J;, ff correspond frequentlj to English t : 
au0, ont beifj, hot 2Baffcr, watei: 

4. German } and ti ofben correBpoiLd V>^xi^^\»\ 
fUlalf, m&lt jttjen, to ait S^aW^i^^"^ 

1a 



146 QERIUN ELEMENTABT ORAlDfAR. [aFP. YII. 

III. Guttural or k-mutes (Palatals). 

1. German ft answers sometimes to English ch : 

Hinn, chin 

2. German tfl corresponds frequently to English k, gh, 
tch, &c. : 

^iittt,mi\k gitöt.light ^ct|Ö/Pitch 

3. German g corresponds sometimes to English y, 1, 
W, &c. : 

Sag, day .^figcl, hill @orgc, sorrow 

4. German j answers in some words to English y : 

SJabr, year Soåffjoke 

Exercise: — Eind the English words corresponding to 

the German: 1)abzn, l)alb, tRanbt, fxtbtn, uHer, 
Stnabz, titf, t||euer/ Cag, CoH/ htfttx, ZoH, 
5a0, etrafjc/ IRatjc, Zcit (ci = Engl. i), |pfunb 
(u = Engl. ou), JU (u == Engl. oo), fcltcn, (Så)laf, 
anf, IButfl/jSiegel/SBeg, UiOtt, SBetH/ @d^nepfe, 
tanb, a^t, jlerben/ f)atUn, ^tlUn, xoat^tn, 
folgem IPflanjC/ JBank, xoai^, xtit, Vftife^ 
^tefier, Ifati, ^^^h ^i^^f lebeti/ iagtx, lacken, 
^rucfte, Ixat^^n, Mnl, fung; ^opfett; ^offen, 
•&er}, ^a\xU, ®rufj, %xaan, glutj^t/ gafj, IBorn, 
SBett 83 art alt, &o. 



AFP. \niLj WOSDS AND PHBASES. 147 



APPENDIX Vin. 

WORD- AND PHRASE-BOOK. 



The following words and phraoes sbould be leamt by beart 
and applied conyersationany, at least once a week. To 
this end the sentences have been diyided into paragra|)b8 of 
<x)nyenient portioBLS. 

I. 2)ic ©tabt, the town. 

1. jDte fBotftahtf thesi^urb 

taö ®tabtoiert€l/ the quarter (of a town) 

bad Zt)Otf thegate; hU SSxtidt/ the bridge 

htt 9)la|/ the square 

ter ^atlt, ^ar!tpla|/ the marlcet, market-place 

bi e ® e t r e t b ei^ a n e / the corn-exchange, corn-market 

b te ^i\å)t)alUf tke fish-market 

2. S)ie @trafe/ th^street 

gefcgt^ pp. sirept; gefprcngtf watered 
Uhi)aUt iirely; abgelegeo/ outof thewagr 
XCtny dean; fd)mtt|tg/ dirty 
baö |)pafter/ Srottott/ the paTement 
id) bin t:|)m aufber®trafe begegnet/ IhavemethimlD the 
atreet; bic @trafen«@ifenbal^n/ thetramway. 

3. @in öfcntHd)eé ®eb&ube/ a public bailding 
baö @d^tof/ tbecastle; bet ^alafl^ thepalace 
baé diat^i)aué, the town-hall 
bet^agtflrat/ the municipal coimdl, the magistracy 
«in @tabtrat]^/ dtatf)ét)txt, /m, Atown-comicilloT 

^er ©d^ulmantt/ the policeman; ^ bie @a^u|leute/ or 
^m&tinfi:. 

4. (Sin ®a|i^of/ m. anliotel; «tll ^ttt^^^auö/ n. an inn 
€tn ^affee^au^ ».un cafö, a eoffee-house, ooffQ«-«.Kck^ 
ha^ @petfel^auö/ an eating-boaBe, d\mi^-TCKn&& 
<tnell?e/?attrationy arestaurant ^ %. c^ 

fubJUc-bouBef &e, 

Z.2 



148 OEEMAN ELEMENTÄRT GRAMMAR. [apP. VHI. 

bie SBörfC/ theexchange; hit SKunjC/the mint 
baö 3trenl^audi bie Srrenanfialt/ the mad-house, lunatic 
asylom. 

5. jDie Jttrcbe/ the church; bei: S)om/ bte ^omlivå^ef the 

cathedral 
bie «^auptf ird^e/ the cathedral church, high or principal church 
bie ^ibliot^ef/ the library; baé ^eu^^aix^/ the armoury, 

arsenal 
bie ^afetne/ thebarracks; bie Unioerfttdt^ the university 
haé ©pmnaftunt/ gpceum^ pl. bie ©i^mnafien/ SDceen^ 

giammar-school, college, &c. 
bte <^ot)t @C^Ule/ the grammar-school, high-school 
baé Zt)taUVf the theatre; bie SBä^ne/ the stage, boards 
hit SSoIféfd^Ule^ the national school 
bie SBörgerfd^ule/ the middle-class school 
ber 3oolo9ifd)e ©arten/ the zoological garden 
htv ^atlf S£|)iergarten/ the park, the preseryes. 



n. T>a^ »6au§, the house. 

6. @in $rit>at^aud/ ». a private residence or house 
baé Seb&ube/ thebuilding 

bie SBo^nunQ/ hat Sogie/ the dwelling, lodging, &c. 

SBo tt)0^)ncn ©ie? Where do you live ? 

SBiffen @ie feine SBo|)nung? Do you know where be lives, 

his address ? 
ein »^aué bewo^nen^ to occupy a house. 

7. JDie Zf)iSitf thedoor; hit Älingel/ thebeU 
flingeln ©iel ring the bell! bie 2)iele/ the hall, lobby 

bie Sor^aUe/the entrance-hall ; ber ©ang/ the passage, cor- 

ridor, lobby 
bie A^reppe/ the staircase ; hat ^atttvvt, @rbgefd)of/ @n- 

t r e f o I / jOTotind-floor 
ber erjte ©tocf/ baé erfle @toc!mer!/ thefirstfloor 
bie SSeU^tage/ the best or first floor. 

8. jDaé timmer/ the room; ein SSorjimmer/ n. an ante-room 

or chamber 
baé äSo^njtmmer/ hit @tube/ the sitting-room, parlour 
hat ®efeafd)afté}immer/ SBifitenjimmer/ ber @m- 

pfangéfaat/ ©alon/ the drawing-room, recepdon-room, 

BsJoon, &c. 

9. »Daé ©peife^immrr/ ber ©peifefaal/ the dining-room, 

dlDing-bali 
taé ©(^laf^immer/ bie @d)lafflube/ hit dämmer/ the 
bed-room 

ein ^a binetf «., 2Clc ot) e n » m. a. smtCW ÖÄasoNöet, ^ o^oa^s^. 
tie SftetivabCi hat Ttpartemexvt i\ve ^«Xftx-€iö«Ä\., 



APP. VIII.] WORDS AND PHRASES. 149 

10. ©er Ofen/ theoven; ha^ Äamtn/thefire-place 

ber ©d^ornjletn/ thechimney; cinÄronleucl)ter/ w. achan- 

delier, lustre 
bic iDec!C/ ^immevbcdtr theceiling; bte ÄÖd^C/ thekitchen 
hai ^aåj, the roof ; bic ^it^tlt fl, the tiles 
ber ©d^icfer/ theslate; baS genjlcr/ thewindow 
ber heller/ thecellar; ber «£)0f/ theyard 
\iOi^ ^tnter^aué/ the back-buildings ; ber ®arten/ the garden. 



m. SKSbclrt/ jpZ. furniture. 

> 

11. 3)er SSifd)/ thetable; ber @tu^l/ thechair 

bie SBan!/ the form; 3Ra^a90'nisSÄöbeln/ mahogany furni- 
ture 

möbltren/ to furaish; etn möblirteé 3iJnmer/ a furniBhed 
room 

einemöbltrte ^0]()nun^a famished lodging, residence, hoiise 

baé SBet t/ the bed; eine »ollene ©ecfe/ ablanket; einSSettss 
tud)/ n, a sheet; baé ^eberbett/ the feather-bed. 

12. ©in ÄopfBiffen/ ». a pillow; ber S!Bafd)ttfd)/ the -wash-stand 
ber '^^x%X\\^l Sloilettentifd)/ thedressing-table; ber ©piCs 

Cjetfthe looking-glass; bte @eife/ thesoap; ber@d)wamm/ 
iäie sponge ; bie ^ö^nbitrjle/ the tooth-brush 

baé J)anbtucl)/ thetowel; bie fBanbu^r/ theclock 

ber Suftcppic)f thecarpet; ber £e]()n)lu^l/ the arm-chair. 



IV. 2)ag grul^ftficf, breakfast. 

13. grö^ftilcfen/'' insefp. to breakfast; j?»p. gefrÖ^ftllcJtr break- 

fasted 
eine Saffc Äaffee/ acupofcoffee 

fd)n)arjer ^affee/ da C£^é å Teau oi« noir, coffee without milk 
^affee mit ^ild)/ du café au lait, coffee with milk 
^ajfee fodren/ to make coffee 
ber Äaffeetopf/ V\t JCaffecfanne/ thecoffee-pot 

ber sotildötopf/ themilk-jug; ber ©abnentopf/ the cream-juu: 
bie ^affeemafcl)ine/ coffee-um, une cafetiére, any apparatus for 

making coffee 
bie Dbertaffe/ thecup; bie Untertajfe/ thesaucer. 

14. ©er SS^eelöffeO the tea-spoon ; bie Sucferjange/ the sugar- 

tongs 
bie 3ucEerbofe/ 3uc!erfcl)ad)tel/ the sugar-b&avcL 
baÖlButterbrot/oneor two slicea oi Xäg^Äl ^>i}CL\pöW«R^ vgtead. 

thereon 
Mfdfyeé SStot (öt S3rob)/new\)Teajä.. 



150 GEBMAH ELEBfENTABT GRAMMAR [aFP. VIH. 

SSetfbrot/ n, wheaten biead; @d)war3brot^ n, lye-bread, 

brownbread 
eine @emmel/ a roll; etn 9){tlci)brob/ or SBrdbd^en/ etn 

SK U n b ft U tf / a French loll 
ber '^withadr a kind of soft biscnit, msks 
ber ^r&fentirteller/ the tray 
^affee trtnf en/ to take toffee, drink eo£^ 
iCaffee einfd)enien/ to pour ont, serre oofi^. 

15. ®eben @ie mir gefdtttöfl Giveme,ifyouplease, 

Sitte/ geben 0ie mir Ptay, give me 

fReidjzn @te mir gefdUtgft eine Zaffe ^er. Handorreaeh 
me, if yoa please, a cup 

SBoUen ©te eine Zafft ^afee ne^men? Will you take 
a cup of coffee? SBenn id^ bitten barf. If youplease 

bte ^ilå) ift %ufammengelaufen/ ift fauec/ the milk bas 
cnrdled, tnmed sonr, &c. 



V. 2)a§ swcitc grul&jlucf, or SwcitcS gruJ&ftudf, 

Irmcbetm. 

16. @inen 2Cnbif or 3mbif einne^men/ to take a snack, a little 

luncbeou 
IButterbrot mit ^Ui^å)f a meat-sandwich 
Sutterbrot mit %&[e/ a cbeese-sandwich 
SSutterbrot mit @cl)tn!en/ a ham-eandwich 
gerdud)e.rter ®d)tn!en/ smokedham 
iad)é/ m, salmon; 2(al/ m. eel 
»^unaer baben or hungrig fetn/ tofeelhnngry 
©arf ic^ S^nen cin ©tötfd^en SBurjl anbieten? May I 

offer you a piece of sausage ? 
^an!e 3bnen/ id) nebme etn fleined @tfic!d^en. Thank 

you, I will tako u small piece, »lice. 

17. Seberwurft/ /. liver-sansage ; ein guter 2Cppe ti't/ a good 

appetite 
@d)lacJwurjl/ SRettwurfl^/.smokedpork-sausage 
SRotl^Wurjl/ SJlUtWUrfl//. sausage made of pig^sblood 
9lebmen @ie boc^ ein éd)nfttd)en. Pray, take a sliee 
in éd^etben fd)neiben/ to cut into slices 
baé SBier/ thebeer; Sagerbier/ ». bitter beer 
SSairifd^eé S3ier/ ». Bavarian beer. 

18. SBeiil/ m. wine; SSJeifwcin/ white wine 

Sfct^weiiti xeå wine; SBrauntvoutVi in. pye-whisl^, påle 
brandy 
^c^nappg/ m. potato-wbisky ^_ . , . 

SDiofelwein, Moselle wine j Sat)e\uxDe\XVi 'ÖÄiWÄ.Äi.^siYSÄ 



APP. VIII.] WORDS Ain) PHRASES. 151 

Stmonabe/ /. lemonade; S3{fd)of/ m, a fayourite beverage 
Cbftmeinf cider; cin ®la« fcifd)e« SBaffcc/ (or frifd^cn 
SBa Iferé/ in literär^ lanffuage), a glass of &esh water. 

19. jDaö fSeinglaö^ the wine-glass; ein ®lad SBetn/ a glass of 

wine 
bie ^ajferflafd)e# the water-bottle, carafe 
I)urfl ^abem or burjlig fetn^ to feel thirsty 
fetnen ^nvft l5fc^en/ to quench one's thirst 
SStttCf lan gen &it ju! Pra^help yourself , yourselyes 
®te t)ahen freie ^o9 unb llBo^nung/ you have board and 

lodgingfree. 



VI. J)aS SRittagScffcn, SKlttagSmat)!, dinner. 

ÄO. ^ann effen 0ie ju SOlittaö? 1 when do you dine ? 

@|Ten éite i^eute ju ^aufe^ obet ftnb @ie eingelaben? 

Do you dine to-day at home, or have you been iumed out to 

dinner? 
3c() ef e in einet Sftejiaurattonf I dine out, at a restaurant 
baé ®cti6)t, thedish (of food); bec erfle &anQ, the first 

course 
fDletne «^errenr hthUnen (Ste ftd). Gentlemen, helpyour- 

selves 
9le]^men ®ie oi^ne Qmli&nbe^ maö @te am Ueb|ien 

ejjfen^ take without ceremony what you like best 
t>U aifclÖ9cfcUfcl)aft or aafclgcfcUfcl^aft/ the dinner-party. 

21. SSaé wänfdjien ^ie^ mein gr&ulein? What do you wish, 

Miss? 

SBomtt foQ id) Sinnen aufrnarten^ grau €(olbfletn? 

What shall I help you to, Mrs. Goldstein? 
®ebcn @te mit gefdUigft ein wenid Stfd)/ ;^ecr t)on 
2(beléber0/ give me, if you please, a little fish, Sir (or Mon- 
sieur d') Adelsberg 

fecl^t/m.pike; ^arpfen^ m. carp; Jtabeljau^ m. cod 
oreUe//trout; ber S£ eller/ the plate. 

22. ©uppe/ /. soup; gleifd)fuppe/ gletfd^brfitje/ S^outUon/ 

soup made of meat, beef-tea, &c. ; ein ©uppenteller/ m, a 
soup-plate 
ber Sdffel/ thespoon;'9){e{Ter unb fabeln/ knives and forks 
'leifd^/ n. meat; SRtnbpeifc^/ n. beef 

•ammelfleifd)/ mutton ; ÄalbfCeH*) i -v^^ä. 

»d!)tt)eine^eif4)/pork; Sa»imfte\\d^»\a3rcÄi 
titte ^ a mmelfeu le/ a leg of mutton 
Sricaffee/ n. mince-meat^ liaah, coUoptt) Ss^ 



152 GERMAN ELEMENTABT GRäMMåR. [aPP. Yl 

23. Sratcili «i. poast meat; SRinberbratcn/ roast beef 
»öammelbratenf roast mutton; Äalbébratcn/ roast veal 
@d)n)etnebcaten/ roastpork; ©dnfebraten/ roast goose 

afenbraten/ roast hare; SBilbbratett/ roast venison 
lUbncrbratcn/ roast fowl; ©ntcnbratcn/ roast duck 
'r tf t unb trinf t ^Ut/ he lives well {Ht. eats and drinkswe 

24. ®e!oc^tC§ gleifd)/boiledmeat; robcé gleifd)/ raw, uncool 

meat 
ba« gettc/ or gettcé/fat; baé SRagere/or SJla9crcé/l< 
9Bt(bpcet/ n. game, renison; ®tfli}iQZlf n. poultiy 
etn Snbianet/ w. a turkey; bai SRö|lri|)pd)en/ themutt< 

chop 
etn @otelettd)en/ ». acntlet; ä3efte!/ ?». beefsteak 
etn flacbei: SSellet/ a meat-plate, flat plate 
t)orUcien/ trand)iren/ to carve; etn Sranci)irme{[er/ ?» 

carving-knife. 

25. -Daé ®cmÖfC/ the vegetables ; ^oi)h m. cabbage 
SBurjeln//. carrots; SBlUmcnf obO w. cauliflower 
ÄartoffelHf/. potatoes; neuc/ alte Äartoffcln/ new, 

potatoes 
oröne @rbfen//. greenpeas; SBobnen//. beans 
Ärtifd^of en/ /. artichokes; ©pargel/ w. asparagus. 

26. ©ålat/ m. salad; SRuben/ /. turnips (SDJo^rröben) 

äwicbelrt/ /. (vtUg, ^ipoUcn)/ onions ; ©ffig/ w. vinegar 
@enf/ m. mustard; ^feffetf m. pepper 

©alj/ n. salt; De!/ ». oil; @in9cmad)teé/ or baé @in( 
m a d) t e / preserves, pickles. 

27. |)ofleten/ j>^. /. pastry; cine ^or tc/ apie 
9Äeblfpeifen/ /. j?/. farinaceous food ; ^ubbing/ w. puddini 
Älöfe/ w. ^^. dumplings ; ber Städat ifd)/ dessert 

Obft/ ». fruit; 2Cepfelf w.^^. äpples 
SBirncH/ f.pl. pears; ^^PöUmen/ /. W. plums 
2Cpri!ofen/ /. apricots; ^^firficjen/ /. peaches. 

28. ■Äirf(i)en/ /. cherries; ge igen/ /. figs 
^aftanicn/ /. chestnuts; Sfluffe/ /. nuts 

£ a m b e r t é n ö ff^' ./• filberts ; »^ a f e I n ö ffe/ /. wood-unts, hazel-n 
aSeintraubcn//. grapes; SKanbeln//. almonds 
ipfel fl nen//, oranges; ét tro nen//, lemons. 



VII. 2)cr S^CC, tea. 
-^Ä ^^r ^Jl^ee t/l ganj ferti^» tÄ». \a (\mtft ready 

S^an erwattet @te/ they are -wavtAii^ iox -j w3l 
3(6 i om me fdf^on/ 1 am coming, a:ViT\s\i^. '^ä^ \^\^^ '^\>^ 
/ foUow yoxL 



APP. VIII.J WORDS AND PHRASES. 153 

bte Zi^tttanntt ber S^eetopf^ the teapot 

SKeinc SDamcn^tfl 3^ncn ber S£bec rcd)t/or naå) S^rcm 

©efcbmacfe? Ladies, is the tea to your taste? (St tfl aué^ 

de2eic()net. It is excellent. 

30. @ie fönncn xoot)l nod) ctnc SSaffe n^^meti/ surely, you can 
take another cup 
3c^ banfc 3^ncn/ iåj ^abc trrt ; T?n c^tf^aht (or ges: 
trunfen) unb idj trinfe niemau me^r/ thank you, I 
haye had three cups, and I neyer drink more 

SalTen @te ben S^ee jte^en^ er ^at nocb niö)t gesogen/ 

let the tea draw a little, it has not stood long enough 
haé SS^cebrett^ ber ^rdfentirteller/ the tea-tray 
gröner S£l()ee/green tea; fd)n>arser S£]()ce/ black tea 
^atfert^ee/ imperial tea; baé S^ee^^erotce/ thetea-service, 

tea-things 
sOUontagg tft 2CbenbdefeUfd)aft bet xf)m/ on Mondays he 

has an evening party 
@tne mu[t!aUf^e 2(benbunter^altung/ une soirée mnsi- 

cale. 



Vin. JttetbungélitidEc för |) er ren, artides of dress 

for gentlemen. 

31. ©er ^Ut, the hat; bie ^\Xt[å)aå)Uh the hat-box 

ber gilj^ut/ thefelthat; etn fdi)ttjarscr ^ut/ a black hat 
etn grauer ^ut/a whitehat; etn fetbener «^ut/a silkhat 
bte SKö^C/ thecap; blc 9lc{femÖ|e/ the travelling-cap 
etn runber ^ut/ a wide-awake; bte ^ac^tmö^e/ the nightcap. 

32. jDer ,^ragen/ thecollar; ba^ «f)a(étud)/ theneckcloth(8Carf) 
eine ^raoatte^ ^^alébtnbe/ etn ©d^ltpef/amade-np tie 
hiz SBefte/ the waistcoat, vest 

leinene Äragen/ linen collars; reine/ or 9ett>afdS)ene ÄraQcn/ 

clean collars 
S3etn!Ieiber, trousers; etn $aar S3etn!Ietber/ a pair of 

trousers 
«f)ofen^ pl. breeches (vulff,); «f)ofentrd9er/ pl. braces. 

83. @tn ganjer ^Cnjug/ m, a complete suit 

ber 0tod/ the coat; etn langer !Roct/ a frock-coat with long 

skirts 
bie 3öcfe/ the jaeket; ber Ueberrocf/ the great-coat 
ber gracÉ/ the dress-coat; zin Za^å)tntuå)t n, a pockat- 

handkerchief 

feibene Zafd)entiJid}tXi pl, silk \iMi\Leit\i\^i% 
baé^embf theshirt; SSor^cmbexi» ÄiVt^-ixoTÄÄ 
fertige ^pembettf ready-made eiVnxta. 



154 GERMAN ELEKENTART 6RAMMAR, [aPP. Vm. 

34. gcinene ^cmbcn/ linenshirts 

JCaltfo/ or baummoUene «^emben/cotton shirts 

@trämpfe/ m. 8tx)ckmg8; ©octeitf /. socks 

etn 9)aar«f>anbf(^u^e/apairof gloves; ®lacés«^atibfii)a]^e/ 

kid gloves 
©tiefcl^ m. boots; @cftu^C/ f». shoes; 9)antofeln/ «. 

slippers; ^amafd^en/ /. gaiters; etn @d^lafro(t^ m. a 

dressing-gown 
etne S3rtt^nabel/ abreast-pin; etne S^udinabel/ a scarf-pin 
etn ^nopf/ ?». abutton; ber ERegenfd^irm/ the umbrella. 

IX. JElctbuttggflucfc unb Soilcttegegcnffdnbc fur 

Sam ett/ articles of dress and toilet for ladiea. 

35. ^aé ^letb/ the dress; etn @c^lepp!letb/ along dress 
bte ®d^Ieppe/ the train; bad @ofiiim/ the costume 
baé ^leib aufne^men^totake the dress up 

bec 2CermeI/thesleeve; boöSeibd^en^ bte S^aiUe/ the body, 

bodice 
ber Unterrocf/ the petticoat, le jupon 
bad ^trumpfbanb/ the garter (Order of the Garter/ bet 

^.^ofenbanborben) • 

cin Stocf/w. gown, frock (for children) 
baé s^égligé, moming attire; ber SWorgentod/ or bo^ 

9lé9lt9é:;^ieib/ a morning- (the moming-) dress 
ha^ @orfet/ bte ®d)närbruflf thecorset, stays; berS^efa$« 

the trimming; txi^ ^emb^ or grauen^emb/ thechemise. 

36. jDaö ^aUtud)/ theneckerchief ; ber (^ärtel^ thegirdle, belt, 

waistband; bte ®d)drpe/ the sash; \><jl^ ^^emifet/ the 

chemisette 
ber dragen/ »^aléfragen^ the ooUar, la eolkrette 
bte ^(kXitxVLt, baö fOldntelc^en/ fDlanteUt/out-dooTJacket, 

little doak . 

ber @d)aml/ \>at Umfd^ladetud)/ theshftwl 
ber ^anitlt thecloak; bte @d)är}e/ theapron 
Seugfd^u^e/ shoes made of cloth ; Se berf(lt)U$e/ shoes made of 

leather 
^albfltefel/ ^amafd^enfliefel/ half-boots. @ie brau^t 

etn ^aar neue ^6)\x%Zt she wants a pair of new shoes. 

37. |>u|/ffli.finery; ber Äopfpu|/ bie (^oifföre^ the head-dress 
ber ^amen^ut/ the lad/s bonnet ; etn fetbener «^ttt/asilk 

bomiet 
©iefer fetbene ^ut fleibet S^nen (@fie) gut/ thk silk 

honnét suits you well 
etn &tvot)^\xtt a straw bonnet; ^axv^^i^tUxii cuffii 
ta$ S3anbf the ribbon; SB^Tibet»Tv\>\)o\Ä 
gemadhte S5l.unien# artiftcialfLo^eTO 
^/> .^att^e, thecap; eine au^U\)a\xloti^^»Äft«»ö- 



APP. VIII.] WORDS AND PHRASES. 155 

38. 3)er JCnotertf theknot; bic @c^UifCf thebow 

bie S3Ionbenf ®pi$en/ thelace; ber ®d)leter/ theTeil 
ber @d)muc(f hit ®d)mucf facken/ jewellery, ornaments 
bie jD^rringe/ the ear-rings; baö Ö^rge^&nge (bie ä3om^ 

melotten^ S3ommelnf t^.), theear-drops 
bie S3roci)e/ thebrooch; bad ^aUbanb/ theneddet 
bad 2Crmbanb^ thebracelet; ber IRing^ the ring 
hai ^iabent/ the diadem; ein @d)mucf(&ft4eR/ a jewel- 

box, box for jewelleiy. 



X. Da6 jQaax, the hair; bie SBafcbC; the linen, <&c. 

39. )Der grifeut/ the hair-dresBen 

eine ^ame friftten^'' to dress a lad/s bair 

ft(^ bad .^aar ma&^ttif to dress one^s hair 

bie ^aare f[ed)ten^ to plait the hair; bie ^aarfd^Ietfe/ 

bow for the hair 
eine ^aarfleci)te/ a plait of hair; ha$ »^aarbanb/ ribbon 
for the hair 

iepod)tene «f)aare^ plaitedhair 

»er ^djtiUU the parting; bie ^aatbörfie/ the hair-brash 
ber JCamm/ thecomb; tdrnmeiif aud(dmmen/ tooomb. 



t 



(Stne «f)aarnabel/ ahair-pin; bad «^aardl/ thehaipK>il 
bie ^omabe^ the pomatum; hii $arfiimeri'enf the 



^0. 

per- 
fumes, &c. 
®d)min!e/ /. paint, rouge ; fid^ fd^minBen/ to paint (the face) 
bet >^aarpfeil/ the arrow (fastening, &c.) for the hair 
hie Socte/ thecnrl; Socfen tragen# to wear enris. 



41. ^ie flB&fd)e/ thelinen; retne f&SL[å)t/ dean linen 
fd)mu^i0e aBdfd)c^ dirty linen; feine 2Bdfc^e# fine linen 
bie ^dfd)erin/ the washerwoman, lanndress 

bie fSdfc^e ^aben^ the washing-day; bic grofc 2Bdf(l)e/ 
the large wash 

n>af(^en/'* to wash. SS^ir i^aben ^eute hU Sfidfdj^e/ it is 
washing-day. 

42. (Sin gdd^er/m. afan; ber ©onnenfc^irm^ the parasol 

ber ^egenfc^trm^ the umbrella; ben Slegenfc^irm auf« 
fpannen/ to open the umbrella; ben ®å)itm iuma^en/ 

to pat down the shade, &c. 
ber fetielf the stick; IBifi'ten!arten/ Tisitin^-<iax<JA\ \i^\ 
@tui/ the case. 



156 GERMAN ELEMENTART 6RAMMAR. [aPP. VIII. 

XI. »^anbarbcitcn, ladies' work. 

(S^ld^arbcttcn jcbcr 2Crt/ needle-work of every kind. @tiefes 
reien/ embroiderj. ^^antaftearbeiten/ fancywork.) 

43. ^dBclarbcit//. crochet-work ; bdf cln; to do crochet-work 
®d)nurbd!clct/ /. crochet-edging; giletacbcit/ or Sfle^* 

arbeit/ netting 
gilct macben/ or gilct ftricfcit/ to net 
jfenupfarbcitf tätting; fnflpfcn/ to tätt 
g^tccbtarbcit/ plaiting; flccbten/ toplait 
@pi|enarbett/ lace-work. 

44. ©ticfcn/" to do embroidery (in the satin-stitch) ; @ti(f eret/ /. 

•mbroidery 
@ttcf muftetf n. pattem for embroidering ; ©ttcEgacn/ n. em- 

broidery-thread 
ndb^n/tos^^' bte9la()t/theseam; bet 9ldbttfcl)f thework-table 
SSeif jeU9 ndb^n/ to do plain needle-work 
bie 9ldbettn/ the seamstress, needle-woman ; Qer ^txé)i the 

stitch 
bie 9label/ bie 9ldbnabel/ the needle; bie @tec!nabel 

the pin. 

45. ^er 3n>irn/ the cotton-thread ; eine ^oåz^xoitxii a skeinor 

hank of thread 
ber S^ben/ the thread; ein gaben @eibe/ a thread, a needle* 

fal of silk 
ein S^ben SBoUe/ aneedlefalof worsted 
eine 2)od!e @eibe/ a skein or hank of silk 
ein ^nduel or @trd^n ^oUe/ a ball or skein of worsted. 

46. lOccgingerbUtfthethimble; baöSflabelfiffcn/thepin-cnshion 
bie Scbeere/ thescissors; ia^ ^labelgelb/ the pm-money 
bie 9labe(btid)fe/ the needle-case; fc^neiben/ to cnt; 2U« 

fcbnetben/tocutout 
ftritfen/'' toknit; baé ©tricfjeuö/ the knitting-work 
ber ©tricfbeutel/ ©tritfforb/ the knitting-bag, basket. 

47. jÖie ©tricfnabeO theknitting-needle; ©tticfgarn/ ».knitting- 

wool 

\)xt SÄafd)e/ the loop; eine a^afcbe fallen laffen/ to let 

down a loop 
bie SKafd^e »iebcr aufne^menr to take up the loop 
hit fOtafd^e abnel^men/ tocastofftheloop. 

48. @triimpfe ftricfen^ to knit stockings 

©trömpfe flop fen/ to dam stockings; bie @topfnabelf the 

daming-needlo 
ein 2Crbeité!örbd)en/ «. awork-basket 
fpinnen/ tospin; baé @pinnen/ n. spinning 
plåttettf bägeln/ to iron; \>cit ^Idtteifen/ SStigeleifen/ 

tbeiion. 



APP. VIII.] WORDS AND PHRASES. 157 



xn. £te SSage ber SQod^e/ the days of the week. 

49. @onntag/ ^ontaQ, IDtenjlag/ ^ittxood^t jDonnerflagf 
Steitag/ ©onnabenb. 

2)tC SBionatc, themonthg. 

3anuar/ S^^ruat/ fOl&rg/ Zptil, SJtai/ 3unt^ 3uH/ 
2Cugu^/ September/ Octohct» 9lot)ember^ ^December. 



XIII. JBlumen, flowers. 

60. ^ie !Rofe/u therose; bte 9lel!e^ thepink 

bie SSulpe/ thetulip; ber Saémin/ the jessamine 

bte «f)9actnt$e/ the hyacinth; SSetgif meinnid^t^ f». forget- 

me-not 
iilUf f. the lily ; ,^ornb(ume^ /. the com-flower 
hit ^vimilfihe primrose; baé ©4nfeb(ämd)en/ the daisy 
bie fStaihlumtf the May-flower ; bie Élaloe/ themallow. 

61. hie ^larctfTe^ thenarcissus; !Rofen|lrauc^/ m. therose-bush 
baé SRo fe no I att/ the rose-leaf; bie Sldttet/ theleaves 
bie S3liit^en/ theblossoms; bie ^nofpen/ the buds 
@amen/ 9». seed; ber JCeld^/ calix 

bie @taubf&ben//t^. dust-threads ; the stamen which produces 

the pollen; ber S3lumenftiel/ ©tengel/ the stalk, stem 
SSIumenbeet/ ». flower-bed; SSlumentopf^ w. flower-pot. 



xrv. SSSgel, birds. 

ö2. JDie gerdbe/ thelark (awitfd^ert) 
bie @d)ttjalbe/ theswallow (j »it fd^ ert) 
bie (5ule/ the owl (fdS)reit) 
ber Äuctuf/ thecuckoo (fc^reit) 
ha€ SReblj^ufyn/ thepartridge(fd)reit) 
ber ^apaqti/ the parrot (p la u ber t) 
bie ^aåjtiQaUt the nightingale (fd^Idgt) 
hit 3Bad)tel/ thequail(fd)ld9t). 

53. JDer ©perling/ the8parrow(piept) 
bie @nte/ theduck (fd^nattert) 
ber diahii theraven(frdd^5t) 
ber ^a()n/ thecock (Irdi^t) 

bie ^enne/ ba^ ^u^n/ thehen^fowl (glucft/ gacfett) 
bie JiCiid)(ein/ the chickens (piepen) 
bie Zaixbif thedore, pigeon (airrt) 
bie Jirdl)?/ thecrow (f'(^)nja^t). 



( 



158 GEBMAN ELEKEMTART QRAMMAB. [aPP. YID. 

54. jDte (Slftzt, themagpie (fdbn>a(t) 

ber ©tordb/ the 8t<»rk ({ lapp ert) 

bie ©dnfe/ thegeese (fc^nattern) 

ber S^rutl^a^»/ 9)uter/ the torkej-oock (foUert) 

bad 9left/ thenest; ber ©efang/ thesinging 

ber @d)nabel/ thebeak; ber Slöget/ thewing 

baé ®efieber# the plumaga, f eatheis. 

XV. jt^XZtZ, animalfl; t)ierfufige S^icre/ qtiadrupeds. 

55. 2)er S3&r/ thebear(bru mm t); (tfl bnmm) 
ber ^unb/ tliedog(bettt); (ijl treu) 

bie Äa^e/ thecat (miaut); (ifl ^eud)tertfdii) 
ber aöolf/ the wolf (^eult); (ift aefrdfiay 
ber gud^é/ tiiefox (fUfft); (tfl Ufftö). ^ 

56. ^er 9:bxotf the lion (bröHt); (ift arofmfit^ig) 
bie eöwin/ thelioness (bröUt); (ift furc^tbar) 
ber Stiger/ tfce tiger (bröttt); (ip gcattfam) 

bie 9Raué^ themouse (pfetft/ piept); (ift nafcftl^aft) 
ber 2Cffe, themonkey (fd)reit/ éeult); (ifl gefcftitft). 

67. 3)aö ?)ferbf Bto^f thehorse (tt>ie|ert); (ifl ebel) 

hat @d^»ein/ thepig (grunjt); (ijl faul unb fdj^mttlig) 
ber efel^ the ass, donkey (fd^reit); (ift gebulbtg) 

^SI fatt t u^? t (^»«& («lt a*''»'*^» «""• 

b<r ^ammcO .thewether J i""l*>' 

58, jöte Siege/ thegoat (mecfert); (ift tjerwcgen) 

ber £)d)fe/ Oc^é/ the ox (bruUt); (ift langfam/ ab^r oft 

aud) miit^enb unb gefd^rlid)) 
baé .^anind^en/ tberabbit; ber «&irfd()# the stag 
bie ®emfe/ thechamois; ber (Slep^ant/ theelephant. 



XVI. Snfcften, insects. 

69. ©er ÄSfer/ the beetle (fttmmt); bie Ämeifer tke ant (ift 
9efd)dftig, fleifig) 
bie SSSefpe/ the wasp; bie Äiene^ thebee (ftid)t) 
bie Staupe/ the caterpillar ; bie ^ O tte^ the moth 

bie ^ixdCf the midge, gnat; hU ^eufc^rec!e# ber ®rad^ 
^ ii p f e r / the grasshopper. 

60« ©ie ©ritte/ bat ^eimd!)en/ the cricket (sirpt) 
ber iDl^rwurm/ the earwig; bie ^anje/ the bug 
bie @pinne/ the spider; ber ©Ametterling/ the tatterflr 

(fliegt) 
Peå: SHutmf thewornL(!rted^t). 



APP. VIII.] WORDS AND PHRASES. 159 



XVII. SSaumc, trees; ©trdud^e, ahruba. 

61. JDer Äpfclbaum^ the apple-tree 
ber öirnbaumf thepear-tree 
ber Äirfd)baum^ the cherry-taree 
ber 9>flaumenbaum/ the plum-tree 
ber |)ftrftd)baum/ the peach-tree 
ber iCpriBofenbaum^ the apricot-tree 
ber JCaftantenbaum^ the chestnut-tree 
ber geigenbaum/ thefig-tree 

ber ISallnuf baum# the walnut-tree 

ber 9lufbaum/ ^afelflrauc^/ the nut-tree(huel-nnt). 

62. JDer SBeinftotf/ or hit SBetnrcbc^ thevine 

ber ©tad)e(beerjlrau(i^ (ortfS5ufd)V the gooseberry-bush 

ber 3o^annidbeerflraud) (or«S3uf(i^V thecunant-bush 

ber ^tmbeerfirauc^/the raspbeny-bush 

bie Srbbeere/ the strawbeny 

bie @td)e/ theoak; bte ^Ud)e/ thebeech 

bie äirfe/ thebirch; bie Sinbe/ the lime 

bie 9^P)>cI/ thepoplar; bit SBeibe/ the willow 

hit (Stltf @f(^e/ tlieash; bte Zaxixitf thefir 

ber Qp\)t\x, theiyy; ber S3ud)ébaum/ the box. 



xvin. 

JBeorufungcn, ssdutations. »f)SfIid)lcit§formcln, 

pnrases expressing civilities, marks of attention, &c. 

^ ®uten fDlorgen! Good moming ! ©uten S^ag! Gooddayl 
©uten Äbenb! Good evening ! ®ute 9lac^t! Gk)odiiight! 
©uten ^orgen^ mein «^err. Gh>od morning, sir. 
®nttn borgen/ ^abamt (Srau ^oltfe^ mein Sr&u« 

lein). Grood morning, madam (Mrs. Mpltke ; Miss) 
3(^ tt>änfd)e S^nen einen gutcn SÄorgen! Good morning 

to you ! 
®itten Äag/ mcine ^erren! Good day, gentlemen ! 
©uten 2Cbenb^ meine barnen! Good evening, ladies l 
3d) toixn(å)t 3^nen einen guten 2Cbenb/ meine «^erren! 

Good erening to you, gentlemen ! 
2CbieU/ mein «|)err! Good-bye, sir ! Adien, mo^gienr! 
2Cuf SBieberfe^enl Au revoir! 3d) muf mié empfe^len. 

I must take leave, must go. 

64. ^ie befinben @ie fid)? ^ ^owdo you do? How are 

SBaö ma d)en @ie? *- ^ 



SBiege^fö? SBie jle^t*«« j ^^"^^ 



} 



160 GERMAN ELEMENTÄRT GRAMMAR. [aPP. VIII. 

2Bie ftcbt cé mit i^rcr ©efunb^cit? Howisyourheaith? 
©ic éefinbcn fic^ boc^ »o^l? I hope I find you well ? 
3d) banfe Sljncn/ fe^r wof)l Thank you, very well 
JDaé frcut mid)J lamgladofit! 

Unb toit act)t eö S^nen? 1 And how are vou ? 
Unb »ic ffc^t eö mit 3&nen?J ^na now are you r 



XIX. How to express the Time in German ? 

The quarters are expressed by looking forward to the next hoiir. 
Thus: 

A quarber past 11, eitt SStertel JW^lf 

Half-pastll, ^alb itoblf 

A quarter to 12, btet ^itxttl 3tt)5lf» 




161 



APPENDIX IX. 



Btt ^aigtt bon WBåbttitlo 

TCué bem @n9ltfd)en frei öberfe^t* 

®efd^td)te etneö ))^i(orop]^tfd)en SSagabunbeti/ ber 9ieu()ett fud^t/ aber 

feine Sufrteben^eit etnböft 

^aå) bcm 2CbcnbcjTen crbot jid^ SKabame Ärnolb t)6fliii)cr 
SBcifc, burd) dn paar 2)icncr ba§ SRcifcgcpacf mcineS 
@o^ne§ abbolen ju lafTen* @r le^nte eé anfangS ab; då 
fic ieboc^i barauf bcjianb, warb er ju bem ®c|idnbni§ gc:? 
n&tbigt/ ba^ ein Sldnjel unb ein @tab bte einjige ^abe 
wdren, bercn er [xå) auf ©rben rul&men !6nne» 

;,3iedbt fo, mein ©obn ! " rief idb* „2Crm f^aft 2)u mein 
|)au§ t)erlajTen, unb arm lel^rfl Du wieber jurucf, wie it^ 
fe^e* Dennod) jwelfle id^ må)t, bag 2)u ^iå) tucfctig In 
ber SBelt umgefelb^n i)a\t*^^ 

„3a, lieber SSater," erwicberte mein @ol)n# /,Docl^ bem 
®iucfe nacbjureifen, i|l nic^t ber SBeg, bajTelbe ju feffeln» 
Äud) l^ab' i* feit furjem biefe 3aflb aufgegeben." 

//Sd) filaube, mein |)err/' fagte 9Rabame 2Crnolb, ^,bie 
grjd^lung 3^rer Xbenteuer m&gte fe^r unterlb^tenb fein» 
Den erjien S^eil berfelben ^ab* id) t)on meiner 3liä)tz ge* 
\)oxU 3Benn @ie uné ba§ Uebrige mittbeilen wolltcn; 
wurben @ie bie ©efeUfc^aft fe^r t)erpflic^)ten/' 

,,53labame/' erwieberte mein ©o^n, „id) t)erficl^ere^ Sbr 
SSergnugen beim Su^oren wirb nid)t Ijdb <;^ ^s^^^^i \wjv* ^^ 



H^ «csaujr izxxnmxF fiUKKia. 



flét£iizt icsc Sr^äter. Sficf^ Ecrx ä* 35n«?i fs 



%A(s:ti^ £^ !»!7 :esc »c$ f± critec. Ctz$ cm ILigCaf 
wtécs^ Säes^r 3rm s^Iea Sgfrrr. wc ^sa^ & är 
di mA :äet zzt ^ttatnu. mnaa 9z!± foirtu <« aeif 

tfr Qccrtcttfrt ^ist, ten ok^ cnsccretr i± en tfm ii 
ter 3^cn^^; tnte tetf t«b fsf fdvca Si(c tta SctcB 
crrd-tt/ fo tenste :ic<r nrne nstf±trini«) wx± imr cmsiep 
fKfcfn^ t^i> nte ttrcr fhrffn Uftciu ITd cmca Smini 
tronterte id? tato tud» Smiten, raMnmiiicTt mi ten 
ni^dtn Xuq nåt ^th mc Hc S^, tie am SBcge ^t? 
fébtrtm* WtiA trhUitt ber (Scbonle, ta$ Crnibmi bfr »ihc 
Zri fet/ nw icecé Zolent avf Xio^dnnnis imb Sdotamig 
rec^cn hbxft* 

„fbti metncr 2(nfunft in Sonbon var c9 mcrac crfie 
iSorge, :&ein Smpfe^Iungéfdnrctbcn, (icber Sotcr, an nnfcni 
Settcr ab^ugcben, beffen Umfronbe fcbod) nti^t otd brffcr 
»aren a\h bte mrintgem ^ein crfler fXan »or, »ic X>n 
tOii%t, Unter(ei)rer an riner (^ulc ya wcrbcm 34 fngte 
ben Settfr beébalb um 9latlS^« (Sr (^6rte mrinra Sorfa^ 
mit SJ:^(n an. St, rief er, ba§ ifi wtrfUd) etne fcb&ne 
fl3af)n, bie man 3f)nen ba oorgeteicbnet» ^ bin cinmal 
fclbfi Unterlebrer tn etner Aoftfcbutc 9en>efcn, unb nrill nrid) 
i)jngen (affen, n>enn ic^ nid^t lieber Unterfcblteger in9len^ 
flate f^ewefen n^^re* ^ru^' unb fpdt mugf tc^ auf ben 
IBeinen feln. Der Dircctor fcfenttt mir ftnjhe ©epcftter; 
fclncrjrau voox iåi V)ert)a§t wegen meiner |)aglid^eit ; t)on 
ben ®d)ultnaben n)arb x&i geplagt/ unb au§ bem S^\>Ht 
burft' id) nid)t, um t)6flid)ere Seute aufjufuc^* @inb @ie 
flbcr aud) {iberjcuflt, fca§ ©icftd) fur cine (Sd)ule etgnen? 
3cl) wiU ®ie ein wenig eraminircn* ^ahzn @te ffc^ ju 
bcm Wefd)(5ft t)orbcreitet? — 9lein! — Dann taugen gic 
aud} nicl)t fur bie @:t)u\^ &&wxv^xi <2ie b^n Änaben bi 



APP. IX.] iDcr 9>rcbi9<r t)on SBafcficlb. 163 

^aaxt fd^neiben? — 9lein! — 3^ann taugcn @ic nid)t fur 
bie ®d)ulc» |)aben @ie bic S5Iattcrn ge^abt? — 3flcin! — 
2)ann taugcn @ic nic^)t fur bic @4)u(c» Ä6nnen ©ic mit 
noc^ jwct 2Cnbern tn cincm äScttc fcblöfcn? — giein! — 
2)ann taugen @ie nimmermcl^r fur bie ©c^ule* «^öben 
®tc gutcn 2Cw>ctit ? — 3a ! — J)ann taugen @ie burd)^ 
auS nid^t fir bic ©dfeulc» 9lein, g^cunb, woHen ®ie ein 
leicl)teS, anftinbigcS ©cwcrbc trciben, fo t^erbingen @ie 
fi:^ jKben 3«^rc alS gel^rling bci cincm 9Scffcrf4)micb, um 
baS @d)lc{frÄb ju breven* Xbcr w>r bem ©d^ulmcijlcrlcben 
l^utcn ®tc M* X>oi}, wic i* fc^c, fui)r er fort, ffnb ©ie 
etn junger 9Rann t)on ®cijl unb ÄcnntnifTcn* SÉoIIcn @ic 
nidjt ©c^riftjicöcr wcrbcn, roit Id) cé bin? JDl^nc 3weifet 
werbcn ®ic gclcfcn ^)abcn, baf fSRdnncr t)on Scnic bobei 
t)cr]bu»g«rt ftttb; iå) will S^ncn abcr jel^t woW t^icrjig 
albcrnc a3urfc^)cn in gonbon scigcn, bic babci im Ucberflujfe 
lebcn — fdmmtlid) ct)rlid)c gcutc t)on gcwi^nlic^cm ©d^lagc, 
bic rul()ig unb gcbanfcnloS 4uf il^rcm ?)fabc fortwönbern 
unb mit grof cm SBcifall fiber ®cfdbidt)tc unb ^oUtif fc^reibcn 
— STOenfc^cn, fag* ic^ Sinnen, bic, wenn jtc ©c^uflcr gc^ 
wdtbcn warcn, S^itlebenS ©c^ul^ gcflidft, hoå) nic ein paax 
neue gemac^t l^aUn tvurben* 

ff3^ falS> «itt^ t>Ä^ ber ©tanb cine§ Unterle^)rer§ wcnig 
ebrcnwUeö \)atU, unb befc^log ba^er, feinen SBorfc^lag 
anjunc^mcn^ Sa iå) t)or ber giteratur ben l^ftc^fien JRcfpef t 
Ibatte, fo begrugte fc^ bie antiqua mäter in ©rubfireet mit 
2Ccfetung» JRu^mwU fdS)icn mir^é, cincn ?)fab ju betreten, 
«iff bem J)rpben unb !Dtwa\) oor mir gcwanbelt. SBirflic^ 
bctrad)tcte ié^ bie ®ottin biefer JRcgion aU bic SRuttcr aUe§ 
SEreffIi4)en, unb roenn aud) baS geben in ber gropen SBelt 
ben aScr|ianb aufflårt, fo ^ielt iå} boc^ bie Ärmutl^, bie miä) 
umgab, fur bic 2Cmmc be6 ®enieS» grfuflt t)on biefen 
Ocbanfen, glaubte id) ju finbcn, bag aufSeiten bc§3rr*: 
l^um§ noc^ ba§ äScjlc ju fagen fci» Set) b^W^^^^ *^^^^» 
ein SSuå) ganj neuer 3trt ju \&xu\itxv» ^w "^wScv.^^^^ 
(Scbarffinn fteate id) brei parat^o^e <^l\^ a>\\ . ^\^ "^^^ ^^^^' 

m2 



164 GERMAN ELEMENTÄRT GRAMMAR. [aPP. IX. 

aUx bod) neu waren» 2)ic gbelficinc ber SBa^^r^eit waren 
fd)on t)on Änbcrn fo l&dufig ju fSRarftc gcbra:^! worben, 
bag mir nid)t§ ubrig blfjeb^ al§ fc^immernbc 2)ingc öU§5U:f 
frömen, bie in ber Jerne einen (Sd)ein t)on Scbtlb^it battem 
3{)r ^immel§mdd)te fjnnf eé mir bejettgen, welcfee einge^ 
bilbete 3Bic^tigfeit meine geber regierte, fo lange ic^ fdbneb» 
Sel) jweifette nic^^t im minbeften, ba^ bie ganje gele^rte 
SBelt jTd) rujien werbe, mein ©pjlem ju wiberlegen, unb 
iä) wax bereit, eé mit ber ganjen gele^^rten SBelt aufju* 
nel^men» 3"fömmengefrummt wie ein Sgel, l^ielt i^ jebem 
©egner einen geberfiel cntgegen/' 

„®vLt, mein Sol^n!" entgegnete iå), „Vint> waS »ar 
ber ®egenjianb Deiner Äbbanblung? 2)ie SBicfetigfcit ber 
9}?onogamie wirb Dir l^offentlic^ nic^t entgangen fetii. 
3fber i* unterbrec^e 25id)! grjdbte weiten ©u gabjl 
alfo 35eine paraboren Sdfee ^erau§? Unb xva^ fagte bie 
gelebrte SBelt ju 35einen ?)arabo):en?" 

„8ieber SSater/' erwieberte mein ©o^n, ,/bie gele^rte 
SBelt fagte gar nid)t§ ju meinen ?)arabo):en, burdböué nici^tS, 
liebcr SSater! Seber war befc^dftigt, feine greunbe ober 
fti) felbfi JU loben ober feine Jeinbe ju t)erbammem Un^ 
glucflicber SBeife i)atU ic^ weber greunbe noä) Seinbe, unb 
fo erful&r idb bie graufamjie aller ©emutl^igungen — iäi 
wurbe gar nidjt beadjtet» 

,>3i} föp etnc6 Sage§ in einem Äaffee^aufe, in ^ai^ 

benfen tjerfunfen uber baS ©d)icffal meiner ?)arabo):€n» 2)a 

trät ein Reiner SRann iné Sini"^^^ un^ f^fete jic^ mir gegen^ 

uber* 2(u§ einem einleitenben ®efprdc^) merfte er balb, 

bap iåi jum gelcl^rtcn ©tanbe geb&rte* ér jog ^ierauf ein 

^acfet ?)rdnumeration6li|len bcrt)or unb bat mid), auf eine 

neue 2tu6gabe be§ ^roperj, ben er mir 2fnmerf ungen ^erau§^ 

geben woUte, ju unterjeidjnen» J)iea ®efud^ jog notfi^ 

TOcnbig bie erfldrung nai) jti), bag ii) fein ®elb t)abe, unb 

t/eé &effdnbm^ ful)rte it)n ju ber grage, t)on tt>eld)er Ärt 

me/ne Srtvartun^en »dr en. %\^ w \axv\i, ^a^ (ic ni*t 

Sro^er waten alé meine ^hx\Zs xu\ ^x ; ^^ \^V m\jv.,\i^% 



APP. IX.] >Der 5>rcbt0er oon SBafefielb. 165 

8onbon3öncn nodfe fremb ifl» ©ic fotten cincn S^bcil ber 
^auptfiabt fcnncn lernen* ©c^en @ic bicfe ^tånixtmxa^ 
tionSlijien! SSon bcnfclbcn babe tc^ jwålf Sal^rc fe^)r be^s 
qucm gelebt» 3n bem Äugenblicfe, alS cin ebclmönn t)on 
fcincn Sicifcn iuxhdhijxt, obcr cin JEreoIc au§ Samaifa, 
obcr cine rcid^c SEBittwc t)on ibrem ganbjil^e anlöngt, pflej' 
iå) fogleicfe mcin ©ubfcriptionSnefe auSsuwcrfen* Sucrjpt 
bclagerc idb ll^re »g)erjcn mit ©d^meic^elei, uhb bann bring 
i* mit mcinen ^rdnumcrationSgcfuc^cn in bic SSrcfdbe» 
©ubfcribiren fte foglcid), o^nc jtc^ ju wcigcrn, fo bctrifft 
mcinc jwcitc JBitte tin 2)ebication6tf»^onorar» SP ntir 
bic§ jugcflanben, fo l^interge^c id) fie nod^mal6, inbem iåj 
lianen t)orfp!e8ele, ic^ »oflc il)r SBappenfdfeilb t)or ba§ SBerf 
in Äupfer (lec^cn laffen» 2(uf bicfc SBcifc, fubr er fort, 
kbc ié^ t)on ber eitel!eit biefer 9Renfct)en unb lad^e fie 
obenbrein au§# 25oc^ unter uné gcfagt, ii} bin fdton ein 
wenig ju bcfannt, unb eé wurbe mir fe^r angene^m fcin, 
wenn ©ie mir S^r ©eftc^t ein wenig borgen woUten* So 
cben iji ein tjorne^mer Sbelmönn auS Stalien jururf gcf cl)rt, 
mein ®efid)t i|l feinem SK^firjie^er fc^on ju befannt» SBenn 
©ie aber bie§ ©ebic^t ^infragen wollten, fo fefe' id) mein 
?eben jum ?)fanbe/ bag wir unfern ^xvzd erreic^cn, unb 
bann tl^eilen wir bie SSeute/' 

„£) ^immel!" rief iå). ,,®eorg, iji bieS baå ®efd)d;t 
ber l^eutigen 2)id)ter ? Äonnen 9Rdnner t)on fo au§gejeid)s5 
neten SKalenten fic^ erniebrigcn biå jum SSetteln ? Äonneit 
fie it)ren 83eruf fo ^erabwurbigen, bag fie i^ren 3lut)m 
gegen ein elenbeS ©turf S5rob tjertaufd^en ? " 

,,9li^t boå), lieber SSater," tjerfefete er. /,ein ujabrcr 
^iå)Ux fann nie fo nicbrigbentenb fcin ; baS éenie ifi fretå 
mit ©tolj gepaart» Die 9Renfd}cn, tjon benen id) l^ier rebc, 
pnb nur armfelige SSerébrec^éler» SSBie ber wa^re 2)id)ter 
um be§ JRubmeS witten jebem ©rangfal SJrofe bietct, ^<5k 
f\xtå)Ut er pd) aud) t)or ber SSeraijtuxv^* SSl\xx xö^x \^v^^^ 
®4)ué verifient, erniebrigt \iii), um \\)xv ^\x ^xVXX<\x\* 
//^^ /fiJ/i/ m/c^ ju folc^cn giU\)«Ua4)l\^^V^w \^x^>>^^^^ 



166 GERMAN ELEMENTÄRT 6RAMMAR. [aPP. IX. 

JU laiTcn unb gIetd)n?ol)( in etner ju befd)rdnf ten Sage, eincn 
ixvzitzn 2Cu§fIu(^ nad) fStui^m ju n^agen, roat iå} ju einem 
SDlittelwcgc genotl^igt» 3^ mugtc um'å SBrob fd)rciben, 
taugte icbod) nic^t ju einem ©rwevbe, bei welcbem nur burcb 
gleigi ein gunjtiger grfotg Ibcrbeigeful^rt werben !rtnn* 2)ie 
lj)eimlic^e ©ebnfudbt x\aå) äBeifatt t)ermod)f id^ nidbt ju 
unterbrudPen unb V)erfd)tt>enbcte einen grogen Xf)zxl mciner 
3eit mit bem ©treben nad) SSoUenbung in meinen Xrbeften^ 
bie nur wenig 9laum auSfuUten» SQäeit \>ort^eiIbafter t^tf 
iå) mii) mit fleinen ®d)riften t)on ergiebiger SKittelmafigs! 
feit befd)dftigen t5nnen* SBcine Heinen TTbl^anblungen 
»urben baber, unbeadjtet unb ungefannt/ balt fortgeriffen 
t)on bem ©tram ber SeitWriften* 2)aé ^ublifum batu 
tt)id)tigere ©efd^dfte, alå böfi e§ bie ©infa^b^it ober ®z^ 
wanbtbeit meine§ ©tt;lS unb ben SBoblflang meiner ^erioben 
håtu hzaiitzn fotten^ gin .^eft nadb bem anbern »arb ber 
SSergeffenbeit ubergeben* 9Reine aSerfudbe locrloren ft:b 
unter .2Cbbanblungen uber bie greibeit, unter morgenldns^ 
bifcbe(n) ©rjdblungen unb unter ©dbriften uber bie »^eiiung 
ber |)unb§n)utb* Wlautixé, ?)biIaIetbeS, 9)bileIutberoS 
unb ^bi^öntbropoé fd)rieben aHe beffer a(S id), tvzil fie 
fcbneHer fd)rieben» 

,,3* gefeate mi* aamdlig blogi ju @d)riftfleaern, bie, 
wie iå), bittere grfabrnngen Qzmaö:it betten. @ie lobten, 
bcRagten unb f^mdbtcn jid) unter einanber» ©aå äSer-* 
gnugen, ba§ fte an ben SBerfen berubmter ©4)riftfleBn 
fanben, war umgefebrt ibr eigneS SSerbienfl* 3i) bemerfte, 
bag bie ®eijie§gaben 2Cnberer mir nicbt geffelen* 2)ur(i 
meine unfeligen ?)arabo):en war biefe auelle beé SBergnugenS 
fur midb gdnjlicb auégetrodPnet* SBeber im gefen, nocb i«n 
©cbreiben fanb id) JBefriebigung ; benn frembe SSorjuge 
waren mir ein ®reuel unb @cbrift|leUerei nur ein »^anb^ 
wert 

,,SSetfunhn in biefe buftetti SBdxa4)t\xa<ieu, (ag id? eine^ 
3:a3eé auf einev SSant im ©t» Säw^^^^^x^* '^ql xyJxVxvt 
/2q!> mit ein jungev aRann t)ou ®taxvX)^, m\X 'tiwa *\^ <x\x\ \wx 



APP. IX.] )D«r >prcbigcr t)on SBafcficlb. 167 

• 

UniDcrfttdt t)ertrautcn Umgöng 9cl)abt lf(itU* 3Bir bcgru§ten 
un§ mit einiger SBerlegenl^ett» 6r fd^drntc fi^ beinal^c ber 
fficfanntfcfcaft cinc6 !Kcnf(*en, ber fo drmlidS) auäfalb, unb 
icb furd^tete jurficfgewicfen ju werbcn» Siefer Ärgwobn 
toon meiner ©eite t)erfd)n)anb inbefi balb, benn im ®runbe 
roat ©buarb SbornbiU ein gutmfitbiger ?!Renfcb/' 

„SQ3aö fagji ©u ba, ©corg? ' unterbradb iå) ibn» 
,,SEbombitt W^ er? 2)ö6 fann wabrlidb Sliemanb anber^ 
fein atö mein ©utéberr*" 

,,5Bfe?" rief grau 2(rnolb, ,,ift pm SEbombiH efn fo 
naber Slacbbar tjon Sb^en ? 6r iji ein alter greunb unfereö 
^aufe§ unb wir erwarten in Äuriem feinen äSefuc^/' 

„9Beineé greunbeé erfie ©orge/' fubr mein @obn fort^ 
,^gtng babin^ burdb einige feiner eigenen eleganten JCIei^ 
bungSftucfe meinem 2teugern ein t)ortbeilbaftere§ Änfebn ju 
gcben» ^ierauf warb id) b^Ib al§ greunb, b^lb alé Unters» 
georbneter t)on ibm jur Safel gejogen* 9Rein ®efd)dft 
bejianb barin, ba§ icb ibn in Xuctionen begleftete, ibn in 
gute gaune t)erfefeen mugte, wenn er ftcb målen liegi, unb 
bag id) Ibm jur ginfen im SBagen fifeen mu%tt, wenn ber 
?)lafe nocb md)t burcb einen 2Cnbern befcfet roar, Sugtcid) 
iaif id) ibm manien tollen ©treid) auSfubren, wenn ibn 
cben bic éuji baju anwanbelte» Jtu^erbem bott' icb nocb 
iwanjig anbere Heine ®cfcbdfte im ^aufe» 3cb mugte un* 
aufgeforbert mandbe Äleinigfeit beforgen, ben Äorfjieber 
j!et§ in ber Safcbc trägen, ?)atbcn|leae bei beS ^ettermeijierS 
Äinbern t)ertreten, jingen, wcnn icb baju aufgeforbert warb, 
babei ftetä bei guter gaune fein, immer untertbdnig unb wo 
måglicb jufrieben* 

/^3n biefem gb^^enpoflen blieb id) jebodb nid)t obne Slebens: 
bubler» ein ©eecapitain, ben bie Slatur fur meine ©telle 
gefcböffen ju babcn fcbien, fud)te mi^ bei meinem ®6nner 
JU t)erbrdngen. Seine SKutter war SSJdf^erin bei einem 
\)ornebmen »g)errn gewefen, unb er tjotu XicCc^^x X-^-^x^^^ 
®ef4w7tf(f ^efunben am Äu^p^eltv uxv^ cca ^voxcccc^Vxc^^* 
Xie ^auptaufQabi fcineS gebenS aaU t)u\^xa^xxx^'^'^^^'^ 



168 Gl^RJfAN ELEMENTÄRT GRAMMäR. [aPP. IX. 

Panntfcbaft mit 8orb§, unb wcnn auå) ntand^e berfclbcn ibn 
feincr I)umm^cit wegcn fortgewicfcn \)atUn, fo fanb er boij 
aud) mk, btc cben fo einfdltig warcn, »ic er, unb ibni 
baber feinc Subringlicfcfeft t^erjieben* Sclimcl^clei wax fcin 
©ewcrbc unb er tricb e§ mit ungemetner geid^tigJeit unb 
®cn:anbtl)eit 3å) öber benabm mid^ Unfifd) unb fieif, unb 
ba meineé ©onneré »Bång jur ©i)mefc^elef ficl^ taglicb tjer^s 
mebtte, td) jeboc^ feine Jfe^ler ftunblidb me^r einfal), fo Wörb 
ic^ immer abgenetgtcr, micfe feinem SSSillen ju fugen* 

„9Re^r a!é einmal xvax iå) entfd^loffen, bem Sapftain ba§ 
gelb gutwillig ju raumen» SKein greunb fanb inbeffen 
SSeranlaffung, |tc^ meineé JBeijIanbeS ju bebtenen, ber in 
nic^tS ®eringcrem bejianb, alé bag id) mid) fur i^n mit 
cinem ^cxm fd^Iagen foUU, beffen ©c^wefier er angeblic^ 
beleibigt l^ötte» SSereitwittig erfuttte ic^ feinen SBunfd) unb 
obgleic^ ic^ fu^Ie, bap Su, lieber SSater, biefe ^anblung 
migbilligen wirfi/ fo tonnt' ic^) midb bodb nic^t weigern* 
gå xvax eine unerldglic^e greunbfd^aftSpfliic^t» 3å) uber^ 
nabm baber bie ©acbe, entwaffnete meinen ®egner unb fanb 
balb nacbbcr ju meiner greube, bag jene 2)ame nur cine 
2)irne unb ber a5urfd)e ein (Sauner unb Äuppler war. 
2)iefer greunbfcbaftSbienfl warb mir iuxä) bie wdrmjlen 
8Scrfid)er ungen ber 2)anfbar!eit t^ergolten» 9Rein greunb 
mugte in einigen SKagen gonbon t>erlafren* ©r wugte baber 
feinen anbern SS8eg, mir ju bienen, alS burdb ©mpfeblung 
an feinen ^i^zim, j^txxxt WMam SKbornbitt/ unb an einen 
anbern ©belmann t)on bob^m JRange, ber ein ^taat^amt 
befteibete* 2(l§ er abgereip, war e§ meine erfle ©orge, fein 
©mpfeWung§fd)reiben feinem ^\)^m ju ubcrbringen, einem 
50lanne, ber feineé red)tfcba|Tenen ©barafterS wegen aöge^ 
meine Xd)tung genog* ©eine S3ebienten empfingen micb 
aufS .^Sflicbjie unb SOBoblwottenbjie, benn ba§ SBoblwoHen 
ter ^errfcbaft pfliegt aud) auf baS ©cffnbe uberjugeben. 
^^^acl)bem iå) in ein gro^e§ ä^mmer gefubrt worben, »o 
Sen SSiiUiam balt> na^b^^ ex^djuw, vxVxxä^x' \^ Vcjw^ ^<xé 
^4^reiben, baS er foglcid) Uä» m^^^^ ^^'^»* '^^^^^ ^^ 



APP. IX.] ©er 9)rebi3er oon SBafefietb. 169 

naå} ciner ?)aufc t)on einigcn STOinuten, ,/fa3cn @ic mix 
bod) gefåUigjl/ waS ®tc fur mcinen 9lcffen ^tti^atif \xm cine 
fo warmc em^)fcl)lutt9 ju t^crbicncn? i^oi} icfe gtaubc 3fl)te 
SSerblenfic JU mat\)tn. @ic l)abcn jt^) fur i^n gefd^lagcn 
unb erwartcn icifet bafur JBelo^nung, bag ©ie baS SSScrf jcucj 
fcincr gafler gewcfcn ffnb» 3* witnfdje aufric^tig; bag 
ntcfnc Jel^tgc SSerwcigerung cinc fleine ©trafc fur S^r 
SScrgc^W fein mag; noc^ met)r abcr wunfc^' iä), bag @ic 
baburd^ jur JReue 9cful)rt wcrben m5d)tcn/' Sel) ful)ltc, bag 
i(t) bicfen aSerwciS, fo ^art er trär, tjerbicnt fiattc, unb crtrug 
i^n balter gcbulbig» SRcinc ganjc »g)ojfnun3 bcru^tc auf 
bem aSricfe an ben l^oben ©taatSbeamten* Da bfe SK^firen 
ber ®rogen fal! ttnmer t)on SSettlern belagert werben, bic 
il&re SBfttfdjriften anbringen woUen, fo warb eS mix f^wer, 
Sutritf JU crl)alten* Si) befla* inbeg bie 2)ienerfc^)aft mit 
ber .^alfte meiner vg^abe, unb fo warb id) benn enbli^ in ein 
geraiimigeé Sitnmer gefubrt» SKefn ©c^reiben »ar @r» 
»^errlid:fett fc^on fr&^er ubergeben worben» SBd^renb biefe§ 
éarrenS \)atV Ic^ ^inldn9licl)e SKuge, meine Umgebungen ju 
betradjten* 2CBeé war grogartig, prddt>Hg unb gefc^matfooU/ 
25ie ©emdrbe, bfe SKåbeln, bfe aSerji er ungen, MeS fliågte 
mir g^rfurc^t ein unb gab mir einen ^ol^en JBegriff t)on bem 
@igent^)umen 2Ccfe, bad^t' iå) be! mir, n)ie grog mug ber 
S5e|ilfeer afler biefer S)inge fein, ber STOann, ber bfe fdmmts: 
lic^en @taat§gefd?dfte in feinem ^opfe l^at; ber SKann, 
bcffen SBol^nung bie »^dlfte ber Sleicbt^fimer eine§ ÄSnig^ 
reic^S entl()dlt ! ©ein ®enie mug unergrunblic^ fein* 

„SBdbrenb bfefcr eI)rfurd)t§t)otten 85etrad)tungen \)itV lä) 
efnige jiemlic^) ftarfe gugtrftte» -— 2fcl^ ! ba6 wirb ber groge 
SRann fein! gé trär nur ein Äammermdbd)en» S3alb 
naå}f)zx \)bxt' id} abcxmal^ gugtritte» — I)aS mug er fein ! 
9lein, e§ war nur beS grogen SRanneS Äammerbienen énbrs 
lic^ erf^ienen @e* ^errticfefeit tbirttid^* ©inb ©ie, fpradb 
er, ber Ueberbringer biefeé JBriefS ? — S*^ w\\xci^xveyt ^«j5c^ 
einer tiefen »erteugung* — Sd) \^t Xjoxcojä, \^x ^x \^xx, 
fo vid, ba0 — in biefem Kuaex\\A\«^ mx^ti Vcfccs. x^^-^ wä« 



}-70 GERMAN ELEMENTART GRAMMAR. [aPF. IX. 

£)icner ein SSfUct fibcrrcicl)t, unb ol)ne ficb »eUer um micb 
)u betummcrn, cntfcrntc er jid^ öuS t)cm Sintwer unb licg 
mtr ]&inldn9ltd)e SRuge ju 85ctrad}tun9cn uber mcin ®lu(f* 
3ci) föb ibn nid)t wtebcr, bt§ mix cin 2)icncr Jagte, ®e» 
^errlid^lcit wottten fo cben in ben SOBagen ficigcn, ber wr 
ber %f)\xx i)alU. 3d) folgte il)m eiltg unb toereinigte meine 
©timme mit brei ober t)ier 2tnbern, bie, wic iå), getommen 
waren, um eine ©nabe ju crbitten* SK^Iorb voax jcbodb fur 
un§ )u f4)nett unb erreicbte mit grof en ©c^ritten ben ©d^Iag 
feineS SBagenS, wdbrenb id? it)n mit lauter @timme um 
eine Äntwort hat, @r fa^ fcbon im SEagen unb murmclte 
^txva^ t)or \iå), wot)on tc^ nur bie ^dlfte t)erjlanb* ©öS 
Uebrige »erlor fidb im SRafTeln ber SBagenrdber* Si) ftanb 
eine SBeile ba, mit t^orgcbogenem ^alfe, in ber SteUung 
eineS 3Renf(i^en, ber aufmerffam einem j^errli^en Sone 
laufcbt, bié id) midb umfal^ unb aflein ba flanb t>or (£r* 
^errlicbf elt ^auét^fir* 

/,9Reine ®ebulb/' ful&r mein ©o{)n fort, „roax nun gdnjs: 
lic^ tx\å)bpfU Sn SSerjweiflung uber bie taufenbfad)en ©r^ 
niebrigungeu; bie ict) Isatte erbulben muffen, befc^)log tc^ 
meinen Untergang; nur wugt' id) nod^ nid)t, weld^er 2(b* 
grunb mid) aufncl)men foUte» 34) ^iclt mi^ fur einé ber 
nid)tSwurbigen 25inge, tjon ber Slatur befiimmt, in ilbre 
?)olterfammer geworfen unb bort im 2)unW begraben ju 
werben* ©inc Ife^lbe ®uinee war mir nod^ fibrig geblieben, 
unb bie foUte mir, wie i^ meinte, gortuna felbjl må)t 
rauben* @idberl)eit§l)alber befd)Io5 id) ieboc^, pe augens: 
bticRic^ JU t^ertbun unb ba§ Uebrige bem ^ixfaU ju uberlaffcn» 
gRit biefem gntfd)Iug ging ic^i fort. Da traf ft*'ö, bög i* 
^errn 6ri§pe'§ JBureau offen fab* @§ fd^ien mic^ gleidbfam 
^n einem freunblid)en Smpfange einjulaben» 3n biefem 
SSureau giebt »^err Sri§^e ©r* 9Raiejidt fdmmtli^en Unter^ 
tbanen bie grogmittbige SSerbeigung einer jdbrlidben ©umme 
t)on/breigig ^funb, unb jwar gegen bie bloge 5Berppid)tun9, 
ber greil()eit fur immer gcbewobl ju fagen unb fi^ al^ 



APP. IX.] iDer 9)rebioer »on 3öa!cficlb. 171 

//Sc^ war frob, cinen £)rt gefunbcn ;\u l^aben, wo id) mid) 
toon mcincn Sorgen unD meincr SScrj^weiflung bcfreien 
lonntc» @o betrat idb bicfc 3^tlc, bcnn jtc glid) t)5ttig ciner 
gK5nd)§wobnung» 3* fanb eine TCnja^l armer ®efc^5pfe, 
bie fåmmtlidb mit mir in glcic^er gage waren* ©le erwar^ 
teten bie Änfunft beé ^ixxxi SriSpc unb jjeflten eln treueS 
S5ilb ber englifdben Ungebulb bar» ©§ waren jiSrrif^e 
©emutber, bie, entjweit mit bem ©c^icffal, beffen SÉiidfe an 
jid) felbjl rdd)ten» (gnblid) fam |)err SriSpe unb ba§ aflge^ 
meine SÉoben legte jtd)» ©r wiirbigte mi^ cineö JBlidfS, in 
b^m cin befonbereS SBobtwotten ju Uegen fd)ien» SBBirHicb 
war er feit einem 9Ronat ber erjle, ber mid) freunblidb ans: 
gerebet» ^aåi einigen gragen fanb er, bag i^ ju 2C(Iem in 
ber SSSelt tauglic^ fei» ©r fann augenblidti^) nadb uber bie 
befien SKittel ju meinem gortfommen, f^Iug \ié) t)or bie 
©tim, al§ bab* er fie gefunben unb augerte bann: man' 
fprdd)e jefet t)on einer ®efanbtfd)aft ber ®t)nobe t)on ^enn* 
fplt)amen an bie ©biföfanjrs^nbianer» ©r werbe feinen 
©influg benulfeen, mir bei berfelben eine ©ecrctairfielle ju 
t)erfclbÄffen» 

„3n meinem »feerjen uberjeugt, bag ber SKenfd) log, freute 
mid) bod) fein SSérfprecb^n, weil e§ fo prddt)tig fläng* ©br^ 
lid) tbeilte iå} baber meine balbe ®uinee» 2)ie eine ^dtfte 
tt)anberte ju feinen breigigtaufenb ?)funb, unb mit ber 
anbern befd)log iå) nacb bem ndd)jien SBlrtl^SI()aufe ju geben 
unb bort fro()er ju fein, al§ er» 

„SKtt biefem SSorfafe t^erlieg id) baS »f)au5» 2)a begegnete 
mir ein ©d^ipcapitain, mit bem i^ frfiber einigen Umgang 
gebabt batte» 3db fanb ibn bereit, mir ®efeUfd)aft ju leijlen 
bei einer äSowte ?)unfd)» 9lie batt' id^ aué meiner gage eir 
©ebeimnig gema^t unb fd)ilberte |te baber audb ibm» ©r 
t>erjid)erte mid), i* fiunbe am SRanbe beS SSerberbenS, »enn 
icb auf Sriépe*é SSerbeigungen baute, benn feine JCbficbt fei, 
mi^ an einen ?)flanjer ju t)erfau(exv» 'ItbnAvCcit vxV>x\.,\^ 
glaube, bagiSie auf »eit fuxictm ®>t<J!t "vx^ ^v^^^ o.^s^V^-^ 
^/:?m äJr(>&erwerb Derfdjaffcn tbuxvX^xv. ^vJ.^^x^^^^^^"^^'^^ 



172 GERMAN ELEMENTÄRT GRAMMAR. [aPP. IX. 

fRat\) ! STOein ®vi)iff fcgelt morgen nad) 2Cmjlcrbam» SBie 
voåx' e6, wenn @ic al§ ^aJTagicr mitgingcn? SSon bcm 
Xugenblttf an, wo ®ic an'§ 8;anb getreten ftnb, f)abcn @ic 
nid)té wciter ju tt)\xn, öIS ben s^oUånbern Unterrid^t im 
(gnglifc^en ju crtf)eilcn, unb id) jicljc 3bncn bafur, ©ic 
wcrben @d)uler unb ®clb in SRcnge finbcn» S^ fcfec 
t)oröué, fugte er l^inju, bög @ie ©nglifd) t^trjje^en, obcr ber 
SEeufel mu^te b'rin fi^en ! — 3d) beja^tc bieé jut)erftc!^tUc^, 
dugerte jebocb mein JBebenfen, ob ble ^oHdnber aucft 8uft 
l^aben moc^tcn, ©nglifd) ju lernen» 6r befrdftigte mit 
cinem ©c^wur, |te wdren ganj t^ernarrt in bic ©pracbe* 
2Cuf blefc 8Serpcl)erung bin nabm id) feinen 8Sorfd)lag an 
unb fd)ifftc mid) am folgenben SEage ein, um ben .g)otldnbern 
©nglifc^ JU Ic^ren» SBir betten guten SSSinb unb unfere 
gielfe roat lurj» iRac^bem id) mit ber »^dlfte meincr bewg:? 
Hc^en |)abe meine Ueberfabrt bejal)lt, befanb ic^ mic^, mie 
an^ ben SBolfen gcföllen, alé grembling in einer ber ^awpt^ 
ftragen 2tmjlerbamé* 3n biefer gage woQf iA) feineS^it 
\3crlieren, meinen Unterric^t ju beginnen» 3c^ rebete baber 
dn paax SSorubergebcnbe an, beren 2(eugefe§ mir am mcifien 
JU t)erfprecfeen f^ien» (SS war jebodb unmSglid)/ un§ ein^: 
anber ju t)erj!dnbigen. @rfl jelfet ftel mir ein, bag iå), um 
bic ^olldnber ©nglifd) ju lebren, jut)or \>on ibnen .^oUdn^: 
bif^ lernen mugte» SBie eé jugegangen, bafi idb ein fo ein^ 
(eud)tenbe§ »^inbernig uberfeben, ijl mir unbegreiflid), aber 
beéb^Ib md)t minber xoa\)x. 

„2)iefer ?)ran t>erfIog alfo im SBinbe, unb iå) bac^tc f^on 

baran, wieber nai) ©nglanb jurudfjufegeln* 2)a traf id) 

jufdttig einen irldnbifd)en ©tubenten, ber t)on gSwen jurudf^: 

febrte» Unfer ©efprdcb lenfte jic^ auf Hterarifc^e ®egen^ 

jidnbe ; benn, beildufig gefagt, tjergaf i^ immer meinc be^ 

brdngte gage, wenn ic^ fiber folc^e 2)inge reben !onnte» SSon 

meinem neuen JBefannten erfubr iå), bag an ber ganjen 

Unmrfitåt Såwen auå) nid)! jwu ?Kduner ju finben, ,bie 

^^r grfe(^ifct}en &praå)e mdd)t\8 waxexv* ^xV>wy!C\i^\^W, 

^e/cff/v^ i(^ fogkiå) naåj S&wen iu x^\\^xv, uxa \)^x\ \im 



APP. IX.] jDer 9)rebi9cr oon SBoteftelb. 173 

Unterricl)t Im ®ricd)ifcl)en )u Icbcn* 3n biefcm SBorfaft 
htfla^tu mid) mcin JBrubcr ©tubiO; ber mir ju t)erj!ei)en 
gab, baburd) finne ic^ mcin ©lucf maM^. 

„2(m ndc^jJcn SKorgen trät ic^ hd mcinc SBanberung an» 
?!Rit iebem SEage warb bic gap meiner bewegticben ^abc 
leic^tcr, wie c§ cinji Äefop ergangen mit fcinem jBroblorbc ; 
benn ii) beja^lte ben ^oUanbcrn mein 9ladbtlagcr mit mcinen 
ÄleibungSJiucfen» 3n ibmn wottt' iå) mid) nic^t bfidfen 
toor ?)rofcfroren» 3^ ging fogleic^ ju bem JRector felbft/ 
um i^m meinc SEalente ansubieten» 3d) warb t)orgeIaffen 
unb erbot mid) jum genrer ber griec^ifc^cn ©prad^e, wcil eé, 
wie xå) gel)6rt, ber Unitjerfitdt an einem folc^en mangle. 
Der giector fdjien anfangS meine ÄenntnijTe ju bejweifeln. 
3d) erbot mlc^ jebodt), ibn bat)on ju uberjeugen, inbem i* 
eine Seite aué einem tjon i^m ju wd^Ienben gried)ifclben 
2(utor in6 ?ateinifc^e uberfefeen rooHU* 2CIS er fib/ ba^ e« 
mir t)6(Iiger grnfl fei, fpra:^) er : SS8ie @ie mic^ bier feben, 
jungerSTOann, b^^b' id) nie ®riecbifcb gelernt, !5nnte audb «ben 
nicbt fagen, bag id) eS je t)ermif5t» 3^ b^be bie 25octor* 
wörbe erbalten, obne (Sriedbifct) ju verjJeben* 3d) befomme 
jdbrlid) jebntaufenb ®ulben, obne ©ried^ifd) ju \)er(leben» 
25a§ effcn fdbmecft mir, obne ba^ id) ©riecbifd) \)crjlebe, unb 
f «tj — fugte er binju — ba icb !ein ©riedbif* t)erjte^e, fo 
wugt' icb audb nid)t, bag e§ ju irgenb etwaS nufet» 

„Sw1) war jclfet JU xozit t)on meiner »g)eimatb entfernt; um 
an bie JRucffebr ju benfen unb befd)Iog baber »eiter ju 
wanbern» Scb t)erjianb etwaS STOufif unb b^tte einc leib* 
lid)e ©timme* 2BaS mir ebemalå jum SSergnugen gebient, 
tt>arb mir nun ein WtitUl ju gcbenSunterbalt» Scb trieb 
micb nun unter ben t)atmlo\zn flianbrifcben äBauern unb 
unter bem SEb^ir ber franj5fifdben ganWeute umber, bie arm 
genug waren, um fxbi)lx(i) ju fein* 3e drmer jie waren, bejio 
beiterer fanb icb fte*- Xam id> 2Cbenbö t)or ein JBauembauö, 
fo fpielt' icb einé meiner lujiigen giebet uwfe 'Ci^xS,'^^^^^^^ 
baburct) nicbt nur ein 9lad)tlaaet, \vixC^uxv cicsx^Xbc^^^^'^^'^'^^ 
ten nåd)flen ZaQ. ein paatmal xcao,X' \&5^ . ^^^ xi^'^'^^^^ 



174 OERKAK ^EHENTART GRAMMAR. [aPP. IX 

gcutcn JU fpielen ; fie fanbcn inbcg mcin ©picl ganj abfd)cutf 
Udb unb gabcn mix niåjt baö ©eringfic» £)ie§ mar mir um 
fo unbegretflicbcr/ ba inbeffcrn SEaf^en, wo id) blc SKujt! nur 
al§ giebböbcrci getriebcn, mein ©picl 2tflc, befonberS bie 
JJamcn, cntj&cf t battc» Scfet, wo c§ mcine ^ulfSqucUc nnir, 
cmpfing man mtcb mit SSeracfetung — etn SScwctS, wie 
gertng bie SS8elt Äolente fd)dfet, bur^ bic ber STOcnfcfe fein 
JBrobDerbfent* 

,,2tuf biefe SBeife fam id) bi§ ^ariS, in f cinet anbern 2£b^ 
ffc^t a!S mid) etn wenig umjufcben unb bann wieber »eiter 
JU wanbern* Sen ?)artfem finb bie gremben willfommner 
bie ®elb, al§ jcne, bie SBi^ b^ben* 3cb fonnte weber mit 
bem ginen, no^ mit bem 2Cnbern pxai)kn unb tcax baber 
nicbt cben ibr ©unjHing* 9lacbbcm icb t)ier bié funf Sage 
bie ©tabt burcbwanbert unb baS JCeuf ere ber fcbonjien »^dufer 
betracbtet l^atU, rfijlete id) micb, biefen gife feiler ©afjfrei? 
beit JU tjerlajfen* Xlé id? aber burd) eine ber |)auptjiragen 
ging, traf idb unerwartet unfetn SBetter, axi ben X>u mid) 
juerjl empfoblen» 25ie§ SBäieberfeben »ar mir fel()r ange? 
nebm, unb ibm, glaub' id), nicbt minber* ®r erf unbigte pcb 
na^ ber SSeranlaflfung meiner keife nad) ?)arté unb erjdbtte 
mir, fein ®efd)dft bejiebe barin, ©emdlbe, SKebaltten, ges: 
fcbnittene ©teine unb Äntifen ju fammeln fur einen ^txxn 
in gonbon,. ber etn gro^eé SSermSgen unb loermutblicb t)iel 
©efcbmacf bcffl^e» 3cb wunberte micb um fo mebr, ba^ 
meinem SSetter bieS ®efd)dft ubertragen worben war, ba er 
mid) of t t)erfid)ert, er tjerjJebe nid)t§ t)on folcben ©ingen» 
2fl§ id) ibn fragte, wie er fo plofelicb ein Jtunjilenner ge^ 
worben, t)erfid)erte er micb, eå fei md)t§ Ieid)ter» 25a§ ganje 
®ebcimnip liege in ber a5eobad)tung jweler Slegeln* grflené 
muffe man fteté bie 83emerf ung macben, baå ©eradlbe wurbe 
beffer auSgefallen fein, wenn ber SRaler fi:b ^txvaé mebr 
95ube gegeben; unb jtreitené muffe man unerfcbJpflicb in 
i>em gobe ber 2Berfe beS ^ietro ?)erugino fein; 2fber — 
0gte er t)inin — wie id) %^\vi\\ i\xv^ xxv^^xs^^xvTtxiwcifung 

^al> sur ©c(?ri ft/feOcrei, fo wxU \4) ®u vi^X u\in \i\^ ^vx^'^ 

i>clebren, (Semålbz in ^arié ciu^utau\ixv* 



APP. IX.] JOer f)rcbt9cr öon 2Ba!ef!clb. 175 

,/3cl) lieg mir bjcfen SSorf^lag gcfattcn, »etl er mcfneh* 
gcben§bcburfnifTcn ab^alf, unb barauf bcfc^rdnftc pd) jefet 
mein gönjcr é^rgeij» 34) bcfllcitetc ibn ba^cr Jn feine 
SBo^nung unb t)erbefTertc mft feiner |)ulfc meincn Xnjug» 
©ann ging iå) mit Ibm in bie ®emdlbct>crjleigcrungcn, bcf 
benen man auf bte ©nfdufe reidjcr Sngldnber ju recbneh 
IJflegte* 3c^ war nid)t wenlg erjiaunt åber feine SSertrotis 
licbfeit mit ?)erfonen tjom erften Slange, bie bel jebem ®es 
mdlbe, bei jeber 9RebaiUe ftd) auf fein Urtl^eil fififeten, wie 
auf eine untrfiglid)e Slid)tfd)nur be6 guten ©efcbmadtS* JBei 
folien ©elegenlb^iten wugte er meinen SSeijlanb gut ju 
benulen- SB8arb er um feine SReinung befragt, fo jog er 
mic^ febr widbtig bel @eite, alS frage er mic^), roa^ Ii) wo^I 
baju meine» 2?ann nabm er adjfeljuffenb eine fe^r ttuge 
9Riene an, unb begab ficb ju ber (Sefellfdbaft jurfidf mit ber 
SSerffc^erung, bag er in einer fo wic^tigen ©acbe fein ttrtbeit 
l^urudfb^ilten muffe» SKitunter fanb |id) inbef ein Änlaf ju 
einer jut^erffcibtlicfeen Sntfd^eibung» Sdb entpnne micb, gc^ 
feben ju l()aben, bag er, nad{)bem er bel&auptet, baé Solorft 
eincö ®emdlbe6 fei ju greH, febr bebdc^tig einen jufdttig in 
ber 9ldbe liegenben ^infet ergrijf, mit brauncm girnig in 
®egenwart ber ganjen ©efellfcbaft fattblutig uber baé ®z^ 
mdlbe binfwb'^ unb bann fragte, ob bie SEinten jel^t nidbt 
t)erbefTert wdren ? 

„2CIS mein SSetter fein ®ef*dft in ?)arié beenbet f)aite, 
Deriieg er micb, nacbbem er miå) jut)or mel()reren t)ornebmen 
^erren febr angelegentlicb aI5 einen jungen SRenfdben ems 
!pfobIen, ber befonber§ brauc^bar fel ju einem |)ofmeijler auf 
ateifen* ©ne folcbe ©teUe erl)ielt id) balb nadbber burcb 
dnen (gbelmann, ber felnen gRunbel nad) ?)ariS gcbrad)^ 
3i} foUte ibn auf feinen weiten Sleifen burcb ©uropa be^ 
gleiten* Ungeacbtet icb öber fein »^ofmeifler fein foUte, 
erbielt id) bod) bie SSSeifung, bag er p^ burcbaué felbji leiten 
burfte* Sfeein SSflling t^erjlanb fii) auf ^^\Xi<^,^\éJfJ^\^ xfi>Ä* 
Uå) mit beffer alé icb* SBon uuem§:iVx^ V^"^^"^^^"^"^"^^ 
J^atte er ein a?erm6gen t)on jwuma\\)\xxCöttX\Qi'vx\^^N:^ "^^"^^ 



176 GEBMAN ELEMENTÄRT GRAMMAR. [aPP. IX. 

gecrbt, unb um i^n jur SScrwaltung feineS ®elbeé ju U^ 
fdöigen, xvax er ju cincm Sa^walter in bie gc^rc gct^an 
»orben* ©er ©eij »ar fetne \M)rl)errfc^enbe 8eibcnfd)öft» 
Ätte feinc Sragen auf ber SHeifc brelfeten ^i) barum, »ie ®elb 
erfpart werben, n?ie man am wo^lfciljien reifen, unb ob man 
nic^t (ginigcS einfaufen Knntc, ba^ fic^ bei ber SlMfebr 
må) gonbon wieber mit 8Sortl()eil tjerföufen Uef e» SRerf^ 
wfirbigfeiten, bie man auf ber SReife umfonfi fe^en fonnte, 
»ar er immer ju betracbten geneigt; wo aber bafur bejabit 
»crben mugte, pflegte er ju åugern, man i)abt H)m gefagt, 
bie ©ac^e fei gar nic^t fel()en6n}ertb* ^lit bejabltc er feine 
IRed)nung, obne babei ju bemerlen^ baS SReifen fci bocb 
du^erji fojlfpielig ; unb bei aUebem war er nod^ nicl^t ein 
unb jwanjig ^a\)x alu Sn Citjorno mac^ten »ir cinen 
©pajiergang, um bie @d)iffe unb ben »^afen ju febcn* 6r 
erf unbigte ftd^, waé eine ©eereife na:^ gnglanb fojien 
m5d)te» 25aé fei, fagte man ii)m, eine Äleinigfeit gegen eine 
ganbreife» ©iefer SSerfuc^ung lonnte er nxå)t »ibcrpel^eh» 
6r jablte mir ba^er ben !leinen SEl^eil mcineS noc^) rudffldn^ 
bigen ©ebattS unb fd)iffte ftdf^ mit einem einjigen jBebienten 
nad) Sonbon ein* 

„9lun jianb icb wicber cinfam in ber SBelt ba* Scb war 
ba§ inbeg fcl)on gewobnt geworben» SKein mufifaiifcbeé 
Salent fonnte mir wenig Reifen in einem ganbe, tt>o jeber 
SSauer ein befferer SKufffer ifl, alS i** S)oå) iatV i^ in 
biefer 3^it mir ein anbereS Salent enDorben; bap meinem 
Swetfe eben fo gut entfpradb, eine gewiffe ®ewanbtbeit ndnus 
lic^ im gelebrten 25iéputiren» 2(uf allén au§ldnbifct)en Unis; 
t)erfttdten unb in ben meijlen Älopern i)mfå)t bie @itte, 
bag an gewiffen SEagen pbilofopbifcbe ©dfee gegen jeben auf^ 
tretenben opponenten t>crtbeibigt werben; unb wcr mit 
einiger ®e»anbtbeit opponirt, l)at 2(nfpriicbc auf ein ®elb:s 
gifcbenl, eine SiRabljeit unb ein gjad}tlagcr* 2(uf biefe 
SBeffe f^lus iä) mxå) burd) bi§ nac^ gnglanb* SSon ©tabt 
i^ 0tabt tvanbcxni, beobaci)Ute i4) V\^^^xv\4)^>^m^r in ber 



r 

I 



APP. IX.] SDcr 9)rebi3cr oon SBafcficlb. 177 

©eiten be§ ©cmalbcS. 2)od) mai}U id) nur wenig S3cmcrÄ 
f ungen* 3d) fanb, Wc bcflc SRcgierungSform fur t)cn Ärmen 
fet t)ie monard^ifc^e, fur ben Sieicben bagegen bie republifus: 
mfd)e; iå) fa^, bag in jebem ganbe ber 8lleid)tt)um bie 
cigentli(^)e greil&eJt ifi; unb bag 9liemanb bie greit)eit fo fcl)r 
Ikbt, bag er nidbt wunfc^en fottte, feine 5!Ritburger mSc^ten 
i^ren SBBiUen unter ben feinigen beugen* 

//3n (Snglanb angelangt, war e§ mein SSorfafe, 25ir, lieber 
SSater, meine linblid)e (Sbtfurc^t ju bejeigen» 25ann woUt' 
idb mic^) ber erpen @):pebition, bie auSgefdbicft wurbe, al§ 
SJreiwiUiger anfcbliegen* 9)iein gntfc^Iug dnberte [xå) jebocb^ 
al§ iåj auf ber ^eimreife einen alten S5ef annten traf; ber ju 
einer ©cbaufpielertruppe ge^Srte, bie fo eben einen ©ommers^ 
jireifjug burd^ ba§ platte ganb madben woUte» 2)ie.®efe(l5 
fcbaft ferien nidbt abgeneigt, miå) unter il&re 9)iitglieber aufs. 
}unel()men» Me fiellten mir iebodb ^i^ SBid^tigfeit meineS 
UntemebmenS t)or* ©aS ^ublifum, fagten fie, fei ein \>wU 
f6pfige§ Ungel^euer, bem nur fel&r gute Ä6pfe gefielen» ©er 
@^aufpieler merbe uberbieS nid)t in einem äage 'gebilbet, 
unb idb m&c^te mir ia nic^t einbilben ju gefaUen obne gen)ifrc 
buret) ^rabition iiberlieferte Äunjlgriffe, bie auf ber SSfib^e, 
unb nur auf ber S5ubne aUein, feit l^unbert ^a\)xcn ublidb 
gewefen* Sie nddbjie ©dbwierigfeit »ar, weld^e éiollen mir 
Abertragen werben foQten, ba alle %ai)zx fc^on befe^t roaxtix. 
@o n)arb ic^ eine B^itlang t)on einem Sb^^^cter jum anbern 
getriebeu/ bid man mic^ enblid^ ju «^oratio'§ Stoiiz hi^ 
^immtC/ an beren ©arj!ellung idb glucFlic^erweife burdb t)cfS 
Srfd^einen ber gegenwdrtigen ©efellfd^aft tjerl^inbert warb»" 



N.B. — The aboye pages from the ' Vicar of Wakefield ' are o£fered to 
the leamer of German to practise from the veiy beginning the reading 
and translating of a connected narrative. The translation may also b^ 
used as a key to the original Tersion, "wYäc^ ^<b xasstÄ^^^siSsjÄ^^ysÄvsss^Ä. 
gbould render literaUj into German. 



178 OERHAN ELEIIENTABT GSAHXAB. [aFP. IX. 



THE VICÅE OF WAEEFIELD. 
Bt OUVEB goldsmith. 

( The numberå indieate the pages of the German vereion.) 

CHAPTER XX. 

THE HISTORY OF A PHILOSOPHIC VAGABOND PURSUING NOVELTT, 

BUT LOSING OONTENT. 

(P. 161) After we Had supped, Mrs. Arnold politelj offered 
to send a couple of her footmen for mj 6on*a baggage,, which 
he at first seemed to dedine ; but upon ber preaamg the request, 
be was obliged to inform ber, tbat a stick and wallet were 
all the movable tbings upon tbis earth tbat be could boast of. 

' Why, ay, my son,' cried I, * you left me but poor, and 
poor I find you are oome back ; and yet I make no doubt you 
bave seen a great deal of the world.* 

'Yes, sir,* replied my son; 'but travelling afVer fortune 
is not the way to aecure ber; and indeed of late I baye 
desisted from the pursuit.* 

' I fancy, sir,* cried Mrs. Arnold, ' tbat the account of 
your adventures would be amusing : the first part of tbem I 
bave often beard from my niece ; but could the company pre- 
vail for the rest, it would be an additional obligation.* 

'Madam,* replied my son, 'I promise you the pleasure 

you bave in bearing will not be half so great as (p. 162) my 

vanity in repeating tbem ; and yet in the wbole narrative I can 

scarcely promise you oue adveuture, as my account is rather of 

wbat I saw, than what I did. The first misfortune of my life, 

whichyou all know, was great; but though it distressed, it could 

not sank me. No person ever bad a better knack at boping 

than I. The iess kind I found foTtvuift kV. oh^ ^tcä^ the more 

I expected jfrom ber anotbei *, and "bem^ uo^ «ä. \j!cÄ\iQto.m qI 



APP. IX.] THE VICAR OF WAKEHELD. 179 

her wheel, every new revolution might lift, but could not 
depresd, me. I proceeded, therefore, towards London in a fine 
moming^ no way uneasy about to-morrow, but cbeerful as 
tbe birds that carolled by the road ; and comforted myself 
with reflecting, that London was the mart where abilities of 
every kind were sure of meeting distinction and reward. 

* Upon my arrival in town, sir, my first care was to deliver 
your letter of recommendation to our cousin, who was himself 
in little better circumstances than I. My first scheme, you 
know, sir, was to be usher to an academy, and I asked his 
advice on the afiair. Our cousin received the proposal with a 
true sardonic grin. " Ay," cried be, " this is indeed a very 
pretty career that has been chaöced out for you. I have 
been an usher at a boarding-school myself; and may I die by 
an anodyne necklace, but I had rather be an under- tumkey in 
Newgate. I was up early and late ; I was browbeat by the 
master, hated for my ugly face by the mistress, worried by the 
boys within, and never perniitted to stir out to meet civility 
abroad. But are you sure you are fit for a school ? Let me 
•examine you a little. Have you been bred apprentice to the 
business ? — No. Then you won't do for a school. Can you 
(p. 163) dress the boys' hair ? — No. Then you won*t do for a 
school. Can you lie three in a bed ? — ^No. Then you will never 
do for a school. Have you got a good stomach ? — ^Yes. Then 
you will by no means do for a school. No, sir, if you are for 
a genteel, easy profession, bind yourself seven years as an 
apprentice to turn a cutler's wheel ; but avoid a school, by 
any means. Yet come,^* continued he, ^* I see you are a lad of 
spirit and some leaming — what do you think of commencing 
author, like me ? You have read in books, no doubt, of men 
of genius starving at the trade. At present, I'll show you 
förty very duU fellows about town that live by it in opulence, 
AU honest jjog-trot men, who go on smoothly and dully, and 
write history and politics, and are praised : m^xi^ ^^^Via^^^ 
tbey been bred cobblers, would a\\ >^«a "M^^ \ä:^^ cfc^ 
mended aboea, but never made tikiera,^^ 

x2 



180 GERMAN ELEMENTÄRT GRAMMAR. [aPP. IX. 

* Finding that there was no great degree of gentility affixed 
to the character of an usher, I resolved to accept his proposal ; 
and having tbe highest respect for literature, hailed the 
antiqua Mäter of Grub Street with reverence. I thougbt it 
my gloiy to pursue a track which Dryden and Otway trod 
before me. I considered the goddess of this region as the 
parent of excellence ; and however an intercourse with the 
world might give us good sense, the poverty she entailed I 
STipposed to be the nurse of genius I Big with these reflec- 
tions, I sate down, and finding that the best things remained to 
be said on the wrong side, I resolved to write a book that 
should be whoUy new. I therefore dressed up three paradoxes 
with some ingenuity. (P. 164) They were false, indeed^ but 
they were new. The jewels of truth have been so ofien im- 
ported by others, that nothing was left for me to import but 
Bome splendid things that at a distance looked every bit as 
well. Witness, you powers, what fancied importance sate 
perched upon my quiU while I was writing. The whole 
learned world, I made no doubt, would rise to oppose my 
systems ; but then I was prepared to oppose the whole learned 
world. Like the porcupine, I sate self-collected, with a quill 
pointed against every opposer.' 

* Well said, my boy I ' cried I, * and what subject did you 
treat upon ? I hope you did not pass över the important sub- 
ject of Monogamy. But I interrupt, go on ; you published 
your paradoxes ; well, and what did the learned world say to 
your paradoxes ? ' 

* Sir,' replied my son, * the learned world said nothing to 
my paradoxes — nothing at all, sir. ' Every man of them was 
employed in praising his friends and himself, or condenming 
his enemies : and, unfortunately, as I had neither, I suffered 
the crueUest mortification — neglect. 

* As I was meditating one day in a coffee-house on the fete 
of my paradoxes^ a little man happening to enter the room, 

placed himaelf in the box \)eiorft ine, anöi ^^x ^ma preli- 
mizmrjr discourse, finding me to "be a «ä5!qsA»x^ ^^^ qvä ^ 



APP. IX.] THB VICAR OF WAKEFIELD. 181 

bundle of proposals, begging me to subscribe to a new edition 
lie was going to give to .the world of Propertius with notes. 
This demand necessarily produced a reply that I had no 
money ; and that concession led him to inquire into the natnre 
of my expectations. Finding that my expectations were just 
as great'a& my purse, " Isee," cried he, (p. 166) "you are unac- 
quainted with the town — I'll teach you a part of it. Look at 
these proposals; upon these very proposals 1 have subsisted 
very comfortably for twelve years. The moment a nobleman 
retums from his travels, a Creolian arrives from Jamaica, or a 
dowager from her country seat, I strike for a subscription. I 
first besiege their hearts with flattery, and then pour in my 
proposals at the breach. If they subscribe readily the first 
time, I renew my request to beg a dedication fee. J£ they let 
me have that, I smite them once more for ecgraving their coat 
of arms at the top. Thus," continued he, "I live by vanity, 
and laugh at it. But, between ourselves, I am now too well 
known, I should be glad to borrow your face a bit ; a noble- 
man of distinction has just returned from Italy ; my face is 
familiar to his porter ; but if you bring this copy of verses, 
my life for it you succeed, and we divide the spoil." ' 

' Bless US, George ! ' cried 1 ; * and is this the employment 
of poets now ? Do men of their exalted talen ts thus stoop to 
beggary ? Can they so far disgrace their calling, as to make 
a vile traffic of praise for bread ? * 

* Oh, no, sir,' returned he, * a true poet can never be so 
base ; for wherever there is genius, there is pride. The crea- 
tures I now describe are only beggars in rhyme. The reiil 
poet, as he braves every hardship for fame, so he is equally a 
coward to contempt ; and none but those who are unworthy 
protection condescend to solicit it. 

' Having a mind too proud to stoop to such indignities, (p. 
166) and yet a fortune too humble to hazard a second attem^t 
for &me, I was now obliged to take a ixi^iÖLÖXfe ^lövsccsfc^ ^cä.-htcnNä 
for bread. But I was unqualified. foi a ^xofeesaoo. -w\iRÄ^ \ss«t^ 
induatry idone was to ensure Bucceaa, 1 <y3>3\.^ ^Q^» ^s^.^^"^ 

1 

j 



182 GERMAN ELEMENTART 6RAMMAR. [aPP. IX. 

my lurking passion for applaiise ; but usually consumed tliat 
tiine in efforts after excellence which takes np but little room, 
when it should have been more advantageonsly employed in 
the diffusive productions of fruitful mediocrity. My little 
piece would therefore come forth in the midst of periodical 
. publications, unnoticed and unknown. The public were more 
importantly employed, than to observe the easy simplicity of 
my style, or the harmony of my periods. Sheet after sheet 
was thrown off to oblivion. My essays were bnried among 
the essays upon liberty, Eastem tales, and cures for the bite 
of a mad dog ; while Philautus, Philalethes, Philelutheros, 
and Philanthropos, all wrote better, becauöe they wrote fester 
than I. 

* Now, therefore, I began to associate with none but disap- 
pointed authors, like myself, who praised, deplored, and 
despised each other. The satisfaction we fomid in every 
celebrated writer^s attempts was inversely as their merits. I 
found that no genius in another could please me. My imfor- 
tunate paradoxes had entirely dried up that sourcé of comfort. 
I could neither read nor write with satisfaction ; for excellence 
in another was my aversion, and writing was my trade. 

' In the midst of these gloomy reiloctions, as I was one day 
sitting on a bench in St. James*s Park, a young gentleman of 
distinction, who had been {jp. 167) my intimate acquaintance 
at the university, approached me. We saluted each other with 
some hesitation, he almost ashamed of being known to one 
who made so shabby an appearance, and I afraid of a repulse. 
But my suspicions soon vanished ; for Ned Thomhill was at 
the bottom a very good-natured fellow.* 

* What did you say, George?* interrupted I. — ^*Thomhill, 
was not that his name ? It can certainly be no other than 
my landlord.' 

^ Bleaa me V cried Mrs. Arnold; 'is Mr. Thomhill so near 
a neigbbour of yours? He Yiaa \o\i^\i^«Ji «k 6:iend in our 
^uniljr, and we expect a viatftomVviiiv^oT^'^^ 

'My åriend^B first care,' contmue^ m^ wo.^ '^w^ Vi lÄte 



APP. IX. J THE YIGAR OF WAKEFIELD. 183 

my appearanoe by a very fine suit of his own clothes, and 
tben I was admitted to his table, upon the footing of half- 
friend, lialf-underling. My business was to att^id him at 
auctions, to put him in spirits when he sate for his pioture, to 
take the left hand in his chariot when not filled by another, 
and to assist at tattering a kip, as the phrase was, when we 
had a mind for a frolic. Besides this, I had twenty other 
little 6mplo3rment8 in the &mily. I was to do many small 
things without bidding : to carry the cork-screw ; to stånd 
god&ther to all the butler's children ; to sing when I was bid ; 
to be never out of humour ; always to be humble, and, if I 
could, to be very happy. 

'In the honourable post, however, I was not without a 
rival. A captain of mariners, who was formed for the place 
by nature, opposed me in my patron's affections. His mother 
had been laundress to a man of quality, and thus he early 
acquired a taste for pimping and pedigree. As this gentleman 
made it the study of his life (p. 168) to be acqnainted with 
lords, though he was dismissed from several for his stnpidity, 
yet he found many of them, who were as duU as himself, that 
permitted his assiduities. As jQattery was his trade, he practised 
it with the easiest address imaginable ; but it came awkward 
and stiff irom me ; and as every day my patron's desire for 
flattery increased, so every hour being better acqnainted with 
his defects, I became more imwilling to give it. 

' Thus I was once more fairly going to give up the field to 
the captain, when my friend found occasion for my assistance. 
This was nothmg less than to fight a duel for him, with a 
gentleman whose sister it was pretended he had used ill. I 
readily complied with his request ; and though I see you are 
displeased at my conduct, yet as it was a debt indispensably 
due to firiendship, I could not reAise. I undertook the afiair, 
disarmed my antagonist, and soon after had the pleasure of 
finding that the lady was only a vroTcvBXi oi ^^ Vywx^.^^xÄ. *^^ 
fellow ber bully and a sharpex. Tloia Y^<fe<i«^ ^^ ^x^^ ^"^^ 
repaid with the warmest pTofeaaion^ oi ^^vXjvXää^N^"^*^ 



184 GERMAN ELEMENTART 6RAMMAR. [aPP. IX. 

friend was to leave town in a few days, he knew no other 
method of serving me, but by recommending me to his unclej 
Sir William Thomhill, and another nobleman of great distinc- 
tion, who enjoyed a post under the Government. When he 
was gone, my first care was to carry his recommendatory 
letter to his uncle, a man whose character for every virtue 
was universal, yet just. I was received by his servants with 
the most hospitable smiles; for the looks of the domestics 
ever transmit their masterns benevolence. 

' Being shown into a grand apartment, where Sir William 
soon came to me, I delivered my message and letter, which he 
read, and after pausing some minutes, " Pray sir," cried he, 
(p. 169) " inform me what you have done for my kinsman to 
deserve this warm recommendation ? But I suppose, sir, I 
guess your merits — ^you have fought for him : and so you would 
expect a reward from me for being the instrument of his vices. 
I wish, sincerely wish, that my present refusal may be some 
punishment for your guilt ; but still more, that it may be some 
inducement to your repentance." The severity of this rebuke 
I bore patiently, because I knew it was just. My whole 
expectations now, therefore, lay in my letter to the great man. 
As the doors of the nobility are almost ever beset with 
beggars, all ready to thrust in some sly petition, I found it no 
easy matter to gain admittance. However, after bribing the 
servants with half my worldly fortune, I was at last shown 
into a spacious apartment, my letter being previously sent up 
for his lordship^s inspection, During this anxious interval, I 
had full time to look round me. Every thing was grand and 
of happy contrivance ; the paintings, the fomiture, the gild- 
ings, petrified me with awe, and raised my idea of the owner. 
Ah, thought I to myself, how very great must the possessor of 
all these things be, who carries in his head the business of the 
stftte, and whose house dlsplays half the wealth of a kingdom ; 
Bure bia genius must be unfat\iOTöa.\Aft I 
'During these awful reÄecXivoTiÄ \ \iC5Ä^ ^ ^^^ ^jjotm 
peaviljr /orwardL Ab, this la tlcv^ gc^^Ä. m«ii\CYKvaråd\ ^^^w 



APP. IX.] THE VICAR OF WAKEFIELD. 185 

was onlj a chambermaid. Another foot was heard soon afl«r. 
Tbis must be be I No, it was only the great man*s valet de 
chambre. At last bis lordsbip actually made bis appearance. 
" Are yoii," cried be, " tbe bearer of tbis bere letter ? " I 
answered witb a bow. " I leam by tbis/' continued be, " as 

bow tbat" But just at tbat instan t (p. 170) a servant de- 

livered bim a card ; and witbout taking ftirtber notice, be went 
out of tbe room, and left me to digest my own bappiness at 
leisure. I saw no more of bim, till told by tbe footman tbat bis 
lordsbip was going to bis coacb at tbe door. Down I imme- 
diately followed, and joined my voice to tbat of tbree or four 
more, wbo came like me, to petition for favours. His lordsbip, 
bowever, went too fast for us, and was galning bis cbariot- 
door witb large strides, wben I ballooed out to know if I was 
to bave any reply. lie was by tbis time got in, and muttered 
an answer, balf of wbicb only I beard, tbe otber balf was löst 
in tbe rattling of bis cbariot-wbeels. I stood for some time 
witb my neck stretcbed out, in tbe posture of one tbat was 
listening to catcb tbe glorious sounds, till, looking roimd me, 
I found myself alone at bis lordsbip's gate. 

* My patience,' continued my son, * was now quite ex- 
bausted ; stung witb tbe tbousand indignities I bad met witb, 
I was willing to cast myself away, and only wanted tbe gulf 
to receive me. I regarded myself as one of tbose vile tbings tbat 
nature designed sbould be tbrown by into ber lumber-room, 
tbere to perisb in obscurity. I bad stiU bowever balf a 
guinea left, and of tbat I tbougbt fortune berself sbould * not 
deprive me : but in order to be sure of tbis, I was resolved to 
go instantly and spend it wbile I bad it, and tben trust to 
occurrences for tbe rest. As I was going along witb tbis 
resolution, it bappened tbat Mr. Crispe's office seemed in- 
vitiiigly open to give me a welcome reception. In tbis office 
Mr. Crispe kindly offers aU bis Majesty's subjects a generous 
promise of tbirty pounds a-year, for yrbicXv ^t^tccssä ^ä^ *öbss?^ 
give in retum ia their liberty for \\fe, «ltA ^^Tvs^ssass^^»^'»^*» 
him tannsport them to America aa sAaNrea. 



186 GERSfAN ELEMENTART GRAMMAR. [aPP. IX. 

(P. 171) 'I was happy at finding a place where I could lose 
mj fears in desperation, and entered this cell, for it had the ap< 
pearance of one, with the devotion of a monastic. Here I fbund 
a nnmber of poor creatures, all in circumstances like mjself, 
expecting the arrival of Mr. Crispe, presenting a true epttome 
of English impatience. Each untractable aoiil at Tariance 
with fortune, wreaked her injurjies on their own hearts : but 
Mr. Griäpe at last came down, and all our murmnrs were 
hiiahed. He deigned to regard me with an air of peculiar 
approbation; and indeed he was the first man who for a 
month past talked to me with smiles. After a few questions, 
he found I was fit for everything in the world. He paused 
awhile upon the properest means of providing for me ; and 
alapping his forehead, as if he had found it, assnred me, that 
thare was at that time an embassj talked of from the synod of 
Pennsylvania to the Chickasaw Indians, and that he would 
use his interest to get me made secretary. 

' I knew in my heart that the fellow lied, and yet his pro- 
mise gave me pleasure, there was something so magnificent in 
lihe sound. I fairly therefore divided my half-guinea, one 
half of which went to be added to his thirty thousand ponnds, 
and with the other half I reaolved to go to the next tavem, to 
be there more happy than he. 

' As I was going out with that resolution, I was met at the 

door by the captain of a ship, with whom I had formerly 

some little acquaintance, and he agreed to be my companion 

över a bowl of punch. As I never chose to make a secret of 

my circumstances, he assured me that I was upon the veiy 

^point of ruin in listening to the office-keeper's promises ; for 

that he only designed to sell me to the plantations. ^' But,*^ con- 

tinued he, " I &ncy you might by a much shorter voyage be 

very easily put into a genteel way of bread. Take my (p. 172) 

advice. My ship sails to-morrow for Amsterdam. What if 

you go in het as a pasaengex 7 TYie moment you land, all you 

bave to do IB to teach the Dutc\iTDL«äiXi'Eiii<^^,«sAYSS.^«ct^^ 

youll get pupils and money euoxx^. \«a:^V^^ ^wi.\ÄÄsst. 



APP. IX.] THE VICAR OF WAKEFIELIX 187 

Stånd Engli8h,"Rdcled he, "by this time, or the deuce is in it." 
I confidently assnred him of that; but expressed a doubt 
whether the Dutch would be willing to leam English. He 
affirmed with an oath that they were fond of it to distraction ; 
and upon that affirmation I agreed with his proposal, and em- 
baxked the next day to teach the Dutch English in Holland. 
The wind was &ir, our voyage short, and afler haying paid 
my passage with half my movables, I found myself, as fallen 
from the skies, a stranger in one of the principal streets of 
Amsterdam. In this situation I was unwilling to let any time 
paas tmemployed in teaching. I addressed myself therefore to 
two or three of those I met, whose appearance seemed most 
promising ; but it was impossible to make ourselves mutually 
understood. It was not till this very moment I recoUected, 
that in order to teach the Dutchmen English, it was necessary 
that they should first teach me Dutch. How I came to över- 
look so obvious an objection, is to me amazing ; but certain 
it is, I overlooked it. 

* This scheme thus blown up, I had some thoughts of fairly 
shipping back to England again; but falling into company 
with an Irish student who was retuming from Louvain, our 
conversation tuming upon topics of literature (for, by the way, 
it may be observed that I always forgot the meanness of my 
circumstances when I could converse upon such subjects), 
from him I leamed that there were not two men in his whole 
university who imderstood Greek. This amazed me. I in- 
stan tly resolved to travel to Louvain, and there Ii ve by (p. 178) 
teaching Greek: and in this design I was heartened by my 
brother-student, who threw out some hints that a fortune might 
he got by it. 

* I set boldly forward the next moming. Every day less- 
ened the burden of my movables, like ^sop and his basket 
of bread ; for I paid them for my lodgings to the Dutch as I 
travelled on. When I came to Louvain,! viwmkärJw^^^^^Nr» 
go sneakii^ to the lower profeaftOTa, \)m\. o^ex^ \&\Ässt56^"as?5 
talentB to the principal himself . 1 ^em^, \i».^ ^^itoöXXwöRR^ «ög 



188 GERMAN ELEMENTÄRT GRAMMAR. [aPP. IX. 

offered him my service as a master of the Greek language, 
which I had been told was a desideratum in his imiversitj. 
The principal seemed at first to doubt of my abilities : but of 
these I offered to convince him, by turning a part of any Greek 
author he should fix upon in to Latin. Finding me perfectly 
eamest in my proposal, he addressed me thus : " You see me, 
young man," continued he ; "I never leamed Greek, and I 
don^t find that I have ever missed it. I have had a doctor*s 
cap and gown without Greek ; I have ten thousand florins a- 
year without Greek ; I eat heartily without Greek ; and, in 
short," continued he, " as I don't know Greek, I do not believe 
there is any good in it." 

* I was now too far from home to think of returning ; so I 
resolved to go forward. I had some knowledge of music, with 
a tolerable voice, and now tumed what was my amusement 
into a present means of subsistence. I passed among the 
harmless peasants of Flanders, and among such of the French 
as were poor enough to be very merry ; for I erer found thera 
sprightly in proportion to their wants. Whenever I ap- 
proached a peasant^s house towards nightfall, I played one of 
my most merry tunes, and that procured me not only a lodging, 
but subsistence for the next day. I once or twice attempted 
(p. 174) to play for people of fashion ; but they always thought 
my performance odious, and never rewarded me even with a 
trifle. This was to me the more extraordinary, as, whenever I 
used in better days to play for company, when playing was my 
amusement, my music never failed to throw them into raptures, 
and the ladies especially ; but as it was now my only means, 
it was received with contempt : a proof how ready the world 
is to underrate those talents by which a man is supported. 

* In this manner I proceeded to Paris, with no design but 
just to look about me, and then to go forward. The people 
of Paris are much fonder of strangers that have money than 

thoae that have wit. As I couid not boa.at much of either, I 

was no great &vourite. After -walkin^ 2!)oQvA>öcÄ\ft^xife^^ 

or £ve dajrs, and seeing the outaidea oi ^^\i^"aN.>vcsv>sfia^\^^ 



APP. IX.] THE VICAR OF WAKEFIELD. 18^ 

preparing to leave this retreat of venal hospitality, when pass- 
ing through one of the principal streets, whom should I meeti 
but our cousin to whom you first recommended me. This 
meeting was very agreeable to me, and I believe not displeas- 
ing to him. He inquired into the natnre of my journey to 
Paris, and informed me of his own business there, which was 
to collect pictures, medals, intaglios, and antiques of all kinds, 
for a gentleman in London, who had just stepped into taste 
and a large fortune. I was the more surprised at seeing our 
cousin pitched upon for this office, as he himself had oflen 
aflsured me he knew nothing of the matter. Upon asking how 
he had been taught the art of a cognoscento so very sfuddenly, 
he assured me that nothing was more easy. The whole 
secret consisted in a strict adherence to two rules : the one, 
always to observe the picture might hare been better if the 
painter had taken more pains ; and the other, to praise the 
Vorks of Pietro Penigino. " But," says he, " as I once taught 
you how to be an author in London, I'll now undertake to 
instruct you in the art of picture-buying in Paris." 

(P. 175) * With this proposal I veiy readily closed, as it was 
living, and now all my ambition was to lire. I went therefore 
to his lodgings, improved my dress by his assistance^ and afler 
some time accompanied him to auctions of pictures, where the 
English gentry were expected to be purchasers. I was not a 
little surprised at his intimacy with people of the best fashion, 
who referred themselves to his judgment upon every picture 
or medal, as to an unerring standard of taste. He made very 
good use of my assistance upon these occasions ; for when 
asked his opinion, he would gravely take me aside and ask 
mine, shrug, look wise, return and assure the company that 
he could giye no opinion upon an afiair of ro much im- 
portance. Yet there was sometimes an occasion for a more 
supported assurance. I remember to have seen him, after 
giving his opinion that the colouring of & "^\atQx^ ^^ä TiS5k\. 
mellow enough, very deliberately tak^ ä Xynajäo. -^xio. Nsrt^^^ 
vMmiab, that was accidentally lyiiig\>75 ^^^ ''^^^ ^ cf^^s. 



190 GERICAN ELEHEirrART QRAMMAR. [aPP. IX, 

piece with great composure before all tlie company, and tben 
ask if he had not improved tLe tints. 

^ When he had finished his commission in Paris, he left me 
strongly recommended to spveral men of distinction as a 
person very proper for a travelling tutor ; and ailer some time 
I was employed in that capacity by a gentleman who bronght 
his ward to Paris, in order to set him forward on his tour 
through Europé. I was to be the young gentleman^s goyemor, 
with a proviso that he should always be permitted to govem 
himsel£ My pupil, in &ct, understood the art of guiding in 
money concems much better than I. He was heir to a fortime 
of about two himdred thousand pounds, left him by an uncle in 
the West Indies ; (p. 176) and his guardians, to qualify him 
for the management of it, had bound him apprentice to an 
attomey. Thus ararice was his prevailing passion : all his 
questions on the road were how money might be saved: 
which was the least expensiye course of travel : whether any- 
thing could be bought that would tum to accoxmt when dis* 
posed of again in London. Such curiosities on the way as 
could be seen £>r nothing he was ready enough to look at ; 
but if the sight of them was to be paid for, he usually asserted 
that he had been told they were not worth seeing. He never 
paid a bill that he would not observe how amazingly eicpen- 
flive travelling was, and all tbis though he was not yet twenty- 
one. When arrived at Leghoru, as we took a walk to look at 
the port and shipping, he inquired the expense of the pasH- 
age by sea home to England. This, he was informed, was 
but a trifle compared to his retuming by land : he was there- 
före unable to withstand the temptation ; so paying me the 
8mall part of my salary that was due, he took leave, and em- 
barked with only one attendant for London. 

* I now, ^erefore, was left once more upon the world at 

}axge; but then it was a thing I was used to. However, my 

skUl in muaic could avaal me liotbmg in a country where 

^very peasant was a better muaicvan. \]tiMi\\ \>«A»\s^ >i\aa time 

J had &cqvdxeå another talent, ^\iici\i waswct^^m^ ^xKc^wefc^ 



APP. IX.] THE VICÅR OF WAKEFIELD. 191 

well, and this was a skill in disputation. In all the foreign 
universities and convents, there are, upon certain days, phi- 
losophical theses maintained against everj adventitious dispu- 
tant ; for which, if the champion opposes with any dexterity, 
he can claim a gratuitj in money, a dinner, and a bed for one 
night. In this manner, therefore, I fought my way towards 
England, walked along from city to city, examined mankind 
more nearly, and, if I may so express it, saw both (p. 177) sides 
of the picture. My remarks, however, are but few : I fonnd 
that monarchy was the best government for the poor to live 
in, and commonwealths for the rich. I fomid that riches, in 
general, were in every coimtry another name for freedom ; 
and that no man is so fond of liberty himself an not to be 
desirons of subjecting the.will of some individuals in society 
to bis own. 

* Upon my arrival in England I resolved to pay my respects 
first to you, and then to enlist as a volunteer in the first ex- 
pedition that was going forward ; but on my joumey down, 
my resolutions were changed, by meeting an old acquaintance 
who I found belonged to a company of comedians that were 
going to make a summer campaign in the coimtry. The com- 
pany seemed not much to disapprove of me for an associate. 
They all, however, apprised me of the importance of the task 
at which I aimed ; that the public was a many-headed mon- 
ster, and that only such as had very good heads could please 
it ; that acting was not to be learned in a day ; and that, 
without some traditional shniga which had been on the stage, 
and only on the stage, these hundred years, I could never pre- 
tend to please. The next difficulty was in fitting me with 
parts, as almost every character was in keeping I was driven 
for some tirae from one character to another, till at last Horatio 
was fixed upon, which the presence of the present company 
has happily hindered me from acting.' 



Sp<^iswooåe i: Co., Printer* ^ J^ew-strcct Square, Lon^o1^« 



^. 



I 




